Revit Architecture 2009

Metric Tutorials

240A1-050000-PM04A

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved. Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the

copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Getting Chapter 1

Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Chapter 2 Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating Details with Revit Architecture . . . . . Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data . Model-Based Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . Keynoting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture . Project Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Detail Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . Project Title Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 28 . 31 . 38 . 41 . 42 . 47 . 51

Developing Your Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Creating the Project . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Levels . . . . . . . . Creating a Column Grid . . . . . . . Adding Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Foundation . . . . . . . . Changing Structural Member Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 . 60 . 64 . 72 . 77 . 82 . 85

v

Linking the Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adding Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Adding a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Adding a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Creating a Drop Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Creating Multi-Level Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Adding Entourage and Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Adding a Service Core to the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . . . . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View . Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 . 155 . 159 . 166 . 172 . 175 . 176 . 179 . 182 . 184 . 187 . 192 . 192 . 196 . 201 . 202

Chapter 5

Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 . 207 . 213 . 217 . 220 . 221 . 226 . 228 . 230 . 232 . 238 . 246 . 249 . 249 . 251 . 254 . 258 . 258 . 260 . 260

Chapter 6

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

vi | Contents

Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 270 . 270 . 279 . 281 . 286 . 289 . 290

Chapter 7

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 . 298 . 304 . 308 . 310 . 312 . 314 . 319 . 320 . 321 . 321 . 323

Chapter 8

Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 . 339 . 345 . 345 . 347 . 347 . 351 . 356 . 356 . 358 . 360 . 361 . 367 . 368 . 368 . 369

Chapter 9

Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Exterior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 . 392 . 399 . 403 . 407 . 411 . 412 . 415

Contents | vii

Creating the Interior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 419 . 424 . 425 . 428 . 430

Chapter 11

Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-orienting the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirroring the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 . 432 . 433 . 435 . 437 . 438 . 439 . 440 . 440 . 443 . 444 . 444 . 447 . 447 . 448 . 454 . 454

Chapter 12

Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 . 459 . 460 . 462 . 466 . 467 . 469 . 471 . 472 . 476 . 478 . 481 . 484 . 491 . 492 . 499 . 503

Importing and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Creating a Building from Mass Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Flat Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Adding Mullions to the Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

viii | Contents

Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel Additional Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sloped Glazings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storefront System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain System by Lines . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 539 . 539 . 541 . 544 . 548 . 548 . 550 . 552

Chapter 15

Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Low Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 . 557 . 562 . 565 . 567 . 571 . 572 . 574 . 576 . 578 . 586 . 587 . 588 . 590

Chapter 16

Area

Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

Using Area Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schemes and Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

Chapter 17

Massing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Using Massing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model . Using Swept Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Family Files in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Mass Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Placing New Mass Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Elements with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . Creating Walls by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Floors by Picking Masses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mass Study Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements Created from Massings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 . 604 . 610 . 611 . 616 . 616 . 618 . 621 . 624 . 624 . 627 . 628 . 631 . 634 . 638 . 640 . 644 . 649

Chapter 18

Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 . 653 . 661 . 665 . 668 . 668

Contents | ix

Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674

Chapter 19

Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Using Site Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings . Creating Topographic Subregions . . . . . . . . Grading the Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Site and Parking Components . . . . . Creating Parking Space Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 . 678 . 684 . 689 . 690 . 698 . 703 . 706 . 710 . 713

Chapter 20

Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717 . 718 . 718 . 722 . 726 . 729 . 734

Chapter 21

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739 . 740 . 750 . 757

Chapter 22

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768

Chapter 23

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772 . 772 . 781 . 784 . 786 . 789 . 789 . 791 . 795 . 796 . 797

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801 Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805

x | Contents

Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 807 . 808 . 811 . 811 . 815 . 817 . 820 . 825 . 827 . 828 . 831 . 831 . 832 . 837 . 839 . 842 . 843 . 845

Contents | xi

xii

Getting Started

1

2

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2009 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Architecture works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit Architecture tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit Architecture project from a template file.

3

The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Architecture. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Architecture.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Architecture projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required. For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse.

Accessing Training Files | 5

6 | Chapter 1 Introduction . construction. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. If you move the partition. 12 Select DefaultMetric. the floor or roof remains connected. ■ ■ How does Revit Architecture 2009 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. the door retains this relationship to the partition. schedules.10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. You learn the terminology. Understanding the Basics In this lesson. how to navigate the user interface. In this case. If the length of the elevation is changed. In this case. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. review the Revit Architecture templates. and click Open. the hierarchy of elements. and open Metric\Templates. Templates are available for specific building types: commercial. the parameter is one of association or connection. hence. and schedules required for a building project. and customize the project as necessary. the operation of the software is parametric. scope. Revit Architecture collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. 13 Click OK. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. and plans. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. 11 In the Choose Template dialog. The Revit Architecture parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. you will use the default template.rte. quantities. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. and residential. and phases when you need it. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Architecture: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Architecture provides. drawings. As you work in drawing and schedule views. drawing sheets. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. every drawing sheet. sections. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit Architecture is built. click Training Files. 2D and 3D view. For most tutorial projects. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. and Revit Architecture coordinates that change through the entire project. What is Revit Architecture 2009? The Revit Architecture platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. you learn what Revit Architecture is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. In the Revit Architecture model. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters.

Datum elements help to define project context. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view.When you change something. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. you can define new parametric elements in Revit Architecture. For example. They help to describe or document the model. and 2D detail components. walls and roofs are hosts. programming is not required. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. For example. levels. windows. filled regions. For example. tags. Examples include detail lines. Revit Architecture uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. grids. For example. and reference planes are datum elements. Understanding the Basics | 7 . For example. Revit Architecture uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. ■ This implementation provides flexibility for designers. They display in relevant views of the model. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. and keynotes are annotation elements. walls. doors. and cabinets are model components. If you can draw. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. tags. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. and roofs are model elements. dimensions. Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. For example. windows. doors. dimensions.

and drawings of the design. top of wall. some terms are unique to Revit Architecture. Understanding Revit Architecture 2009 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Architecture are common. Revit Architecture classifies elements by categories. first floor. from geometry to construction data. industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. elevation views. families. schedules. you must be in a section or elevation view. for example. for example. section views. This information includes components used to design the model. you do nothing to establish these relationships. you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. views of the project. floors. Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan next to it Element: When creating a project. The project file contains all information for the building design. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. Project: In Revit Architecture. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. or bottom of foundation.In Revit Architecture. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls. To place levels. Most often. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. Revit Architecture makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. and types. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. 8 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. and so forth). Often. By using a single project file. you can explicitly control them. However. and ceilings. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. such as roofs. In other cases.

6-panel colonial doors could be considered one family. categories of model elements include walls and beams. In the steps that follow. although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. System families include walls.Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. ceilings. and similar graphical representation. and levels. A type can also be a style. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. However. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. specifically its clear user interface. The Revit Architecture window is arranged to make navigation easy. dimensions. Families are either component families or system families: ■ Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. For example. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. making it easy to understand what each button represents. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled. Navigating the User Interface One of the advantages of Revit Architecture is its ease of use. learning Revit Architecture is much easier. In the following illustration. For example. roofs. For example. floors. ■ Type: Each family can have several types. Revit Architecture uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. System families can be transferred between projects. the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. the user interface is labeled. ■ ■ ■ Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. A type can be a specific size of a family. you can create different types of walls with different compositions. Navigating the User Interface | 9 . identical use. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. you navigate and become familiar with the user interface.

new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. This creates a new project based on the default template. click (New). 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based. By default. The title bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open.Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. In addition.

The toolbar buttons represent common commands. The bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. The Toolbar 4 Click Window menu ➤ Toolbar. Many of the commands have shortcut keys. and View. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. Click View menu ➤ Zoom. Another time-saving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. which are listed on the menu. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR.The Menu Bar 3 The menu bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn the text labels on or off using the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. A shortcut menu displays a list of available commands. you type the required key combination to perform the command. While working in the drawing area. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . Edit. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. There are several toolbars across the top of the window beneath the menu bar. For example. depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected.

For example. when you add a door. The list of elements in the Type Selector is identical to the elements listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. The design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. You can use the Type Selector in 2 ways: ■ You can select an element type before you add the element to the building model. 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list.6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. When you select the Door tool. a door type is specified. The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. select the drop-down list to see the walls that are available. On the left side of the Options Bar. 9 In the Type Selector. the door type that displays in the Type Selector is the door type that will be added to the building model. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available in the project. 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall.

immediately below the Type Selector. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. The Show Design Bars dialog displays. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog. containing buttons grouped by function. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . In the drawing area.■ You can use the Type Selector to change an element type after it has been added to the building model. you can select any element and then change its type using the Type Selector.

click the tab in the Design Bar.11 Click OK. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . In the Project Browser. TIP You can control the visibility of each tab by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the shortcut menu. The respective commands display on the Design Bar. select Views (all). Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for adding annotation symbols and creating sheet details for construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered images Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for creating conceptual designs with masses Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to the project Construction tab: commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands in a tab. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser.

The browser is dockable. walls. sheets. schedules. reports. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. 3D). windows). ■ ■ ■ 13 In the Type Selector. double-click its name. and groups. delete. family category (doors. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. so you can reposition it by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add. and group name. elevations. The browser is organized by view type (floor plans.You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. and rename views. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. families. families. To open a view. Expand or collapse the browser list by clicking the + or – next to the name.

" TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. In this case.14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. the status bar provides information regarding what you should do next. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Do not click. The cursor displays as a pencil. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for views and sheets. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. click Wall. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . After creating a browser organization scheme. In the bottom left corner of the window. click Cancel. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area.

The elevation symbol consists of two parts: the main symbol and the elevation directional arrow (a triangle). and then click a specific menu command or button for help. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Architecture Help window. press F1 for help. When attempting to select a specific element in a complex or crowded view. Elevations : Elevation : Elevation 5. If no Help button displays. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture In this exercise. Windows: From any window. Revit Architecture 2009 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Architecture 2009 Help. and the topic specific to the dialog opens. In addition. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. Toolbar: From the toolbar. After you are familiar with these tasks. Click the Help button. Tooltips: To see tooltips. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. you can use the status bar and TAB to switch between elements and select the desired element. You can also press SHIFT+F1. click on the Standard toolbar. 20 Press TAB. You can use this tri-pane. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. The status bar also provides information.18 On the Design Bar. There are several tools that help you find information. notice that the name of the highlighted element is Views : Elevation : West. Make sure you place the cursor over the elevation directional arrow. When you place the cursor over an element. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. click Modify to end the Wall command. press F1 for context-sensitive help. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Architecture tasks that are included in the tutorials. find a keyword on the Index tab. You can access context-sensitive help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Many dialogs include Help buttons. In the status bar. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. context-sensitive help is available for many parts of the user interface. and notice that the highlighted element switches to the main elevation symbol. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance using Settings menu ➤ Options. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. regarding selected elements in a view. in conjunction with tooltips. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 17 . Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session. You can control the status bar visibility from the Window menu. it highlights and the status bar displays the element name. it will be easier to work in Revit Architecture and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. It highlights when the cursor is over it.

you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. In the drawing area. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. For example. click Training Files. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x).Use zoom commands to adjust the view In the tutorials.rvt. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. the view zooms out from the building model. 5 On the View toolbar. In the following steps. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. There are several ways to access zoom options.

the view zooms in on the selected area. If you do not have a wheel mouse.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. 10 To display SteeringWheels. this is referred to as a crossing selection. To modify or add snap increments. 8 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. 6 Click Zoom To Fit. use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out. 12 Click and hold the mouse button. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. As you move the mouse. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. The view of the building model is sized to fit the available window. When you release the mouse button. Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. NOTE As you zoom in and out. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 19 . 7 Click in the drawing area. on the View toolbar. 9 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. . click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. 11 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights.

15 To exit the wheel. referred to as shape handles. click Settings menu ➤ Options. and then using the Zoom tool again. expand Floor Plans. When drawing or modifying a building model. 14 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. Resize elements using drag controls 16 In the Project Browser. Small blue dots. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . display along the ends. To define settings for SteeringWheels. Cnst. moving the wheel to the desired location. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. as shown.13 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. Similar controls. click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. called drag controls. bottoms. 17 Type ZR. and tops of selected walls in elevation views and 3D views. and click the SteeringWheels tab. These are the drag controls. and double-click 2nd Flr. press ESC. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. expand Views (all). and click Help. and select the wall. For more information about SteeringWheels.

The table moves down. for example. Some commands. Move an element 20 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. 23 Click next to the lower wall. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. After selecting the element to move. and on the Tools toolbar. 21 Select the Craftsman02 table. 19 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. as shown. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 21 . In this case. 22 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. and click again to specify the ending position. such as Move and Copy. click (Move). require 2 clicks to complete the command. and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. click to specify the starting position. you want to move the table closer to the wall. to lengthen the wall.18 Click and drag the left control.

on the Standard toolbar. and click again to end it. Undo commands 25 On the Standard toolbar. and drag it on top of the table. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. 26 On the Undo menu. select the second item in the list. such as the Lines command. 24 Select the plant. 22 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. Some commands. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. End a command 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). In this example. click the Undo command. click Lines. Move. or press CTRL+Z. All changes you make to a project are tracked. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines.Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. 28 Click in the drawing area to start the line.

30 Close the file without saving your changes. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 23 . On the Design Bar.29 To end the command. Press ESC twice. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. click Modify.

24 .

Express Workshop 25 .

26 .

27 . NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. In Revit Architecture. highlighting powerful features that are integral to the most common architectural workflows. you will have a basic understanding of the design and documentation tools. this tutorial uses imperial units only. you will create building assembly details by performing the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view detail by importing a DWG file. Each tutorial demonstrates tools you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. or referenced as a drafting view. details are either based upon the geometry of the building model as a detail view. illustrating how building components work together. Creating Details with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides intuitive native tools to create. with parametric tags that automatically track and display detail view and drawing sheet placement. Use detail components to define an assembly. When you have finished these tutorials. Insert a Callout and create a model-based detail view. Use keynotes to annotate a detail. but for training purposes. Create a detail callout and reference a drafting view. detail. In this tutorial.Express Workshop 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of functionality. as well as some of the best practices that help you efficiently design and develop an architectural building project. and annotate building assemblies.

for Name. create a reference callout. scroll until the folder is displayed. verify 1 1/2''= 1'-0'' is selected. enter Window Head Detail. import a DWG detail. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the Scale list. you will create a drafting view. Create a drafting view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 2 In the Drafting View dialog. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing folder\c_express_workshop_details_start. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click OK. click Training Files. click Drafting View.Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data In this exercise. If necessary. and reference a drafting view.rvt. 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .

The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. 7 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model. NOTE The drafting view you have created is a container into which you have not yet added any graphical information. located directly to the left of the drawing area. 5 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. expand Sections (Wall Sections) view heading and double-click Wall Section 1. Import a drawing detail 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. Create a reference callout 8 In the Project Browser. The model zooms out. displaying the extents of the detail. The drawing area is still blank. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle around the Level 1 section area. the new drafting view is listed under Drafting Views(Detail-Sim. as shown. 9 Type ZR.In the Project Browser. Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data | 29 . click Training Files. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. 6 In the Colors field list.dwg.). 10 In the drawing area. select Black and White. and navigate to Express Workshop\Detailing\ew_window_head_detail. and click Open.

in the Type Selector.The view displays to the specified area. 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Select Drafting View: Window Head Detail. select Detail View: Detail. and in the Scale list. 14 In the drawing area. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. to activate the view selection list. click Callout. 13 Click Reference other view. 12 On the Options Bar. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown.

click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. select Callout. The model view displays the linked Window Head Detail drafting view in the drawing area. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. c_express_workshop_details_start. Next you will create a detail view and add detail components. Create a detail view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you will create a detail view defined by a callout. Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. adjust the detail view display settings.rvt. and in the Scale list. and then add detail components and detail groups to build a model-based detail assembly.The reference callout is created. linked to the Window Head Detail drafting view 15 In the drawing area. 3 In the drawing area. double-click the reference callout tag head. select Detail View: Detail. in the Type Selector. 2 On the Options Bar. Model-Based Detailing In this exercise. 16 Close the Window Head Detail drafting view. Model-Based Detailing | 31 .

4 Right-click Detail 0. double-click Wall Base 1. under Detail Views(Detail). select the Wall Base 1 Callout to expose grips. and click Rename. for Name. enter Wall Base 1. click Modify to clear the selection. and click OK. 5 In the Rename View dialog. 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Adjust display settings 9 In the Project Browser. under Detail Views (Detail). 7 Drag the grip closest to the Callout Head as shown.The new detail view is listed as Detail 0 in the Project Browser. 6 In the drawing area. 8 On the Design Bar.

11 Click the boundary of the view crop region to display grips for both regions. 10 Move the cursor over the boundary of the view crop region to display a dashed line indicating the boundary of the annotation crop region. bordered by a solid line.The region you defined with the callout bubble displays in the drawing area. Model-Based Detailing | 33 . This is the view crop region.

allowing you to see the difference between the model geometry and any added detail components. 13 On the View Control Bar. The model elements in the view display as half-tones. right-click. 16 Click OK. 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 15 In the Element Properties dialog. for Display Model. under Graphics. and click View Properties. select As Underlay. The view and annotation crop regions are no longer visible. and click OK. 14 In the drawing area.12 Drag the annotation crop region grips as shown. click (Hide Crop Region).

and press ENTER. By grouping detail components. Directly above the drawing area. on the Options Bar. the endpoints of the detail components may become visible.Brick on Mtl. 18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click the lower-right endpoint of the Basic Wall:Exterior . type 1' 6''. Stud. By including the model geometry at a medium or fine level of detail.Detail components and detail groups Model based details are created using the model geometry as a background. typical details can easily be placed. If the crop region is enlarged. 19 In the Type Selector. NOTE The detail component is created passing outside of the crop region. select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8”. you can accurately place detail components based on the model component assembly. Model-Based Detailing | 35 . the Type Selector displays the detail components that are pre-loaded in the model. 20 In the drawing area. click Detail Components. verify that the view detail level is set to Medium. 21 Move the cursor up slightly. 17 On the View Control Bar.

and click Create Instance. click Modify to end the command. Typical construction details have been saved as assemblies by grouping detail components. 23 Using the same method. as shown. expand Groups ➤ Detail. add the following detail components as shown. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . ■ ■ ■ ■ Plywood-Section1 : 3/4" Rigid Insulation-Section : 1'' Resilient Flooring-Section Resilient Topset Base-Section: 6'' 24 On the Design Bar.22 Press ESC twice to end the command. 26 Right-click Typical 8" Metal Stud NLB Wall. 27 Click the top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall to place the detail. 25 In the Project Browser.

4" Slab detail. ■ ■ Typical 12" Foundation. select the same top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall used previously. Typical Standard Brick Base Model-Based Detailing | 37 .28 Press ESC to end the command. 29 Repeat this process for the following: NOTE For each detail group.

txt. The text files can then be referenced into a Revit Architecture project. and open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing\c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. For more information about customizing a keynote database. in the type selector. you will add and modify keynotes to further develop the detail. Continue to work in the Wall Base 1 view of the training file you used in the previous exercise. Keynoting In this exercise you will keynote detail components by element. Revit Architecture provides a link to a central text file that contains a master list of keynote definitions. special notes. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. In the next exercise. or create a series of text files specific to a building or project type. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . or instructions within a construction documentation package. click Keynote ➤ Element. and Free End are selected. map keynotes by material. consistent means of identifying building assembly components. and verify that Horizontal. 4 On the Options Bar. c_express_workshop_details_start. You can customize this list. for Full Path. Leader.30 Type ZE to zoom the view extents. see Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. click Browse. The Keynoting feature in Revit Architecture provides a simple. and under Keynote Table. click Training Files.rvt. and format keynote styles. Keynoting detail components 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting.

If no value has been specified. 8 Click to place the tag.5 In the drawing area. place the cursor over Bricks-Section : Standard . Keynoting | 39 . Either move the text inside. TIP Annotation that intersects or is outside of the annotation crop region will not be visible in the drawing area. 6 Click the brick detail component to place the arrow end of the leader. or increase the size of the annotation crop region. 7 Click to place the leader arm. a question mark displays. If you would like to complete keynoting the detail. 9 Press ESC to end the command. use the same method to place the keynotes as shown.3/8" Joint to display the value specified for the keynote parameter in the element’s properties.

40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 16 In the drawing area. Format keynote styles The keynotes previously inserted were text only. 14 In the Keynotes dialog. 15 Select 07 21 00. 13 Click to place the tag.Map keynotes by material 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. navigate to Division 07_Thermal and Moisture Protection ➤ 07 21 00_Thermal Insulation. draw a selection box that encloses the entire detail. You will now change all keynotes to keys only. and click OK. 11 Click the batt insulation component to place the arrow end of the leader.A4_R-19 Batt Insulation. 12 Click to place the leader arm. click Keynote ➤ Material.

You have completed the first Express Workshop lesson.Boxed. Only the keynotes remain selected. Click OK. Select Keynote Tags. You can specify title blocks and place multiple views. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture | 41 . and schedules that communicate design requirements and project-specific information. Click Check None. click 18 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). legends. 17 On the Options Bar. 20 Press ESC to clear the selection. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides the tools you need to develop drawing sheet documents.All items within the selection display in red. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number . 19 In the Type Selector. The keynotes show the CSI Masterformat division key values. Creating Details with Revit Architecture.

but for training purposes. Update drawing sheet and project information. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . In this exercise. you will perform the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drawing sheet. Add labels to a title block. update the project information element properties. Add and modify a keynote legend on a drawing sheet. Place views on drawing sheets. and modify and update the project sheet title block.NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. you will create a sheet. this tutorial uses imperial units only. Project Sheet Layout The Project Browser displays all sheets added to a Revit project and all sheet views and schedules placed on specific sheets. In this lesson. Add and modify a drawing list on a drawing sheet.

■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout\c_express_workshop_sheet layout_start. the new drawing sheet is listed under Sheets(all). In Revit Architecture. Enter sheet specific information You can enter sheet-specific information either directly on the sheet. click Training Files. In the Project Browser. The sheet name and sheet number can also be entered in the Sheet Title dialog. scroll until the folder is displayed. or in the element properties of the title block. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : Working Drawing. If necessary. Create a new sheet 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and the title block is displayed in the drawing area. a title block is a container that includes placeholders for sheet-specific and project-specific information. Project Sheet Layout | 43 . 2 In the Select A Title Block dialog.rvt. 3 Click OK.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. accessed from the sheet in the Project Browser.

To zoom in and out. In this tutorial. Enter project information Project-specific information is data common to all project sheets. click Modify to clear the selection. 8 On the Design Bar. Smith and press ENTER. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle. or in the project information Element Properties dialog. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command.Unnamed. You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. 6 In the Title Block. 10 In the Sheet Title dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Number.4 Type ZR. It can be entered or changed directly on a sheet. double-click Checker. under Sheets(all). Click OK. Then. 9 In the Project Browser. enter A602. and click Rename. 5 In the drawing area. roll the wheel. To pan. 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . NOTE The sheet number and sheet name are automatically updated in the Project Browser and the title block. right-click A602 . enter Sections/Details. 7 Enter K. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. as shown: The display zooms to the specified area. enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in. you can enter ZE to zoom out. For Name. hold down the wheel and drag. when you want to change the area of the model you are working on.

in the Type Selector. and zoom in on the top of the Revision Schedule. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. 17 On the Design Bar. (Left) is selected. Project Sheet Layout | 45 . Modify the title block family 14 In the drawing area. For Project Name. enter 4/10/2008. click Edit Family and click Yes to open E1 30 x 42 Horizontal for editing. click Text. select Text : 1/8''. Smith. displaying the E1 30 x 42 Horizontal title block. 18 On the Options Bar. enter Freighthouse Flats. 13 Click OK. 20 Click and type Project Status. 15 In the Options Bar. The Family Editor opens.11 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. For Project Status. For Client Name. 16 Type ZR. enter J. enter Design Development. and verify that 19 Position the cursor at the left side of the top row as shown. select the title block.

25 Position the cursor in the middle of the row as shown. 29 On the Design Bar. and click. and click OK. 26 In the Edit Label dialog. (Left) and 24 On the Options Bar. 27 Select Wrap between parameters only. 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . click Modify to exit the command. select Label : 3/16''. click (Load into Project). as shown. and verify that (Top) are selected. under Category Parameters. click Label. add Project Issue Date parameter. in the Type Selector. 23 On the Design Bar. to add 28 Using the same method. enter Project Issue Date below Project Status. as shown. 22 Using the same method.21 On the Design Bar. select Project Status and click the parameter under Label Parameters.

The viewport can be accessed and edited directly from the sheet. for Name. by adding a detail view that contains keynotes. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 47 . and under Keynote Table. enter Keynote Legend . representing the view or schedule. Project Detail Sheet Layout As views and schedules are placed onto a sheet. place and modify a keynote legend. click Training Files. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you will create. The title block is updated in the Freighthouse Flats project. to a drawing sheet. Next you will create. Create a keynote legend 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. a viewport displays. click Browse. 4 In the New Keynote Legend dialog.txt. 3 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Keynote Legend. select Override parameter values of existing types. In this exercise.30 In the Reload Family dialog. for Full Path.Project. and click Yes. and open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout \c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. and add a keynote legend and a detail view to a sheet.

48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . The drawing sheet is displayed in the drawing area. on the Appearance tab. under Text. as shown. and drag Keynote Legend . 8 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). double-click A601 .5 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. and click OK.Sections/Details. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. 6 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. clear Show Headers. expand Legends. Add a keynote legend 7 In the Project Browser.Project to the lower-left detail area on the drawing sheet.

Modify the keynote legend display 10 Type ZR. 13 Expand the right column width as shown and press ESC to clear the selection. displaying all keys and corresponding text for keynotes contained within the project. 11 Select the keynote schedule on the sheet. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 49 . and zoom in on the Keynote Legend . 12 Select the left control of the schedule and drag it to the right to expand the left column width as shown.Project as shown.9 Press ESC to clear the selection. The keynote legend is visible.

and click OK. 17 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog.Sheet. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. The Keynote Legend is now blank. and drag Wall Base 1 to the detail area between the keynote legend and the Window Head detail on the drawing sheet. right-click Keynote Legend . for View Name. for Filter. select Filter by sheet. 19 Click OK twice. Because no views containing keynotes have been placed in the drawing sheet. as shown. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . under Legends. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Detail Views (Detail). not keynotes. and click OK. enter Keynote Legend . click Edit. NOTE The detail components of the Window Head detail contained on this sheet do not appear in the Keynote Legend because they are annotated with text. the keynote legend has no keynote text or key values to display. Add a detail view 20 In the Project Browser. at the bottom of the Filter tab. 15 In the Project Browser.Project. and click Properties.14 Zoom out and pan to include the keynote legend and the detail box to the right as shown.

The view title with line displays below the viewport. as shown. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views.Title Sheet 1. 2 In the Project Browser. Project Title Sheet Layout In this exercise. and then add and update a Drawing list. The view remains selected. under Sheets (all). double-click A0 . you will add a view without a view title to the Title sheet drawing. Add a view without a view title 1 In the Project Browser. The Title sheet is displayed in the drawing area. and drag Title Sheet view to the upper-left area of the drawing sheet.The keynote legend is automatically updated. Project Title Sheet Layout | 51 . displaying all keynote text and key values present on the drawing sheet.

by default. As part of a construction document set. and zoom in on the drawing list. Add a drawing list In Revit Architecture. The Title Sheet view title is no longer displayed. The drawing list remains selected. 3 In the Type Selector. 6 Type ZR. 4 Press ESC to clear the selection. select Viewport : Viewport /no title mark. Press ESC to clear the selection. 5 In the Project Browser. or omit view titles from sheets.When you place a view on a sheet. sheets that are external to Revit Architecture can also be included in the drawing list. as shown. You can also define these attributes for individual view titles on sheets. You can specify text attributes for view titles. define the information to include in a view title. expand Schedules/Quantities. Revit Architecture displays a view title. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . drawing lists are schedules that display all drawing sheets that have the Appears In Drawing List parameter selected within the sheet’s element properties. and drag Drawing List to the upper-right area on the drawing sheet.

9 In the Element Properties dialog.Update the drawing list 7 In the Project Browser. under Identity Data. while pressing SHIFT. NOTE The selected sheets do not have any views placed on them. right-click the selected sheets.Sections/Details and select A801 . under Sheets (all).Ceiling Plans. and click Properties. You have completed the Express Workshop lesson Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture. 8 In the Project Browser. The drawing list display is updated. including only sheets that contain views. clear Appears In Drawing List. and click OK. Project Title Sheet Layout | 53 . select A602 .

54 .

Developing Your Designs 55 .

56 .

If the grid moves. a curtain wall. a central service core. you create a Revit Architecture project from a template provided with the software. Using this Tutorial In the first 6 exercises of this tutorial. Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your model. As you develop the building design. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. a wall or a column can be constrained to the grid. you learn how to constrain elements and how to test the parametric relationships between them. it is good practice to test the constraints. After the beginning exercises. you learn how to use parametric design techniques. This project will serve as the structural model and will then be linked into an architectural project for further development. and a sloped roof over one corner of the building. For example. You set up the project and create the structural frame and foundation of the building. When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other. Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between elements in the model. You create a retail building that contains 5 floors. or “flex the model” by changing parameters.Creating a Building Information Model 3 In this tutorial. the wall or column will move with it. 57 . you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit® Architecture 2009.

verify that the second option is selected. you use a template that is provided with the software. and click Browse. levels. click Training Files. click New. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. South. construction. and settings. you design inside the elevation markers.rte. To create the project file. In views that display elevation markers. notice four elevation markers. Create the project from the default template 1 In the drawing area. with an RVT extension. 5 Click OK. you will use the default template. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type.subsequent exercises instruct you to open a project training file. In practice. under Create new. so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises. select Project. West. The project is stored as a single file. 3 Under Template file. from the product library. 58 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and residential. such as a door or window. Explore the project with the Project Browser 6 On the left side of the drawing screen. 2 In the New Project dialog. you load any required family type that is not in your project. Each marker corresponds to an elevation view in the project: North. The new project opens. For this project. The template file has an RTE extension and provides default project units. In the drawing area in the right pane. and customize the project as necessary. Creating the Project In this exercise. under Projects. Revit Architecture templates are available for specific building types: commercial. East. You can access these views by double-clicking the elevation marker arrow. you create the project that will store the retail building design and different views of the building. The project training files have pre-loaded family types and represent the correct state for beginning the exercise. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. locate the Project Browser. views. or by opening the view in the Project Browser. but contains no geometry.

notice the Legends. such as schedules and legends. You can add. and Elevations (Building Elevation). and delete them. enter Revit Retail Building. 14 For File name. Level lines are finite horizontal planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model. These views are customizable: you can rename them. verify that Project Files (*. This folder contains the Revit Architecture files that you need to complete all of the Revit Architecture tutorials. the software title bar contains the name of the software and Project 1. and other properties. will be accessible from the Project Browser. NOTE If you create a project without a template. 10 In the Project Browser. 7 If necessary. click to scroll down to the bottom of the list. duplicate them. 8 Under Floor Plans. Schedules/Quantities. You can control how often the software will prompt you to save your work. double-click South.The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views. Click Settings menu ➤ Options. you will want to save your work frequently.rvt) is selected. the view you see in the drawing area. Ceiling Plans. then expand Floor Plans. display in the south elevation. and duplicate levels.Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate that the Level 1 Floor plan view is current. sheets. schedules. 12 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. and click Training Files. view the Save reminder interval. change their properties. verify that Level 1 displays as bold. and Revit Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all). only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are created. 13 In the file window. Two level lines. Notice that in the top left corner of your screen. 9 Under Elevations (Building Elevation). as well as change their names. double-click Metric. and families in your project. Sheets (all). Groups. reflected ceiling plan views. Save the project 11 Click File menu ➤ Save As. You use levels to position Revit Architecture elements in your building model. heights. delete. 15 For Save as type. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. expand Views (all). You can also add views to your project as you develop and document the building information model. Creating the Project | 59 . created by the template. and on the General tab. Families. The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views. As you design and document your building model. The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view. and elevation views created in the project by the template. 16 Click Save. content and building model reports.

Modify the two default project levels 1 In the Project Browser.17 Proceed to the next exercise. the other levels move and change with it. and press ENTER. it is good practice to precede the level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser. and double-click South. You also change the elevation of the two levels lines to the appropriate heights for the first two stories of the building. TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser. 3 Double-click the Level 1 text. so that when one level moves. and windows within the building model. 2 Zoom to the level names at the right end of each level line. or constrained. Adding Project Levels In this exercise. you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls. you add the remaining 5 levels using different techniques. When you begin designing. Adding Project Levels on page 60. you modify the 2 default project levels and add 5 levels to the project to define the 7 vertical levels of the building model. doors. expand Views (all). You learn how the levels are locked. After you modify the two default levels. 60 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . You change the names of the 2 default levels. enter 00 Foundation. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). as well as the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views to create foundation and entry levels for the building. to each other.

not all the tabs are visible. Next. and click Basics. a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created. If it does not. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected.) 17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed blue line displays alignment with the two existing levels. and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line. click Level. place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar. enter 01 Entry Level. and press ESC. 13 On the Options Bar. 15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line. enter 0. under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans. 8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views. verify that (Draw) and Make Plan View are selected. right-click. 6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height. 12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and then move it up. The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. By default. and press ENTER. you add a level by drawing it above the 01 Entry Level. which should display by default. and click OK. 7 Double-click the Level 2 text. This is the Options Bar. Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings. Adding Project Levels | 61 . 11 On the left side of the Project Browser. view the Design Bar. Use the Draw option to add a level 10 Zoom out so you can see both levels in the view. (You do not have to click to specify the start point. click to specify the endpoint of the level line. and press ENTER. As you move the cursor. 16 Enter 3750. 5 In the Project Browser. The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the Design Bar. The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab. and press ENTER. When you add the new level. 9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height. enter -1800. a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor position. notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views are now named 00 Foundation. 14 Click Plan View Types.4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views. 3750 mm above 01 Entry Level.

A dashed blue line indicates where the new level will be drawn. Add the remaining 3 levels 28 Using either the Draw or Pick option. 3750 mm above the 02 Level line. click (Pick Lines). 23 On the Options Bar. Use the Pick option to add a level 22 On Design Bar. using a different option. verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well. or on the Design Bar. right-click Level 3. Next. and enter 02 Level. 26 Press ESC. and for Offset. 25 Click to place the level line. click Level. and move it slightly upward. Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view. 21 In the Project Browser.18 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 19 Click OK. enter 3750. and rename the corresponding views. If you create a level by copying it. 20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view. 24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line. click Modify to end the command. 62 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Rename. the associated floor and ceiling plan views are not created. Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference. Name the levels: ■ ■ ■ 04 Level 05 Roof Garden 06 Roof NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels. add 3 levels 3750 mm apart above 03 Level. you add another level. 27 Rename the level 03 Level.

30 Select the empty blue box on the left to display a level symbol at the left endpoint of the line. all the levels move.Display a symbol at the left endpoint of the 06 level line 29 Click the 06 Roof Level line. If you select a level and click its lock. Creating a Column Grid on page 64. 31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Test the level constraints 32 Select and drag the blue circle to the right or left to shorten or lengthen the level lines. Notice that by moving the top level. and you can move them independently. and zoom to the left endpoint of the line. as shown. Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before you continue on to the next exercise. The lock icon that displays indicates that the levels are vertically constrained. the levels are no longer constrained. Adding Project Levels | 63 .

In a later exercise. you place the building columns at the grid line intersections. you ensure a level of accuracy early in your design. you constrain the column heights to the roof level. Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line. By using the grid to control the placement of columns. select (Draw). Move the cursor up. and specify the grid line endpoint. you create a structural grid in the 00 Foundation floor plan view of the building model. the column height changes as well. ■ The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. 4 Draw the first vertical grid line: ■ ■ In the lower left corner of the drawing area. click Grid. In the following exercise. click Modify. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click 00 Foundation.Creating a Column Grid In this exercise. When the grid is complete. Create vertical column grid lines 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. so that if the roof elevation changes. specify a start point for the grid line. On the Design Bar. 64 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . until it is positioned under the top elevation marker. you change the columns to round hollow steel columns. 3 On the Options Bar.

use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the existing line. Creating a Column Grid | 65 . Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B. Next. and click to place the line. 6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. for Offset. On the Options Bar. click Grid. enter 4500 mm. click (Pick Lines). for Offset. On the Options Bar. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C. Click to place the grid line. and for Offset. and press ENTER. ■ ■ Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line. enter 7500 mm. Enter A. and click to place the line. ■ 7 Add 3 vertical grid lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and then place the cursor on the grid line to display the location of the second grid line. and click to place the line. enter 7500 mm. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D.5 Change the grid bubble number to a letter: ■ ■ Double-click 1 inside the grid bubble. You can change what displays in grid bubbles at any point in your project.

11 On the Design Bar.8 Press ESC. 12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 7500 mm and 4500 mm. ■ The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A. On the Options Bar. and specify the grid line endpoint. click Grid. 10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1. as shown. add horizontal grid lines to complete the grid. click (Draw) and specify an Offset of 0 mm. click Grid. 66 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Create horizontal grid lines 9 Draw the first horizontal grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. ■ ■ On the upper left side of the grid. Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E.

17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing. select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble. click Dimension. The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed. 14 On the Options Bar. 15 Starting with grid line A. click Dimension. Creating a Column Grid | 67 . 20 Click the 4 lock icons to lock the horizontal grid dimensions. click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the dimension. 18 On the Design Bar. 19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown. 22 While pressing CTRL. click (Aligned).Dimension the grid and lock the grid spacing 13 On the Design Bar. 21 Press ESC twice. select grid lines C and 3. 16 When you select the last vertical grid line.

click Modify. and click OK. you ensure that the grid remains centered and the building will grow out from the center if its grid dimensions are changed. and press ESC. 29 In the Name dialog. (Element Properties). until it is closer to grid line A. 68 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Edit/New. 31 For End Segments Length. click the value for Center Segment. and press ESC. enter 6. and on the Options Bar. At the left endpoint of the grid line. By pinning these central grid lines. 30 In the Type Properties dialog. 33 On the Design Bar. The following steps illustrate how to create a grid family type with a gap in the middle of the display. You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins. click Duplicate. 26 In the drawing area. and select grid line A. adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them. If necessary. ■ ■ Select grid line 1. The pins are hidden. Two pins display on the grid lines. click . building geometry requires the need for grid lines to contain breaks or display differently. 28 In the Type Properties dialog.5mm Bubble with Gap. ■ Create a custom grid family type In some cases. 32 Click OK twice. until it is closer to grid line 5. At the bottom endpoint of the grid line. Additional parameters in this dialog allow you to control the display of the grid line in both plan and section/elevation views. click and drag the blue circular grip to the right. click and drag the blue circular grip up. click Modify. and select None. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. The Center Segment parameter can be set to not display or to display in a different loaded line pattern. 24 Press ESC. 25 Adjust the grid: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. enter 50mm. select grid line 5.23 Click Edit menu ➤ Pin Position.

click Structural Column.5mm Bubble. and in the Type Selector. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Height and 05 Roof Garden. and on the Options Bar. click Finish. 37 Select the grid lines again.34 Draw a selection box to select all of the grid lines.5mm Bubble with Gap. Select and change all grids to use the newly created family type. Add columns to the grid 38 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 39 In the Type Selector. select Grid : 6. click Modify. select UC-Universal Column : 305x305x97UC. Creating a Column Grid | 69 . 36 On the Design Bar. 42 Verify that all the grid lines are selected (red). For Place By. select Grid : 6. select all of the grid lines. The original continuous grid lines are restored. click (Grid Intersection). and press ESC. 35 In the Type Selector. ■ 41 While pressing CTRL.

53 Place the camera and select its target point: ■ Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid. create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns. 45 While pressing CTRL. 48 On the Standard toolbar. 49 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked. You want to view the columns as if you were walking toward them. 47 Enter 9000. click (Undo) twice to restore the original locked grid dimension. and click to specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid line to place the camera.Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the grid line intersections of the column grid. 52 On the Options Bar. 51 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select grid line A. 46 On the Options Bar. Next. lock it. click Camera. and press ENTER. 44 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. 70 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Floor Plans. Create a 3D perspective view of the building 50 In the Project Browser. The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines. click Activate Dimensions. for From. and then select the dimension value between grid lines A and B. and unlock it. double-click 01 Entry Level. select 01 Entry Level. If it is unlocked. 43 Press ESC.

and click to place the target point of the camera. The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays.■ Move the cursor next to grid bubble A. 54 Zoom out and resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see all of the columns. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. Creating a Column Grid | 71 .

displays in bold under 3D Views. named 3D View 1 by default. expand 3D Views. The current view. In the Rename View dialog. Adding Beams In this exercise. enter To Building. under Views (all). Adding Beams on page 72. ■ ■ 56 Save the drawing. and click Rename. 57 Proceed to the next exercise. You begin by adding beams to the 01 Entry Level floor plan. and then copy them to subsequent levels.55 Name the view: ■ In the Project Browser. you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level. you add beams to build the structure of the building model. Right-click 3D View 1. and click OK. 72 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . When you finish adding beams.

Add beams to the first level of the building 1 In the Project Browser. view the icons on the View Control Bar. 4 Click Medium. the icon on the right side of the scale. select each grid line. The View Control Bar offers graphical shortcuts to view settings and commands. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. under Floor Plans. double-click 01 Entry Level. 2 At the bottom left corner of the drawing area. double-click To Building to view all of the beams. click (Create Beam On Grid). 8 While pressing CTRL. click Finish. 9 On the Options Bar. A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view. click Beam. under 3D Views. 3 Click the Detail Level icon . which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines. 6 In the Type Selector. The selected grid lines display as red. 10 In the Project Browser. Adding Beams | 73 . 5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. The view is currently set to Coarse. 7 On the Options Bar.

15 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. select 02 Level. click Modify. double-click 01 Entry Level. and click OK. which only extend 74 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . The beams that you copied from the 01 Entry Level are pasted onto each subsequent level of the building. select 06 Roof. and click Select All Instances. 12 On the View toolbar.Copy beams from 01 Entry Level to levels 02 through 06 11 In the Project Browser. 13 On the Design Bar. NOTE The default 3D view is not available in a perspective or camera view. Notice that top level beams are not connected to the columns. 14 Select one of the beams. 17 In the Select Levels dialog. press and hold SHIFT. click (Default 3D View). under Floor Plans. right-click. 16 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. The default 3D view is a southeast isometric view with hidden lines. All of the beams attached to the columns display as red.

All of the columns display as red. and click Element Properties. 06 Roof. 21 With the column selected. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. under Constraints. view the Top Level parameter. The parameter is set to 05 Roof Garden. click 24 Press ESC. you specified their height to reach only the 05 Roof Garden level.to the 5th level. 22 On the Options Bar. and click Select All Instances. When you created the columns. for Top Level. The columns now extend to the top level of the building. (Element Properties). select 06 Roof. and if necessary. 25 In the Project Browser. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click. but it would only change the height of the single selected column. double-click To Building. 20 Click Cancel. and click OK. under Instance Parameters. resize the view to see the entire structure. right-click. under 3D Views. Change the height of the columns 18 Select one of the columns. You could change this parameter to 06 Roof in this dialog to change the height of the column. Adding Beams | 75 .

You can view the columns and beams in the elevation. The structural elements (columns and beams) display only as lines. 76 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 27 At the lower left corner of the drawing area. View the south elevation of the structure 26 In the Project Browser. on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. 28 Save the drawing. press ESC to exit the command before continuing. as lines only.NOTE If you select the camera to resize the view. under Elevations. but you want to display them in less detail. double-click South.

Adding Braces | 77 . Adding Braces on page 77. click Framing Elevation. you add braces to the 4 corners of the building structure. Create framing elevation views 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Click near the outer grid lines to place 8 elevation markers around the outside of the grid as shown. 3 On the Options Bar. and press ESC to end the command. Adding Braces In this exercise. verify that Attach to Grid is selected. you create 8 framing elevation views. To better add the braces to the structure. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Each elevation marker aligns perpendicularly to the grid. double-click 00 Foundation. under Floor Plans.29 Proceed to the next exercise.

visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays. After you add the final brace. You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between elements. double-click the elevation marker arrow. 11 Using the same technique.Add braces in a framing elevation view 5 On the bottom left side of the grid. The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them. The associated framing elevation view displays. 78 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click to specify the endpoint of the brace. press ESC twice. 9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level. 8 In the Type Selector. NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in the building model. 10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level. and use the grips that display to adjust both sides of the view. click Brace. but when placed the braces are placed. 6 Select the crop region (if necessary). verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown. so that you can see vertical columns located on grid lines A and B. NOTE Do not copy or array braces. and when the endpoint snap displays. 7 On the Design Bar. click to specify the start point of the brace.

enter 18000 mm. IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level. The height of the roof lowers. Make sure that you use the endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams. and press ENTER. delete it and redraw it.Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity 12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height. Adding Braces | 79 .

enter 10000 mm. and press ENTER. but this time add them from right to left. 80 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click 00 Foundation. 14 On the Standard toolbar. 16 On the bottom right side of the grid. 17 Add diagonal braces to the structure. under Floor Plans. click Add braces in another framing elevation view 15 In the Project Browser.13 Double-click the 04 Level height. (Undo) twice to restore the original level heights. double-click the framing elevation marker arrow.

as shown in the 3D view below. under Floor Plans. Adding Braces | 81 . 23 In the Project Browser. 19 In the Project Browser. open the 3D view and notice the change in the size. click Activate Dimensions. NOTE As you add braces. enter 12000 mm. periodically open the 3D view to see that the braces are positioned as expected. and press ENTER. and click the lock that displays to unlock it. and on the Options Bar. 22 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay (the one that you unlocked). 21 Select grid line A. double-click 00 Foundation. 20 Select the dimension string between grid lines A and B.Add braces in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure 18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views.

grid size. Test connectivity of the columns. under Elevations. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. (Undo) 3 times to restore the locked dimension. you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes the building load to the ground. and drag it away from the structure. and if necessary. double-click 00 Foundation. Creating a Foundation In this exercise. beams. Creating a Foundation on page 82. The connected beams and braces resize as the columns move. 31 Save the drawing. double-click {3D}.24 In the Project Browser. click and roof height. lock it. 30 Select the dimension string of the first vertical grid bay. 26 In the Project Browser. 29 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 82 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 28 On the Standard toolbar. and braces 27 Select one of the columns in the structure. double-click South. 25 Change the height of the 06 Roof level to 24000 mm. under Floor Plans.

and expand Structural Foundations. for Level. click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1.Before you can add the pile caps. Add the first pile cap 8 At the top left of the grid. Creating a Foundation | 83 . 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. and press ESC twice. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. 10 Edit the 00 Foundation view range: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the view. and open Metric\Families\Structural\Foundations\M_Pile Cap-Rectangular. Load a pile cap family 1 In the Project Browser. and click View Properties. for View Range. 9 Close the warning dialog. The foundation pile cap now displays. click Edit. The M_Pile Cap-Rectangular family displays in the tree. but the current depth of the view does not allow you to view it. double-click 00 Foundation. Verify that the pile cap family is loaded in the project 5 In the Project Browser. A warning displays. you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view. In the Element Properties dialog. and how to load specific families into a project. select Unlimited. you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project. The pile cap has been added in the view. Click OK twice. under View Depth. and drag it to the drawing area. click Yes to load a new structural foundation family. click Training Files. In the View Range dialog. under Extents. 6 Expand M_Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes). You learn how to access the families that are stored in libraries included with software. expand Families. 7 Select 2000 x 2000 x 900mm.rfa. where you must adjust the view range before you can see them. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the Revit dialog that displays. under Floor Plans. After you load the pile cap family.

When the final pile cap is placed. 12 Select each grid intersection to add pile caps that form the foundation. press ESC twice. 13 In the Project Browser.Add pile caps to complete the foundation 11 Right-click the pile cap. and click Create Similar. 84 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation. under 3D Views.

You load new column. Changing Structural Member Types | 85 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.14 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. and brace families into the project.rvt. Changing Structural Member Types on page 85. It is not available in a perspective or camera view. NOTE The default 3D view is the only 3D view in which the Select All Instances command is available. and click Select All Instances. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. beams. double-click {3D}. Changing Structural Member Types In this exercise. and open Metric\m_RRB_update_structure. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. and braces that you used to create the building structure. under 3D Views. and learn how to select and change multiple structural element types to refine the building structure. All columns in the building model display as red. right-click. Change the column type 1 In the Project Browser. beam. 2 Select one of the columns. you change the types of the columns.

click Edit/New. right-click. double-click Elevation 1-a. click Modify. 16 On the Design Bar. 86 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click (Default 3D View). click Modify. click Brace. for Type. and click OK twice. select CHS-Circular Hollow Section-Column : 508x12. select M_Round Bar: 75mm. click (Element Properties). The building model displays the round hollow columns. although the framing elevation displays the braces as lines only. In the following steps. and click Select All Instances. 20 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to M_Round Bar: 75mm. 7 On the Design Bar. select the braces in the elevation one by one. You need to create a new bar type by duplicating the 25mm bar type. 19 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. This not the size that you want to use. 9 In the Type Selector. the braces as well as the beams change.9.6X15. 17 While pressing CTRL. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). 6 In the Type Selector. you change the brace type. View the building model with the new structural element types 21 On the View toolbar. and changing its size parameter.2X101. under Dimensions.5CHS. but it is the only size of its type currently available. click Modify to view the new beam type in the building model.3 In the Type Selector. click Duplicate. click Modify. 15 In the Project Browser. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 13 In the Name dialog. and click OK. enter 75mm. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Because the braces that you added were actually a beam type. for d. Change the brace type 8 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. enter 75mm. 18 In the Type Selector. Change the beam type 5 Select one of the beams. select M_Round Bar : 25mm. select M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section : HSS203. The brace type changes.

the architectural file will be used to further develop the building information model. Linking the Structural Model In this exercise. Linking the Structural Model | 87 . 2 In the Import/Link RVT dialog. select Auto . click Training Files. and click Open. 3 Under Positioning.rvt. After the files are linked. and open Metric\m_RRB_architectural. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. Linking the Structural Model on page 87. select m_RRB_structure_complete.rvt. Link the structural model 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Use the Origin to Origin option to ensure proper alignment with the site in the architectural file.Origin to Origin. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. the structural model created in the previous exercises is linked to an architectural project containing site information.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.

double-click South. under Elevations. The standard workflow when working with outside consultants is to link in the structural model. 6 In the drawing area. select the linked Revit model.4 In the Project Browser. and walls could also be copy/monitored. click (Copy/Monitor). you use the copy/monitor function to place the correct levels into the host project. however. Grids. You use the Link option because it is likely that the structural model will change. select Levels 00 through 06. depending on the project. 5 On the Tools toolbar. In this case. structural members. The Copy/Monitor tool allows you to establish and monitor relationships between elements in a host project and linked projects. 9 In the drawing area. while pressing CTRL. 88 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 8 On the Options Bar. 7 On the Copy/Monitor tab of the Design Bar. the host project is the architectural file and the linked project is the structural model. click Copy. After the link is established. it is also possible to design the structural components as part of the architectural model. select Multiple. and click Select Link.

11 In the Duplicate Types dialog. you turn off the visibility of the site elements from the Foundation view. for Floor Plan views. The 06 Roof floor plan opens. delete the Level 2 floor plan. click OK. click Finish. 18 Using the same method. Create views for each of the new levels 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Floor Plan. First. 16 Click OK. 13 On the Design Bar. and click Delete. 12 Ignore and close any warnings that display. Linking the Structural Model | 89 .10 On the Options Bar. right-click Level 1. Delete existing views 17 In the Project Browser. click Finish mode. 15 In the New Plan dialog. Turn off visibility of the site elements To get the plans to display without the site information. you create a view template and assign it to the new floor plans. while pressing SHIFT. under Floor Plans. select 06 Roof (selecting all levels 00 through 06).

double-click 01 Entry Level. under Floor Plans. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. select the Topography : Surface. and click OK. click OK. Create a template from the current view 23 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. right-click. under Floor Plans. right-click. double-click 00 Foundation.19 In the Project Browser. select Entourage: Stuart Hall 1 : Stuart Hall 1. 21 In the drawing area. 20 In the drawing area. 90 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . enter Floor Plans. 22 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. 26 In the Project Browser. for Name. 24 In the New View Template dialog. 25 In the View Templates dialog.

Recreate the To Building camera view 30 In the Project Browser. 29 Zoom to fit the plan in the view. 33 Click at the upper left of the grid. under Names. click Camera. double-click Site. 32 Click in the road intersection at the bottom right corner of the building grid. and click OK. Linking the Structural Model | 91 . 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. 34 In the 3D view that displays. adjust the borders so that the entire building is visible. select Floor Plans. under Floor Plans.Apply the view template to new views 27 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 31 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

you must sketch them first in a Sketch Editor. and click OK. stairs. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. To create floors. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you learn some different techniques that you can use when sketching objects. 92 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this exercise.rvt. right-click 3D View 1.35 In the Project Browser. 36 In the Rename View dialog. you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building. Some other Revit Architecture elements. and railings are also created from sketches. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_floors. expand 3D Views. and click Rename. Adding Floors on page 92. such as roofs. enter To Building. Adding Floors In this exercise. 37 Proceed to the next exercise.

2 Sketch the floor: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You are now in the Sketch Editor. ■ ■ ■ Using a crossing window. The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important because you resize it in the next steps. the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it. Adding Floors | 93 . select the top floor line. Leave this dimension unlocked. click (Rectangle). and then the first horizontal grid line. Move the cursor to the left. sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid. ■ 4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line. Notice the Design Bar now displays the Sketch tab. If the grid changes size. click Lines. double-click 01 Entry Level. At the top left corner of the grid. click Dimension. and click above the first horizontal grid line to place the dimension. click Floor. Do not lock the dimension.Add the 01 Entry Level Floor 1 In the Project Browser. On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. and elements in the current view display as gray. past the first vertical grid line. 3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. On the Sketch tab.

5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid. and click the temporary dimension value. Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid. click Finish Sketch to create the floor. select the top floor line. Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 300. The dimensions are not visible on the finished floor. Move the cursor to the left dimension. Enter 300. At the top left corner of the grid. press ENTER. and change their values to 300 mm. Select and lock the dimensions. They display on the floor sketch. click Modify. Do not lock the dimensions. 94 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 6 Resize the floor sketch by changing its dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and then press ESC. ■ 7 On the Design Bar.

double-click 02 Level. and on the Options Bar. you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model. On the Options Bar. 11 Sketch the floor: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. On the Sketch tab. using a different sketching technique. and lock the dimensions. Select the three remaining floor lines. You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry. and press ESC. This is how you could modify the floor if you needed to after creating it. click Lines. and for Offset. The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay. 9 Because you do not need to modify the floor. ■ ■ Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line. Add the 02 Level floor 10 In the Project Browser. and move the cursor until the dashed blue line displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor. Next. The 02 Level floor sketch displays. ■ 12 At the top left corner of the grid. click (Pick Lines). click Floor. under Floor Plans. IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines. click Edit. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown. on the Design Bar.8 Select the floor. click Quit Sketch. Adding Floors | 95 . enter 1500mm.

dimension and lock the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid. Add the 03 Level floor 15 In the Project Browser. click Floor. The 02 Level floor is visible in the view. 22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor. The 02 Level floor displays. click Lines. 20 On the Tools toolbar.13 At the bottom right corner of the grid. click (Align). double-click 03 Level. click Finish Sketch. 16 On the Design Bar. Click the locks to constrain the floors. The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line. The cursor changes to 2 arrows to indicate that the Align tool is active. 14 On the Design Bar. 96 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click (Rectangle). and a lock icon displays. 23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor. 21 Select the top 02 Level floor line. and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch. 18 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. 19 Sketch a floor inside the 02 Level floor. 17 On the Sketch tab.

and on the Options Bar. 33 At the top left corner of the grid. 31 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. 32 Select the floor. dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. 25 Repeat the previous procedure to create a floor on the 04 Level. under Views ➤ 3D Views. 27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor. Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level 26 In the Project Browser. 34 At the bottom right corner of the grid. double-click 05 Roof Garden. 30 In the Select Levels dialog. under Floor Plans. Adding Floors | 97 . under Floor Plans. The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level. Lock the dimensions to constrain the floor. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. select 05 Roof Garden. and constrain the 04 Level floor to the 03 Level floor. and lock the edges. click Finish Sketch. View the floors in the 3D building model 36 In the Project Browser. click Edit. you could place the rectangular sketch on the 04 Level. double-click 01 Entry Level. Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the grid. 35 On the Sketch tab. double-click {3D}.24 On the Design Bar. dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. Alternatively. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard.

Click (Pick Lines). click Training Files.rvt. click Lines. enter 1800 mm. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you add a low slope roof over the roof garden on the building. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. To create the roof. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_roof. under Floor Plans. 98 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 3 On the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ Clear Defines slope. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. When a blue dashed line displays. and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line. double-click 06 Roof. You shape the flat roof of the roof garden to have a roof drain sloping to the center structural member under the roof. Adding a Roof on page 98. You edit the section of the roof slab so it stays flat across the bottom of the roof slab.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. ■ ■ For Offset. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture. click to place the roof line. Add the roof 1 In the Project Browser. and press ENTER. You sketch the footprint (perimeter) of the roof in a plan view. Adding a Roof In this exercise. 5 Move the cursor over grid line E.

7 On the Options Bar. 9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line (blue line above). 8 Select grid line C to place another roof line (blue line to the left). enter 300 mm.6 Select grid line 5. and when the blue dashed line displays. Adding a Roof | 99 . move the cursor slightly below the grid line. for Offset. click to place the roof line.

click Finish Roof. click (Trim/Extend). 11 Trim the rooflines: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. Add the roof drain 13 In the drawing area. Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown. and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5.10 Press ESC. select the roof. 100 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want to keep). ■ 12 On the Design Bar.

Adding a Roof | 101 . and press ENTER. 17 On the Design Bar.14 On the Options Bar. The result is a roof slab which slopes down to a single point. Create a section view 18 On the View tab of the Design Bar. on grid D. click Section. click (Add new points to the slab shape). 19 Click above the top horizontal line of the roof. enter -100 mm. and click to specify the section. 16 Select the intersection of grid lines D and 4. for Elevation. 15 On the Options Bar. click Modify. move the cursor down below the roof.

The variable check box allows the lower face of the roof to stay flat while the upper face follows the desired slope. 22 Zoom in to the upper left corner of the section. In section. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. 29 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 102 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Modify. Modify the roof structure 26 In the plan view. 25 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. click Edit/New. 24 In the Project Browser. (Element Properties). under Floor Plans. click Edit. The design intent is to have the underside of the roof flat rather than sloped. double-click 06 Roof. 21 Double-click the section head to open the section. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. This command tiles the windows so the roof can be seen in section and plan views. select Variable. for Structure. and on the Options Bar. 23 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. under Construction.20 On the Design Bar. for Structure [1]. you see that the roof slab is sloped on both faces (upper and lower). 30 Click OK 3 times. select the roof.

select Fascia : Fascia . 34 Maximize the window for the 06 Roof floor plan. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. select each edge.Roof Edge. You select the upper edge of the roof around the perimeter to define the host sweep path. click Modify. 39 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. zoom in to the roof. click (Default 3D View). Add swept fascias 36 On the View toolbar. Host sweeps are profile driven shapes. moving counter-clockwise.31 On the Design Bar. Delete the section view 32 In the floor plan. 41 Starting with the left front edge. 40 In the Type Selector. the correct profile and fascia have been defined beforehand. 35 Zoom to fit the floor plan in the window. 38 In the 3D view. click OK. Adding a Roof | 103 . select the section line. and press DELETE. 33 In the warning dialog. Only the family and the path of the sweep must be defined. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. In this case. on the View Control Bar. 37 If necessary.

the curtain wall resizes with it. you add a curtain wall. View the roof 43 In the Project Browser. 104 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under 3D Views.42 On the Design Bar. Adding a Curtain Wall In this exercise. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. You constrain the curtain wall to the grid. double-click To Building. click Modify. so if you resize the grid. Adding a Curtain Wall on page 104. 44 Proceed to the next exercise.

rvt. click Training Files. and click OK. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 10 When a blue dashed line displays. click to place the first curtain wall segment. Click OK twice. enter 2100 mm. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_curtainwall. enter Retail Storefront. for Type. When you duplicate a type. 7 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). click Duplicate. select Horizontal Grid Continuous. 3 In the Type Selector. for Spacing. For Level. you copy an existing family type and change its name and parameters to create a new unique type. select 01 Entry Level. for Spacing. click Edit/New.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Wall. Adding a Curtain Wall | 105 . For Height. select 05 Roof Garden. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog. Add curtain wall segments 1 In the Project Browser. for Join Condition. The type is saved in the project. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. click 01 Entry Level. Under Construction. Under Horizontal Grid Pattern. enter 1050 mm. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. 9 Move the cursor over grid line 1 near its endpoint. 6 In the Name dialog. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). enter 600 mm. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Floor Plans. and move it slightly toward the building interior. For Offset.

If the grid moves. click (Trim/Extend). 15 On the View Control Bar. dimension both (opposite) corners of the curtain wall to the grid. click Dimension. double-click To Building. but opt to keep the constraints when prompted. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. View the curtain wall 14 In the Project Browser. 13 On the Design Bar. under 3D Views. verify the view settings: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. and lock the dimensions.11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 600 mm from the grid lines toward the building interior. so they remain in the view. the locks ensure that the curtain wall moves with it. you can delete the dimensions. If you want to hide them. These dimensions are not in a sketch. Trim the curtain wall segments 12 On the Tools toolbar. 106 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and trim each curtain wall segment.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_curtainwall. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building entrance.rvt. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating an Entrance on page 107. You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass. Creating an Entrance | 107 . click Training Files.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.

in the center of the 01 Entry Level. Do not select Columns. 2 On the View Control Bar. click All. and double-click South. you want to change the view so only curtain wall panels and columns display. and click None. 8 Zoom in to the entrance area. clear one element to clear all the elements. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). under the element list. select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns. 7 Click OK. To better work with the curtain wall panels. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. 108 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .Modify the South elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. as these usually represent internal pilasters. All the elements in the list are selected. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 5 Under Visibility. 4 On the Model Categories tab. under Views (all). 6 Under Visibility.

16 On the View Control Bar. 12 With the panels selected. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. Creating an Entrance | 109 . click Modify. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. click the pin to remove it from each of the panels. press and hold CTRL. and select the other panels around the entrance as shown. in the Type Selector. select System Panel : Solid. 11 When all 9 panels are selected. 10 Select 1 panel. double-click {3D}.9 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for. If you select View ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. 15 Zoom so you can see the entire drawing. 17 In the Project Browser. in this case an architectural elevation. select Architectural Elevation. 18 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views. you see that the visibility of many of the model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected. 14 In the Apply View Template dialog.

110 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click South.19 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 22 Move the cursor over the curtain wall mullion as shown. 20 In the Project Browser. 21 Zoom to the front of the building. under 3D Views. double-click To Building.

Creating an Entrance | 111 . 28 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion. and click to select it. click Add or Remove Segments. click Modify.23 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line. 25 Select the mullion that you selected previously. select One Segment. 30 On the Design Bar. select M_Curtain Wall Sgl Glass. 32 In the Type Selector. 29 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion to the right. click Curtain Grid. and press ESC to remove the grid lines as shown. 27 On the Options Bar. 31 Select the newly created curtain wall panel (press TAB to cycle through selections). and unpin it. 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 24 On the Options Bar. select another mullion to the right.

and unpin it. 35 Zoom in to the front of the building. select it. 36 Zoom in to the first panel. press TAB until it is selected. 34 On the View toolbar. 112 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .33 Repeat for the next 3 panels. and view the new entrance. click (Default 3D View). 37 Move the cursor over the bottom mullion.

3rd. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and add an entrance to the north side of the building. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. you create a drop ceiling on the 01 Entry Level of the building.38 Press DELETE. remove the mullions from the 2nd. 40 Optionally. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 113 . Creating a Drop Ceiling In this exercise. and 4th panels. 39 Using the same process. Use the same steps that you used to create the south entrance. Creating a Drop Ceiling on page 113. open the North elevation.

and open Metric\m_RRB_add_drop_ceiling. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select 02 Level. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Training Files. 3 Right-click in the view. under Floor Plans.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 114 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .rvt. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. and click View Properties. for Underlay. Display 02 Level as an underlay 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Click OK. under Graphics. 2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building.

The cursor changes to a pencil. right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level.Create a callout 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click to complete the callout. select the grip closest to the callout head. and drag the grip down to position the callout head below the grid as shown. 8 Select the callout. 9 In the Project Browser. ■ Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column. under Floor Plans. enter Display Area. click Callout. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 115 . which indicates you must draw the callout. 10 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. and click OK. 7 Place the callout: ■ Specify a point above the top left column.

Create a section 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 13 Select the section line. right-click. and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level. 116 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 14 Press ESC. 16 Select the section box. 12 Draw a section line. 15 Double-click the section marker to view the section. and click Flip Section. as shown. click Section.

18 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. Draw interior walls 19 In the Project Browser. 27 On the Options Bar. expand Sections (Building Section). click Wall. double-click 01 Entry Level. 25 Press ESC twice. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Draw). 21 In the Type Selector. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Finish Face: Exterior. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 117 . and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay. select Basic Wall : Interior . right-click Section 1.17 In the Project Browser. ■ 23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor. Click (Rectangle). and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines D and 4 to draw a 5000 x 5000 mm square wall inside the grid lines. enter Section Display Area. under Floor Plans. click (Align).135mm Partition (2-hr). and click OK. Lock both alignments. 24 On the Tools toolbar. For Loc Line. click Dimension. 26 On the Design Bar. for Prefer. select Wall faces.

double-click 01 Entry Level. you modify them to be bulkhead walls.) 36 Press ESC twice. Next. 31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid. (Press TAB to highlight the ceiling line or wall face before selecting. click Ceiling. and lock the dimension. 38 On the View Control Bar. and lock the dimension.28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid. 35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces. Notice that the walls extend to the floor. 32 In the Type Selector. 33 Click inside the newly placed walls to place a ceiling in that space. under Sections (Building Section). 34 Press ESC to exit ceiling mode. Add a ceiling 30 In the Project Browser. 118 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Ceiling Plans. select Compound Ceiling : 600 x 600mm Grid. double-click Section Display Area. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 37 In the Project Browser.

double-click Section Display Area. 40 Move the cursor over one of the walls. and press ESC. and click (Element Properties). enter 2700 mm. ■ ■ The walls attach to the 02 Level floor. under Constraints. for Base Offset. click Attach. click to select it. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 2700 mm. press TAB until you select the wall chain. and click to select the walls. 41 On the Options Bar. On the Options Bar. 43 On the Design Bar. 47 In the Project Browser. press TAB until the chain of walls is selected. Select the 02 Level Floor. for Top/Base. 44 Press TAB to highlight the ceiling. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 119 . click (Element Properties). double-click 01 Entry Level.Make bulkhead walls 39 In the Project Browser. 48 Attach the walls to the 02 Level floor: ■ Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling. click Modify. 46 Press ESC. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. for Height Offset From Level. under Ceiling Plans. and click to select the walls. and click OK. under Constraints. under Sections. and click OK.

under Ceiling Plans. view the ceiling structure. 58 On the Edit toolbar. double-click 01 Entry Level. View the ceiling structure 50 Select the ceiling. 120 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 52 In the Type Properties dialog. click (Rotate). Rotate the ceiling grid 57 Select the center ceiling grid line. 54 Click OK.49 In the Project Browser. 53 In the Edit Assembly dialog. click Cancel. click Edit/New. for Structure. for Type. under Construction. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. 59 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid. and click . click Cancel. click Edit. 55 In the Type Properties dialog.

62 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid. 61 Press ESC. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 121 . enter 45. and press ENTER.60 Click.

under 3D Views. copy the drop ceiling to the other building levels. 122 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 67 Proceed to the next exercise. click Shadows On. 66 Optionally. Creating Multi-Level Stairs on page 123. click Shadows Off. 64 On the View Control Bar. 65 On the View Control Bar. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. double-click To Building.View the building in 3D with shadows 63 In the Project Browser.

rvt. You create a flight of stairs and stairwell on the 01 Entry Level of the building.Creating Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. you create multi-level stairs and a stairwell that span the levels of the building. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 123 . double-click 01 Entry Level. click ■ ■ (Pick Lines). 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click to create a reference plane to the right. 4 Draw 2 reference planes that you will use to locate the flight of stairs: Move the cursor over grid line C. and copy it to the 05 Level. enter 1500 mm. Create the stair 1 In the Project Browser. click Ref Plane. click Training Files. and click to create a reference plane to the left. Move the cursor over grid line B. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_stair. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You then cut an opening through the floors on each level. under Floor Plans. 3 On the Options Bar. and for Offset. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an equal number of risers created and risers remaining.5 On the Design Bar. 7 Using the same method. and specify a point to create first stair flight. and drag the model ends so the reference plane only displays between grid lines 2 and 3. click Stairs. 6 Select the left reference plane. click Modify. shorten the right reference plane. 124 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . C. You will create the stair in the area between grid lines B. 9 Sketch the stair: ■ ■ Select the bottom endpoint of the right reference plane. 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and 3. 2.

select Finish Face: Interior. ■ 14 Draw walls around the stair. 12 In the Type Selector. The complete stair displays. and select the 2nd reference plane. click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 125 .■ ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the left. and specify a point. Move the cursor down. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ For Loc Line. Draw walls around the stair 11 On the Design Bar. select Basic Wall : Generic . Click (Rectangle). including its handrails.225mm Masonry. with a message that 20 risers have been created and 0 remain. beyond the end of the stair. click Wall. 10 On the Options Bar.

Make sure you select the stair and not the railing. align the 2 vertical side edges of the stair with the 2 vertical walls and lock the alignments. and lock the alignment. press TAB until the stair edge is selected. Select the interior face of the wall. 126 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Lock the dimension. Click Modify. and specify a point away from the wall. Select the wall. click Dimension. 18 Using the same technique. click Align.15 On the Tools toolbar. and press ENTER. enter 1200 mm. select Wall faces. select the dimension value. and click to select it. Select the bottom of the stair. 20 Dimension the distance from the bottom of the stair to the interior face of the bottom horizontal wall: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 17 Select the interior face of the top horizontal wall. 16 Move the cursor over the top horizontal outside edge of the stair. for Prefer.

TIP To flip the door swing. Because the dimension is constrained. and drag it to the left to test the stair and wall constraints. 23 Select the stair. click Door. The stair and walls move to the left. but leave the stair and wall constrained to each other. and press DELETE. select M_Single-Flush : 0915 x 2134mm. 24 On the Standard toolbar. click Add a door to the stairwell 26 On the Design Bar. a warning displays. press the SPACEBAR before you place the door. 28 On the Options Bar. 27 In the Type Selector. (Undo). 25 While pressing CTRL. 22 Click OK to delete the dimension. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 127 . 29 Select the right side of the lower horizontal wall to place the door. clear Tag on Placement.21 Select the dimension. and press DELETE. select both reference planes.

For Top Constraint. You must cut an opening through the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs.30 On the Design Bar. for Multistory Top Level. 33 Select the stair. click 37 Press and hold the Orbit button. 41 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. for Base Constraint. 45 Align the top horizontal shaft sketch line with the top horizontal interior wall face and lock the alignment. 128 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 40 Zoom in to the stairs. (Default 3D View). double-click 01 Entry Level. select 05 Roof Garden. Click OK. but if you view the top level of the building. Click OK. Under Constraints. verify that Up to level: 05 Roof Garden is selected. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Click (Draw). click Align. (Rectangle). you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors. select all 4 walls. click 36 On the View toolbar. 38 Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. Create a shaft opening 39 In the Project Browser. 35 On the View toolbar. Span the height of the building 31 While pressing CTRL. ■ 43 Draw a rectangular shaft opening around the stairs. (Element Properties). and click ■ ■ 34 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. and click 32 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). select 00 Foundation. click Modify. You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building. (SteeringWheels). under Floor Plans. and move the cursor to spin the building model. 44 On the Tools toolbar. click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening.

click (Default 3D View). and spin the building so you can 54 If necessary. (SteeringWheels). select 02 Level through 05 Roof Garden. on the View toolbar. 52 In the Select Levels dialog. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 129 . 50 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. click see the roof. 51 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. and lock the alignment.46 Align the 2 vertical shaft sketch lines with the interior face of the 2 vertical walls. Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening. 48 Click Finish Sketch to complete the shaft. 47 Align the bottom horizontal shaft sketch line with the bottom tread of the stair. View the shaft and stair 53 On the View toolbar. and lock the alignments. Copy the door to multiple levels 49 Select the door. and click OK.

(Default 3D View). click 60 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening. The shaft opening will cut through any level it touches. ■ 58 On the View toolbar. You learn how to access and modify the profile and height of the wall to create a decorative wall that extends past the height of the 06 Roof level. 61 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height In this exercise. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and click 57 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ (Element Properties). double-click 01 Entry Level. under Floor Plans. click 59 On the View toolbar. for Base Offset. By offsetting the base. you prevent it from cutting through the 01 Entry Level floor. (SteeringWheels). 130 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . select Up to Level: 06 Roof. 56 Select the shaft.55 In the Project Browser. enter 300 mm. Under Constraints. and click OK. you create a wall on the 05 Roof Garden level. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height on page 130. 62 Proceed to the next exercise. For Top Constraint.

2 Right-click in the view. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. for Underlay. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 131 . and open Metric\m_RRB_wall_profile. and click View Properties. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select 06 Roof. double-click 05 Roof Garden. click Wall. under Floor Plans.rvt. and click OK. under Graphics. Add a basic wall to the 05 Roof Garden level 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files.

8 Select the floor on the right side of the wall. select Basic Wall : Generic . click (Align). Modify the profile of the wall 10 Select the wall.5 In the Type Selector. click Remove Constraints. and then select the right face of the wall. 17 On the Options Bar. 12 Zoom in to the top right area between the C and E grid lines. click Lines. 16 On the Design Bar. You must draw the wall from left to right to position it on the correct side of grid line 3. select Elevation: South. click . 14 Select the 3750 mm vertical dimension value. and on the Options Bar. enter 9750. 6 Draw the wall above the edge of the roof shown in the underlay. 13 Select the top sketch line for the wall. and press ENTER. The exact placement is not important. 15 In the error dialog. and click Open View.225mm Masonry. and click (Fillet arc). 7 On the Tools toolbar. click Edit Profile. 9 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements. 132 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 11 In the Go To View dialog.

click . under 3D Views. 23 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. click Finish Sketch. and click (Circle). 20 Draw a circle with a 1200 mm radius just below the fillet arc.18 In the upper right corner of the profile. select a point on the profile to the left of the corner. as shown: 19 On the Options Bar. and select a third point within the corner to create a rounded corner. 22 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D}. as shown: 21 On the Design Bar. select a point on the vertical sketch line below the corner. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 133 .

You learn how to place and adjust these components in project views. Adding Entourage and Site Components In this exercise.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 134 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you place planters on the 05 Roof Garden level to create a roof garden. and place people and a car on and next to the sidewalk. 24 Proceed to the next exercise. create a sidewalk on 2 sides of the building. Adding Entourage and Site Components on page 134.

6 In the Type Selector. click Component. 5 On the Basics tab. Create the roof garden 1 In the Project Browser. TIP After you place the 1st planter. between grid lines C and D. and press ESC twice.4. click Training Files. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 135 . as shown. select Planter : 1220 x 1220.5 Meters. under Floor Plans. 4 Add 3 planters on the inside of the floor and grid line 5. double-click 05 Roof Garden.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry .rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select M_RPC Tree . and open Metric\m_RRB_host. 3 In the Type Selector. 7 Click to place a tree in the center of each planter. click Component. move the cursor over the planter and move it to the right to display a dashed blue line that helps you to place the next planter.

13 In the Type Properties dialog. 11 Select one of the trees. as shown.8 On the View toolbar. enter 2400 mm. for Type. 14 In the Name dialog. click (Default 3D View). 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 9 Click and hold the left mouse button on the ViewCube. and on the Options Bar. and click OK. (Element Properties). and in the Type Selector. enter 1500 mm. For Offset. 10 In the Project Browser. The height of the trees no longer extends past the roof. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 17 While pressing CTRL. under 3D Views. under Floor Plans. and then click OK twice. click Floor. 136 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click 12 In the Element Properties dialog. View the roof. click Lines. under Dimensions. 18 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. click Duplicate.5 Meters. and move the mouse to orient the view to the Southwest. enter Japanese Cherry 1. 21 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. double-click 01 Entry Level. 16 Click Apply.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry 1. double-click {3D}. select the 2 remaining trees. Create a sidewalk outside of the building 19 In the Project Browser. double-click 05 Roof Garden. and notice that the trees that you placed in the planters protrude through the roof.5 Meters. for Height. select M_RPC Tree .

Adding Entourage and Site Components | 137 . 24 Press TAB until a line that is offset 2400 mm below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B. and click to sketch a line. and click to sketch a line. 28 Select the right vertical floor line. 29 On the Options Bar. and click to place the line.23 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B. for Offset. sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5. click (Draw). 26 On the Options Bar. enter 0 mm. 27 Select the bottom horizontal floor line. 25 Using the same method.

clear Chain. 32 Press ESC. and click to finish the line. click (Trim/Extend). 31 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical line. 138 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click to finish the line. 34 On the Tools toolbar. 36 Select the line between grid lines A and B. move the cursor up 900 mm. and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom horizontal line of the floor. 37 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. 35 Select the line that you just drew.30 On the Options Bar. and then select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. 33 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B. move the cursor to the right approximately 1200 mm. and then select the horizontal line near grid line 1.

50 Click to place Alex on the sidewalk. 45 Click OK. a photorealistic image displays. When you render an image. for Height Offset from Level. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. Next. select M_RPC Male : Alex. enter Sidewalk. click Duplicate. 47 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. RPC people are represented by a tear drop shape. 48 In the Type Selector. click Component. create a new type for the sidewalk element because it is currently a floor element. 42 In the Name dialog. click 41 In the Type Properties dialog. Place 2 people on the sidewalk 46 Zoom to the lower right corner of the sidewalk. for Type. Placeholders for RPC content display in 2D and 3D views only. 39 Select the sidewalk. as shown: (Element Properties). 44 In the Element Properties dialog. enter -250 mm. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 139 . 43 Click OK twice. 49 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. near Column E5. select Rotate after placement. The pointed end of the shape indicates the person’s line of sight. The completed sidewalk displays. under Constraints. and on the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. 51 Move the cursor to rotate approximately 150 degrees. and click so he is facing the column. In plan view.38 On the Design Bar.

52 In the Type Selector. and place it along the sidewalk behind him. and click to place her on the sidewalk. 56 Press ESC twice. 57 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 58 In the camera view (3D View 1). 140 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and place it in the corner of the scene as shown. click the car. 54 In the Type Selector. you can use the Rotate tool to further adjust the component placement. and click (Element Properties). and click to place Cathy so she is facing Alex.NOTE If necessary. click Camera. select M_RPC Beetle. about 30 degrees. select M_RPC Female : Cathy. 53 Move the cursor clockwise. 55 Press the spacebar to rotate it until it is facing away from Alex.

64 Select Alex. 60 In the Project Browser. you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host. Next. 65 Click the sidewalk. double-click West. click Pick Host. If the sidewalk changes height. click Pick Host. and on the Options Bar. both Cathy and Alex will move with it. under Elevations. enter -300 mm. under 3D Views.59 In the Element Properties dialog. 66 Using the same method. for Offset. under Constraints. 63 Click the sidewalk. View the front of the building 67 In the Project Browser. double-click To Building. 61 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing. When you select a host for a component. pick the sidewalk as the host for the car. you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 141 . and click OK. and on the Options Bar. Select a host for the RPC components 62 Select Cathy.

68 Proceed to the next exercise. After the service core is positioned. and replace them with a service core. The service core is contained in an external file that you bring into the current project as a group. the elements will be ungrouped in the project. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project on page 142.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 142 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Adding a Service Core to the Building Project In this exercise. you remove the multi-level stairs and stairwell that you created in a previous exercise from the building.

and open Metric\m_RRB_add_service_core. Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building. click (Default 3D View). Remove the stairwell from the building model 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. click 6 On the View toolbar. and shaft opening. 4 Press DELETE. (SteeringWheels). walls. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 143 . 3 Select the entire stairwell. In the left pane of the Open dialog. including the stairs. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell. you delete the entire stairwell. double-click 05 Roof Garden. 5 On the View toolbar. and use the Orbit tool to spin the building. click Training Files.rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. By deleting the stairwell from the 05 Roof Garden.

8 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. 13 In the drawing area. and on the Design Bar. Position and align the group 15 On the Tools toolbar. click (Align). 14 In the Project Browser. expand Model. Ignore and close any warnings that are displayed as the file is imported as a group. 144 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Modify. right-click m_RRB_core. click to place an instance of the service core between grid lines B and D and 1 and 2.Add the service core as a group 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. under Floor Plans. 10 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry Level. 11 In the Project Browser. click OK. and open Metric\m_RRB_core. and zoom in to the linked instance. double-click 00 Foundation. Create an instance of the group 12 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. 9 In the Duplicate Types dialog. and click Create Instance.rvt. under Floor Plans. expand Groups. and notice that the linked file is listed.

click 21 On the View toolbar. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 145 . and click to align the center. 19 On the Design Bar. click Modify. NOTE This step is not required and may not be recommended if there is more than one instance of the group. or if the group layout is expected to change. click (top down view). click Modify.16 Align the core: ■ ■ Click the inner top horizontal floor line. 18 Select the core. click Ungroup. ■ ■ Click grid line C. and on the Options Bar. Press TAB to select the wall centerline of the wall between the top 2 rooms. 20 On the View toolbar. Click the exterior face of the top horizontal wall of the core. (Default 3D View). (SteeringWheels). and spin the building to see the inserted group Shaft openings were included as part of the group geometry and are created automatically as the group is placed. 17 On the Design Bar.

After you modify it. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings In this exercise. click Training Files. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings on page 146. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. you cut away a portion of the floor on the 02 Level of the building. 22 Proceed to the final exercise.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. where it is hosted within a railing family. you add glass railings around the floor edges. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 146 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . You copy the railing type into your project from another project.

7 Click Window menu ➤ m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 147 . click OK. 13 On the Tools toolbar. double-click 02 Level. 5 Expand Railing. Modify the 02 Level floor 12 Select the floor. and double-click Lounge Perspective. click Training Files. and select Glass. and Parapet.rvt. and open Metric\m_Conference. This is the railing that you want to add to your model. The floor sketch displays. and click to split the floor.rvt. Handrail only. and expand Railings. expand Families. The rendering displays. click Edit. click (Split). in the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. and on the Options Bar. press and hold CTRL. 2 In the left pane of the dialog. 11 Close the warning dialog that displays. Copy the railing types into the retail building project 4 In the Project Browser. 14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 700 mm to the left of grid line C. 10 In the Duplicate Types dialog. expand Renderings. Notice the glass railing in the foreground. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard.Open a different project and view a rendering of the building lounge 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 In the Conference project. 8 In the Project Browser. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard.

15 On the Design Bar. 25 Select grid line B. 20 Click to create a line starting from the endpoint of the line that you just drew. and click the lock to lock the alignment. move the cursor vertically 1500 mm. 23 Complete the sketch as shown. 24 On the Tools toolbar. click (Align). 18 On the Design Bar. select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B. click Lines. and drag to the left until it intersects with grid line B. 19 Select the left endpoint of the floor. 148 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and on the Options Bar. move the cursor horizontally to the right 1500 mm. 17 Select the right endpoint of the floor where you split it. move the cursor vertically until the line is 1500 mm long. and drag it to the right until it intersects with grid line D. click Modify. and click to draw another line. and click to draw another line. and click to place it. 21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch. verify that Chain is not selected. 22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched. 16 Select the left endpoint of the floor where you split it.

Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 149 . For Offset. and lock the alignment. select Glass. click Finish Sketch. 36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 100 mm. click Yes to attach the top of the walls on 01 Entry Level to the bottom of the 02 Level floor. click Railing Properties. 27 On the Tools toolbar. click (Align). Lock the dimensions. click Railing. 35 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). This is the railing type that you copied from the Conference. for Type. click Dimension.rvt project. Add railings around the floor 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown. 29 On the Design Bar. 33 On the Design Bar. 31 In the Revit dialog. select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D. and click the lock to lock the alignment. and click OK.26 Select grid line D. 30 On the Design Bar. 28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown.

37 On the Design Bar. 150 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Camera. View the floor and railings 40 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 38 Dimension the railing sketch to the edge of the floor and lock the dimension. click Dimension. 41 Place the camera and camera target as shown. 39 Click Finish Sketch.

■ Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 151 . Click (Hide Crop Region) to hide the frame around the view.A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays. You can view the railing that you just added. 42 On the View Control Bar: ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

43 Close all project drawings. 152 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

you learn to create construction documentation in Revit Architecture 2009. NOTE For training purposes. a Kansas City-based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial training files in this section. slight modifications to the building design have been made. 153 . the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. lofty ceilings. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors.Documenting Your Projects In this section of the tutorials. and a roof garden. exterior fire stairs. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. balconies. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. We wish to thank BNIM Architects. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits.

154 .

You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. 155 . and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 4 In this tutorial. elevation. how to create section and elevation views. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. section. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views Creating Views In this lesson. including plan. You learn how to create new views from existing views. you learn how to create views from a building model. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views.

and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 156 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click Training Files.rvt. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser.Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Floor Plans.

Duplicating Plan Views | 157 . enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. under Floor Plans. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 3 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan.2 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. 9 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Rename View dialog. select Level 2. under Floor Plans. and click OK. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

click the current scale. 13 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 11 Under Floor Plans. double-click Vicinity Plan. 12 In the Rename View dialog. and click 1: 1000.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. 158 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click OK. 14 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans. Next. enter Vicinity Plan.

16 Right-click. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 159 . and click Hide in view ➤ Category. you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model. 18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.rvt.15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden.

160 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 1.rvt. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. select 1:100. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry.South East elevation view Section view Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 3 In the Type Selector. click Elevation. select Elevation: Building Elevation. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker. for Scale. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. under Floor Plans.

Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. 7 Select and drag the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. click Modify. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 161 . click Modify. and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed.

162 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . for Scale. expand Floor Plans. 11 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Section: Building Section. double-click South East. click Section. 14 In the Type Selector. select 1:100. 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 1. under Elevations.Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. 10 In the Rename View dialog. 15 On the Options Bar. under Views (all). right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. enter South East. ■ Move the cursor down.

Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. 18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents. and move them to just outside of the left side of the building. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 163 .

click Split Segment.19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Click the midpoint of the section line. and click to place it. drag it to the right (keeping it below the split) until it cuts through the stair. 164 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. expand Sections (Building Section). and double-click Section 1. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 165 . using the blue circular drag grip. View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. 24 Select gridline F.21 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. 23 On the View Control Bar.

26 Click File menu ➤ Save. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan 166 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .25 On the Design Bar. click Modify. you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of each new callout view. you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view. To create each view. Creating Callout Views In this exercise.

5 Draw the callout around the large stairs in the center of the plan: ■ Click to specify a point to the upper-right of the stair. select Floor Plan. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. ■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. 4 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans.Enlarged Stair Plan Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Creating Callout Views | 167 .rvt. click Callout. 3 In the Type Selector. and click to specify a point to complete the callout. select 1:50. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. for Scale. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser.Resulting callout view . double-click Level 1.

click Modify. Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. 168 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . ■ Select the middle grip. and select the callout boundary. and move it to the left side of the callout boundary.6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar.

and click OK. and click to specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. 13 In the Type Selector. 9 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Section 1. click Modify. for Scale. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. select Detail View: Detail. 14 On the Options Bar. under Sections (Building Sections). select 1:50. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. enter Enlarged Stair Plan.7 On the Design Bar. Creating Callout Views | 169 . 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Callout. Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans.

16 Modify the callout leader as shown. 170 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .■ Move the cursor diagonally down. and click to specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang.

Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. expand Detail Views (Details). 18 In the Rename View dialog. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Detail Views (Details).17 In the Project Browser. double-click Roof Overhang Detail. Creating Callout Views | 171 . and click OK. and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. enter Roof Overhang Detail.

double-click Level 1. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises. open Metric\Families\Annotations. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. You change the appearance of the section mark head. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise.rfa.rvt. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Open. the elevation markers. select Custom-Section Head. 172 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Existing stair callout head and boundary Modified stair callout head and boundary Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. under Floor Plans. click Training Files. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards.

enter Section Head – Custom. for Section Head. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. scroll to Section Marks. and select 3. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 173 . and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 On the floor plan. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. click Duplicate.5mm Square. select the section line. and click OK. 16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. and click OK. click Load into Project. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. select the current project.The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. and click OK twice. 4 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. 8 In the Name dialog. 22 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate. 19 Click OK. Section Tail . 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. click Edit/New. 17 Under Category. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. click the Annotation Objects tab. Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. . Section Tail – Filled. select Section Head . scroll to Section Line. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. clear any others. and select 2.Filled. and can be applied to the section line.Custom. and click OK. 12 For Section Tag. 15 Under Category. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. enter 12. On the floor plan.

for Elevation Tag. select Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. 30 On the Design Bar. On the floor plan. and click OK. click Load into Project. clear all others. Click OK. select the current project. select Square. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. . select 3. and on the Options Bar. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. 27 Click OK twice. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing.5 mm. and click Open. 40 Press ESC. enter 12. for Callout Tag. For Line Weight. open Metric\Families\Annotations. Click OK. click Edit/New. For Corner Radius.rfa. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. notice the square elevation markers that display. click Training Files. and on the Options Bar. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. enter Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. 34 In the Name dialog. and click OK. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. 36 In the drawing. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. For Dimensions ➤ Width. . click Edit/New. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan.23 In the Type Properties dialog. select 12. enter 6 mm. select the callout. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 174 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 39 Click OK twice.5mm Square. select Custom-Callout Head. click Duplicate.

filters. click the Annotation Objects tab. 50 Click File menu ➤ Save. You learn to create view templates.Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. 46 Under Category. scroll down to Callout Boundary. select Dash. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. and visual overrides. view regions. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 45 For Line Pattern. 47 Select Callout Leader Line. 43 Under Category. 49 Click OK. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. and select 7. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views | 175 . expand Callout Boundary. masking regions. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. and select 4.

4 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. under Elevations. To accomplish this. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building.Creating a View Template In this exercise. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG.rvt. and double-click East. click Zoom to Fit. View templates provide an easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. click (Show Crop Region). and features blue triangular grips and break marks. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. 176 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Presentation view Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 On the View Control Bar. click (Hide Crop Region). 5 On the View Control Bar. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. The crop region displays as red. and apply it to multiple elevation views. 6 On the View Toolbar.

and section lines are now hidden in the view. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. levels. 10 Click the Annotation Categories tab. Creating a View Template | 177 . 11 Under Visibility. elevation markers. clear Entourage. Callouts. grids. 8 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 7 On the View Control bar. under Visibility. 9 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 13 On the View Control bar. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections 12 Click OK.

and click Create View Template From View. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. and click OK. double-click North. click Apply. and click OK. 16 In the View Templates dialog. 19 In the Select View Template dialog.rvt. under Elevations. 20 Using the same method. 178 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 21 Click File menu ➤ Save As.14 In the Project Browser. 15 In the New View Template dialog. under Elevations. 18 In the Project Browser. right-click North. edit the crop region as before. click OK. and click Apply View Template. 22 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. 17 In the Project Browser. right-click East.

You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. under Floor Plans. right-click. and click Properties. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser.View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. select Level Below (Level 4). for Level. select Level Below (Level 4). Under View Depth. 2 In the Project Browser. Click OK twice.rvt. and the exterior area on the south side of the building. under Extents. select Penthouse. double-click Penthouse. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. for View Range. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. View Range and Plan Regions | 179 . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. click Edit. for Bottom. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views.

7 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Properties. select Level 4. 6 In the Project Browser. for Level. select Roof Plan. for Bottom. Click OK twice. under Floor Plans. under Extents. double-click Roof Plan. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Under View Depth. 180 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . right-click. select Level 4.Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. click Edit. for View Range.

and select the endpoint the gridline shown below.Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. Under View Depth. 10 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. under Extents. View Range and Plan Regions | 181 . select Unlimited. select Unlimited. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. click Edit. click Region Properties. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click Plan Region. for View Range. Click OK twice. click Lines. 16 On the Design Bar. for Level. click Finish Sketch. Move you cursor diagonally. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). 11 On the Options Bar. In the left corner of the building. for Bottom.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. After you apply the filter. in this case.17 On the Design Bar. 182 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. under Views (all). 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. click Modify. click the Filters tab. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. expand Floor Plans. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 1.rvt. the fire rating of the walls.

and apply a color. click Add. select the red color. Select contains. 5 In the Filters dialog. select Solid Fill. click (New). for Pattern. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. 7 In the Filters dialog. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. for Color. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. Using Filters to Control Visibility | 183 . under Basic colors. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. 14 In the Color dialog. select Fire Rating. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. under Categories. and click OK. under Projection/Surface. 12 On the Filter tab. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. click Override under Patterns. for Rated Walls. click <No Override>. click Edit/New. 11 Select Rated Walls. 16 Click OK. enter Rated Walls. and click OK. You click the current color value to open the Color dialog. Enter Hr. select Walls. and click OK. and click OK. click OK. 10 On the Filter tab. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog.4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 17 Using the same method. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. under Filters. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. 9 Click OK. click Remove.

Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. you obscure geometry in portions of a view. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. To accomplish this. Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked 184 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

under Floor Plans. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the View Control Bar. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region.rvt. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. 11 In the Type Selector. 7 On the View menu. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 3 In the Rename View dialog.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. right-click. 5 On the View menu. and click Rename. Masking Portions of a View | 185 . click Show Crop Region. 8 Select the crop region. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 9 On the View Control Bar. click Masking Region. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Select Copy of Level 1. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. as shown. select Invisible lines. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left.

13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. 186 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click (Rectangle). click Finish Sketch. 14 On the Design Bar.12 On the Options Bar. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Level 1. NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. click the current scale. under Pattern Overrides. 11 Click OK twice. click black. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. and click 1: 50. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog.Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. 4 On the View Control Bar.rvt. select Solid fill. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. right-click Unit 18 Plan . 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. and click OK. right-click. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and click Override. for Pattern. under Visibility. select Walls. 7 Under Cut. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. Working with Visual Overrides | 187 . under Floor Plans. click <No Override> to apply a color. and click OK. for Color. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. click in the Patterns field. right-click. and click Rename. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. 1 In the Project Browser. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan.

15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. under Visibility. clear Grids. and click OK. 16 Under Visibility. clear Floors.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view 12 On the Design Bar. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. 188 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click Modify.

18 Right-click. and click Hide in View ➤ Category. Working with Visual Overrides | 189 . 19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown.

22 In the Line Graphics dialog. click a purple color. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. under Lines. for Pattern. 21 Under Projection/Surface. Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. select Dash. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. 25 Click OK twice. By using the previous method to make the selection. for Color.20 Right-click. click <No Override> to apply a color. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. click Projection Lines. 23 In the Color dialog. select the sofa. and click OK. 190 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Override. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. right-click.

click . 32 Select one of the lamps. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color.28 For Color. and click OK twice. and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. select a bright green color. Working with Visual Overrides | 191 . click By Category Override. Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. 30 On the Design Bar. 29 In the Color dialog. click Modify. right-click.

Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. how to add views to the sheets. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. 192 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Architecture project. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click .33 On the View Control Bar.

click Training Files. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and click View. Creating Drawing Sheets | 193 . A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats. right-click.rvt. select A0 metric.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. click Sheet. and click OK. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields.Creating Sheets.

3 In the Project Browser. click Modify. Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. under Identity Data: ■ ■ ■ (Properties). For Sheet Number. on the Options Bar. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. Click OK. enter A101.NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. For Sheet Name. and select the title block. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. 194 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . enter Site Plan. 7 On the Design Bar. click Modify.Unnamed. click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 When the title block highlights. expand Sheets (all).

enter 2009-1. enter 15 May. for Project Address. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. For Project Status. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. enter For Approval. Smith. enter Freighthouse Flats. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 Click OK. The new project information displays in the titleblock. For Client Name. Creating Drawing Sheets | 195 .Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. under Other. For Project Number. MA 12345 12 Click OK. click Edit. enter J. For Project Name. NOTE Text size is determined within the sheet family. 2009.

select A0 metric.Sections A108 .Elevations A105 .rvt. 17 In the Project Browser. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 . and click Rename. and click OK. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 196 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.Elevations A106 . you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise.Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser. and click OK.Elevations A107 . and click Save. Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps. for Name. 18 In the Sheet Title dialog. enter Floor Plan. right-click. 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. select the new sheet name.Stairs In the following exercise. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet.Layout Plan A104 . you add views to these sheets.

Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. and drag it to the sheet.Floor Plan. and click to place it. The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. under Floor Plans. 4 On the Design Bar. click Modify. under Sheets (all).Elevations. select Level 1.rvt. under Sheets (all). and click to place the view. 2 In the Project Browser. Adding Views to Sheets | 197 .Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. The red border around the view no longer displays. 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. double-click A102 . under Elevations (Building Elevation). Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. double-click A104 . 6 In the Project Browser.

align it with the East elevation.7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. 198 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). 12 On the Design Bar. drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. and click to place it. drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet.Sections. click Modify. click Modify. 8 On the Design Bar. under Sheets (all). double-click A107 . 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). and click to place it. and click to place it. Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser.

and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view.Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. and click OK. NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. Adding Views to Sheets | 199 . . select 1:5. move the cursor over it. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. zoom in to the grip. 16 Select title bar. 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. and press TAB until it highlights. for View Scale.

under Sheets (all). 18 Under Floor Plans. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers.Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser.Stairs. under Floor Plans. and click to place it. double-click Level 1. click Modify. Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. 21 Zoom to the stair callout. 200 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. double-click A108 . 22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. 19 On the Design Bar. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save.

and then make changes and deactivate the view. 5 On the Design Bar. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line. click Modify. In order to do this. under Sheets (all).rvt. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. enter 16700 mm. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 201 . and click Activate View.Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise.Sections. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Select the building section view. double-click A107 . Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. and press ENTER. you must first activate the view on the sheet. right-click.

Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. 202 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Elevations (Building Elevation). 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. 7 In the Project Browser. and click Deactivate View. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. After you create the sheet.6 Right-click. Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated. You modify the view to hide the view title. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. you create a title sheet for your drawing set. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.rvt. double-click North.

6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. Click OK. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. select the new sheet name. click Camera. For Sheet Name. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 203 . right-click. select A0 metric. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. enter T. and click Properties. 7 Place the camera as shown.Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. enter Title Sheet. and click OK. The camera view displays. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. 3 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.

click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . enter 100000 mm. select Far Clip Active. double-click T . 13 In the Project Browser. 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. and click to place it in the center of the sheet. Click OK. Under Camera. Under Extents. enter 1500 mm. under Sheets (all). click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. enter 18000 mm. 204 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 12 On the View Control Bar. 11 On the View Control Bar.8 On the Options Bar. for Eye Elevation. For Far Clip Offset. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. For Target Elevation. 14 Under 3D Views.Title Sheet.

click Modify. under Graphics. enter 635 mm. for Show title. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. and then click OK. 19 Select the view on the sheet. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. click Edit/New. 24 Click OK twice. select No. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. 17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. 22 In the Name dialog. 25 On the Design Bar. select Scale (locked proportions). click Duplicate.15 With the view selected. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. for Height. click Size. enter Viewport/no title mark. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. Under Model Crop Size. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 205 . on the Options Bar. and click OK. click Modify. and on the Options Bar. Click Apply. .

and close the exercise file.26 Click File menu ➤ Save. 206 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged.Level 1. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. expand Floor Plans. Tagging Objects In this lesson. click Training Files.Tagging and Scheduling 5 In this tutorial. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans. Because of the open style floor plan. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . such as doors and windows. 207 . you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise.rvt. You also learn to create different types of schedules. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. such as room and window schedules. in your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command.

as shown: 208 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. 4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. and click Room and Area. 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Room Separation. and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right. right-click in the Design Bar. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. move the cursor to the right.2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. as shown: 5 Using the same method.

9 In the Tags dialog. Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. click Modify.6 Using the same method. create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area. Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 209 . click Load. 7 On the Design Bar.

10 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. The room tag number displays in blue. 15 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view.rfa. 13 On the Options Bar. click OK. and the rectangle contains the room tag. type 2400 mm. and select the room tag. click Training Files. 17 Zoom in on the tag number. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 210 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 11 In the Tags dialog. indicating that it can be edited. 14 For Offset. 16 On the Design Bar. type U18-1. click it. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag. click Room. and press ENTER. and click to place the room and tag. verify that Tag on placement is selected.

and Living): Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 211 . Dining. click Modify. click Modify. type Entry. 20 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. 23 Using the same method. Click to place the new room and tag. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. 22 Click the room text label. 19 On the Design Bar. place rooms and tags.18 Click the room text label. type Kitchen. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. ■ 21 On the Design Bar. Sequential letters are also supported. NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. click Room. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. and press ENTER.

click Room Tag. 27 On the Design Bar. expand Lines. 29 On the Design Bar.Level 2. Tag rooms on upper level 26 In the Project Browser. The rooms are already placed. 212 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. clear Room Separation. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. double-click Unit 18 Plan . on the Model Categories tab. under Floor Plans. 28 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair).Hide the room separations 24 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and moving clockwise. but they need to be tagged. and click OK. click Modify.

Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Tag ➤ By Category. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.rvt. 3 On the Options Bar. 31 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary. and double-click Unit 18 Plan .Level 1. clear Leader. in the Project Browser.rvt.30 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Tagging Doors and Windows | 213 . you learn how to place door and window tags. expand Floor Plans.

Closet door in living room

5 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door, type U18-1, and press ENTER. NOTE The tag symbol and text size are determined by the tag family.

7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identify Data, for Mark, type U18-2, and click OK.

214 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

9 Using one of the methods you just learned, rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags.

10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right, and drag it down to center it in the doorway.

11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door.

Tagging Doors and Windows | 215

Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 13 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, verify that All objects in current view is selected. 15 Under Category, select Door Tags, and click OK. 16 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. 17 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown:

Place window tags 18 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

19 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 20 In the Tags dialog, click Load. 21 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag.rfa. 22 In the Tags dialog, click OK. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 24 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, select Window Tags, and click OK.

216 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

25 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags.

26 Under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 27 Zoom to the drawing extents. 28 Using the same method, tag all untagged windows. 29 Save the file.

Tagging Other Objects
In this exercise, you learn how to tag furniture objects, and modify the tag placement and display. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.rvt. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category. 3 On the Options Bar, select Leader. 4 Select a dining room chair. 5 At the confirmation prompt, click Yes to load a tag. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag.rfa. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags; select the edge to which the leader connects.

Tagging Other Objects | 217

8 Select the furniture in the living room.

9 Click Modify. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap.

11 Select the tag for the table, and drag it above the chair tag.

218 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click the elbow control, and drag it up to form an angled leader.

13 Optionally, modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. 14 Click Modify. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1), and on the Options Bar, clear Leader. 16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table, and on the Design Bar, click Modify.

Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 18 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged, select M_Furniture Tag : Standard, and click OK. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged.

Tagging Other Objects | 219

Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture.

20 On the Options Bar, click

(Filter Selection).

21 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Furniture Tags, and click OK. 22 In the Type Selector, select Furniture Tag: Boxed, and click Modify.

23 Save the file.

Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams
In this lesson, you learn to add schedules. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule.

220 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Creating a Window Schedule
In this exercise, you create a window schedule for the building model shown below.

You begin by creating a window instance schedule; that is, a schedule that lists every window in the building.

Creating a Window Schedule | 221

You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model.

Next, you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. Finally, you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule, in which windows are listed by window type.

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams.rvt.

Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Windows. 4 For Name, type Building Window Schedule, and click OK. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select Comments and click Add. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. 7 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule:
■ ■ ■ ■

Count Height Level Type Mark

222 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Width

8 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

9 Click OK. A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model.

Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark, and on the Options Bar, click Show. If no open view shows the selected element, you are prompted to open one that does. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays, click OK to search through relevant views of the building model.

Creating a Window Schedule | 223

The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model.

12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog, click Close. NOTE By clicking Show, you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. However, in large building models with many views, this can be a time-consuming process. 13 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area, right-click the schedule, and click View Properties. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, for Sort by, select Type Mark 17 Click OK twice. The window schedule is displayed, sorted by type mark.

Change type mark from the schedule 18 In the window schedule, change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A, and press ENTER. 19 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type.

224 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 20 Right-click on the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog, clear Itemize every instance. 23 Click OK twice. The window type schedule is displayed.

24 Change the Type Mark for the other window types, so that the types are sequentially named from A to H, as shown:

25 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 26 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed.

27 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.

Creating a Window Schedule | 225

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule
In this lesson, you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. In this case, you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head, jamb, and sill conditions for a window can be found. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and, unlike shared parameters, you cannot use them to tag objects.

Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add to create the new parameter. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Categories, select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. Under Parameter Data, for Name, type Head Detail. For Group parameter under, select Construction. Select Type.

5 Click OK. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. 6 Using the same method, create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. 7 In the Project Parameter dialog, click OK. Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Building Window Schedule, and click Properties. 9 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail

11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list, so that they are listed before Comments.

226 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click OK twice.

Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule, select Head Detail, Jamb Detail, and Sill Detail. TIP To select all 3 headers, click in the Head Detail header, and without releasing the left mouse button, move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. 14 On the Options Bar, click Group. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule, type Window Details. 16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. For example, under Type Mark A, for Head Detail, type 1/A107; for Jamb Detail, type 2/A107; and for Sill Detail, type 3/A107.

17 Save the file.

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 227

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter
In this exercise, you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. You then hide the column used for the filter, and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Category, select Doors. Under Name, type Unit 18 - Door Schedule. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. For Phase, verify that Phase 1 is selected.

4 Click OK. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark

7 Click the Filter tab, and specify the following values for Filter by:
■ ■ ■

Select Mark in the first field. Select contains in the second field. Type U18 in the third field.

This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with, and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab, and specify the following options:
■ ■

For Sort by, select Family and Type. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row).

9 Click the Formatting tab. 10 Under Fields, select Mark. 11 Under Field formatting, select Hidden field, and click OK.

228 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule, but is not included as a column in the schedule.

Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click A102 - Unit 18. 13 In the Project Browser, click Unit 18 - Door Schedule, and drag it to the sheet.

14 Click to place the schedule in the upper left corner of the sheet. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule.

Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions.

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 229

19 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 20 Save the file.

Creating a Room Schedule
In this exercise, you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial, partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Rooms, and click OK. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select Number, and click Add. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. 5 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Name Level Area

6 Click the Appearance tab. 7 Under Text, to the right of Header text, select Bold. 8 Click OK. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet.

230 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The room Number is U17-46. and press ENTER. type Building Entry. For 103. For 105. For 102. click New. type Corridor.Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. 10 Edit the number to be 101. select Storage. and press ENTER. and press ENTER. select Corridor. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. for room 101. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. next to Rows. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. type Storage. 101-106. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. For 104. add 5 more rooms. for Name. Creating a Room Schedule | 231 . 11 Using the same method.

3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. double-click Level 1. click the bright green swatch. and modify room names. In the Lines field. under Visibility. For Room Separation. 4 Click OK twice. click Override. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. 13 Save the file. click the Lines field. and click OK. click the Color field. type Stair. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and press ENTER. For Weight. select 9. under Projection/Surface. expand Lines. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Under Custom colors. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. you add room separation lines. under Floor Plans. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 232 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .■ For 106. place rooms from a program list.rvt. In the Line Graphics dialog.

Place rooms from a program list 10 On the Design Bar. click Room Separation. draw the horizontal line. click Room. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 233 . 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 7 Click to add 2 room separation lines in the corridor at the right side of the drawing. 9 On the Design Bar. click Modify. First. 8 Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line.Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building.

for Room.Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. 12 Click to place the room in the newly defined entry area (lower right). 234 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . for Room. 14 For Offset. select 102 Storage. 11 On the Options Bar. select 101 Building Entry. 13 On the Options Bar. type 2400 mm.

Place 104 in the space to the left of 103.15 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 18 In the Project Browser. 20 While pressing CTRL. double-click Level 1. and zoom in to the Corridor. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. under Floor Plans. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. 16 Using the same method. as shown: Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 235 . 19 In the Project Browser. select the 3 small walls (in or adjacent to the storage areas). double-click Room Schedule. place the following rooms. Place 106 in the space with the stairs (to the left of room 105). Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. under Schedules/Quantities. 17 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

(Element Properties). click Schedule/Quantities. 30 On the Options Bar. and click Add.21 On the Options Bar. type Units. under Category. Floor Finish. and Wall Finish. 24 Open the Room Schedule. clear Room Bounding. while pressing CTRL. click Modify. Create key schedule 25 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. and for all 3 finishes. 26 In the New Schedule dialog. 31 For Key Name. click 23 On the Design Bar. under Available fields. select Rooms. and click OK. 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 236 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . for Rows. select Base Finish. 27 Select Schedule keys. type As Selected. 29 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. under Constraints. click New. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. and click OK.

32 Using the same method. under Schedules/Quantities. 36 Click OK twice. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. for Available fields. click Check None. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 39 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. right-click Room Schedule. select Units. 33 In the Project Browser. 42 On the Options Bar. for Fields. under Other. 38 Under U17-8. 40 Zoom to the drawing extents. 43 In the Filter dialog. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit. for Room Style. and click Properties. select Room Style. click (Filter Selection). and click OK. select Rooms. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. double-click Level 1. and click OK. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. select Units. click (Element Properties). 41 Draw a selection box around floor plan. 44 On the Options Bar. and click Add. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 237 . for Room Style. 37 Open the Room Schedule.

expand Floor Plans. at the warning prompt. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. under Floor Plans. 238 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and click OK. 48 Save the file. 7 Because you are creating a new color scheme. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. 6 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. select Service. under Views (all). 104. 9 In the Project Browser. select Public. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. select Room Style. and apply it to the Level 1 view. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. For rooms 102 and 105. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. and double-click Level 1. 103. click 5 For Title. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. click OK. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). 47 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. for Color. right-click Level 1. type Room Type. under Graphics. and click Properties. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and 106.rvt. click OK. type Room Type. click the Color Scheme field.46 Open the Room Schedule. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. for Name. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. (Duplicate). 4 In the New color scheme dialog.

select Room Type. click the value in the Color column. click Color Scheme Legend. 20 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 17 On the Design Bar. under Visibility. 16 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. select the color legend. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 239 . a legend displays at the tip of the cursor.11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. clear Visible. Add a color scheme legend 15 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Schemes. 19 On the Options Bar. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 18 In the drawing area. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. When you move the cursor over the drawing area. click Modify. click Edit Color Scheme. expand Lines. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. in the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). and click OK. click Edit. 14 Click OK twice. and clear Room Separation.

select blue. on the Options Bar. type 25 mm.22 In the Color dialog. 24 Click OK. 29 Click OK twice. 30 On the Design Bar. 28 Under Title Text. under Custom color. 23 Using the same method. change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray. for Swatch Width. click Edit/New. click Modify. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. (Element Properties). for Size. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. respectively. 240 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . type 5 mm. under Graphics. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected.

38 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 241 . under Sections. double-click Building Section. under Visibility.Create a section color diagram 31 In the Project Browser. 39 Using the grip at the bottom of the legend. click Color Scheme Legend. select Rooms. volume computations must be enabled from Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. under Sections. 37 Click to place the legend on the drawing. Calculation of room volumes can affect project performance. and click OK. for Color Scheme. select Room Type. 35 Click OK twice. the legend displays at the tip of the cursor. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. 34 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. under Graphics. click Edit. Place the color scheme legend on the section 36 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. and select Properties. As you move the cursor over the drawing area. NOTE In order for color fills to be displayed in section. position the legend horizontally across the bottom of the section view. right-click Building Section. Turn on the visibility of rooms in the building section view 32 In the Project Browser.

42 In the Filter dialog. and the room to the right of the stair on level 1 (Corridor 104). and click OK. for Room Style. 45 While pressing CTRL. and click OK. click Check None. for Room Style. under Identity Data. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. select all the rooms in the stairwell. 242 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . select Public. 41 On the Options Bar.40 Draw a selection box around the entire drawing. 46 Click . click Assign all rooms the Units room style 43 On the Options Bar. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. select Rooms. click . and click OK. (Filter Selection). under Identity Data. select Units.

51 On the Options Bar. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 243 . for Room Style.Assign the penthouse room the service room style 48 Select the penthouse. for Rows. 52 In the Room Style Schedule. under Identity Data. and click . 49 In the Element Properties dialog. excluding the stairwell spaces. select Service. Add suites as a new room style in the Room Style Schedule 50 In the Project Browser. Assign the Suites room style to all rooms on levels 3 and 4 53 Open the Building Section. under Schedules/Quantities. and click OK. TIP You may need to use TAB to select the room in the upper right with the entertainment center. click New. double-click Room Style Schedule. under Key Name for the new row. 54 While pressing CTRL. select all the rooms on levels 3 and 4. type Suites.

62 Repeat this process for all rooms that are bounded by the sloping roof: the remaining suites and the public stairs on the top floor. 58 In the Area and Volume Computations dialog. A new Suites key is added to the color scheme legend. The color fill extends to the roof. for Room Style.55 Click . and click OK. Use volume calculations to control color fills 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. select the room on the left side of the top floor. 59 Under Room Area Computation. but not beyond it. Change room heights 60 In the drawing area. 244 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 56 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. verify that At wall finish is selected. 61 Drag the top Control grip above the bounding roof. and click OK. The color fill will extend to the roof. select Areas and Volumes. under Volume Computations. select Suites.

71 Click OK. for Upper Limit.0. 66 Click OK. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 245 . type 0. select Loft. 68 Click . 69 In the Element Properties dialog. and the living room. under Constraints. 64 In the Element Properties dialog. 70 For Limit Offset. for Upper Limit. 67 On the first level. under Constraints. 72 On the Design Bar.Assign the correct heights to the rooms on the first level 63 On the first level. select the stairwell room. the dining room. type -254 mm. select the public room next to the stairs (Corridor 104). click Modify. and click 65 For Limit Offset. . select Level 2.

Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. double-click {3D}.73 Save the file. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building. under 3D Views. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.rvt. 246 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .

and click OK. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. Clear Itemize every instance. 3 While pressing CTRL. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. and click Add. under Category. 9 Using the same method. Creating a Material Takeoff | 247 . 4 In the Type Selector. 10 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. For Then by. 5 On the Design Bar. click Family and Type.Insulation on Plywood Deck . Select Grand totals. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff.EPDM. select Family and Type. click Modify. select Material: Description. under Available fields. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. select Roofs.2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building.

select Material: Cost. for Name. for Fields.80 248 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 23 For Field formatting. type Estimated Cost. 24 In the Roof Material Takeoff. click the Formatting tab. type the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Material: Cost 16 13. 20 For Formula. and click OK twice. 19 For Type. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 12 Click OK. select Calculate totals. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. type Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2). select Currency. click Edit.11 On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ Under Fields. and click Properties. select Material: Area. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. and under Fields. click Estimated Cost. 17 Click Calculated Value. under Available fields. 21 Click OK. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. under Other. Under Field formatting. select Calculate totals. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. and click Add. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. for Material: Cost. The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so that the cost estimate value can be calculated. The Roof Material Takeoff Schedule displays.40 50. 22 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog.

can be used for any number-based parameter. 31 Save the file. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Architecture multi-category schedules. you create an exiting plan for the building. for Currency. not just for currency. either within family components or within the project template.Material: Description Wood Joist Material: Cost 5. You draw a travel path line. 30 Click OK twice.35 The Estimated cost is calculated. adding the shared parameters to a family. regardless of category. ensuring consistency across families and projects. tag the line. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. select $. creating a generic tag to tag the family. The cost fields are formatted correctly. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. Digit grouping. 28 For Unit symbol. 29 Select Use digit grouping. and schedule the total distance of each path. In this lesson. Add currency formatting to the schedule 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. you create a shared parameter file. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. which inserts commas after every three digits. click the Format value. for Rounding. 27 In the Format dialog. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 249 . verify that 2 decimal places is selected. 26 In the Project Units dialog. and are defined and stored in an external file. These shared parameters can be added to any family. and reporting the shared parameters. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default.

for File name. type Travel Distance. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 9 Under Parameters. and click Save. click New. type Exiting. 7 Under Parameters.rvt.txt. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. for Name. under Floor Plans. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. for Name. type OfficeStandardsParameters. and click OK. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. for Type of Parameter. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the left pane of the Create Shared Parameter File dialog. click Create. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 11 Click OK twice. click Training Files. select Length. type Path ID. click New. click Training Files. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog.rvt. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. for Name. 250 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click OK. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. click New. under Groups. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1.

rvt. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. under Parameters. under Dimensions. 9 In the Family Types dialog. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line. 11 Click OK. under Parameters. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 251 . If you have multiple projects open. click Add. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. otherwise the family loads into the current project. 10 Using the same method. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. under Parameter Data.rfa. in the Load into Projects dialog. Create a tag using shared parameters 16 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. Click Training Files. 8 Select Instance. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 13 Click Apply. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. following the equals symbol (=). add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. 14 On the Design Bar. for Travel Distance Formula. and click OK. 15 If necessary. and click Select. under Parameter Type. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. 12 In the Family Types dialog. click Add. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. for Group parameter under. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. and click OK. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. 4 In the Family Types dialog. click Family Types. and click OK. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. select Constraints.Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. and click OK. 3 On the Design Bar. group it under Dimensions. select Shared parameter. and select Instance. click Load into Projects. type Length.rvt.

17 In the left pane of the New Annotation Symbol dialog. 27 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. and click OK. under Category Parameters. under Parameters. click parameter(s) to label). 25 In the Edit Label dialog. click Label. 21 In the Edit Label dialog. click (Add Parameter). select Travel Distance. 24 Click OK twice. and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag. click Select. (Add 26 On the Design Bar.rft. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 252 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes. 19 On the Design Bar. select Travel Distance. click Label. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. click Training Files.

for File Name. 31 Click File ➤ Save As. and click OK.28 On the Design Bar. verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. click Load into Projects. 33 On the Design Bar. type M_Travel Distance Tag. 35 Save the file. 32 In the Save As dialog. 34 On the Load into Projects dialog.rvt is selected. and click Save. 30 Select the Note in the upper left area of the drawing window. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 253 . and move it down.rfa. and press DELETE. click Modify. 29 In the drawing window. select Path ID.

Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar.Tagging. After the lines are tagged. under Floor Plans. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. select Chain. 254 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Component. above the exterior door as shown. 2 Zoom in to the corridor.rvt. double-click Exiting Plan . 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans. 6 Move the cursor to the right. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. and click in the center of the corridor. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown.Placing. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.Level 1.

and click outside of the building. and click OK. under Floor Plans. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. type 1-1. under Constraints.Level 2. through the door. double click Exiting Plan .7 Move the cursor down. 8 On the Design Bar. for Path ID. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. click Component. move the cursor near the right corner. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. clear Leader. select the 2 dashed travel lines. and click (Element Properties). click Tag ➤ By Category. Placing. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. verify that Chain is selected.Tagging. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 255 . Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. 18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. click Modify. 17 On the Options Bar. 13 While pressing CTRL.

move the cursor to the left. 20 On the Design Bar. and click in the stair. 21 On the Design Bar.19 Move the cursor up through the door. click Modify. and click above the door to the stair. and click. click Component. 256 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 23 Move the cursor down. 22 Click at the starting point of the previous path.

28 While pressing CTRL.Tagging. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. and click OK. Placing. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 30 Using the same method. under Category. click Modify. for Path ID. click Modify. 27 On the Design Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. under Constraints. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 257 . specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. 33 For Name. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. and click OK. type 2-1. type Level 1 Exit Distance.24 On the Design Bar. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. . verify that <Multi-Category> is selected.

43 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. select Path ID and Travel Distance. in the second field. 50 Save the file. select Calculate totals. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. while pressing CTRL. select Travel Distance. select Path ID. 42 Click OK. and click Add. 45 In the Rename View dialog. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. and under Field formatting. and click Rename. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. click Training Files. click Edit. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Architecture components. 46 In the Project Browser. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. under Schedules/Quantities. in the third field. for Filter. select contains. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. 41 Under Fields. for Filter by. 258 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 36 For Filter by. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. type 2-. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. and in the third field. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. type Level 2 Exit Distance.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 38 For Sort by. in the first field. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under Other. under Available fields. 49 Click OK twice. type 1-. 44 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. 35 Click the Filter tab. 40 Click the Formatting tab. select Path ID. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. and click OK.

under Categories.152 mm. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. select Walls. 10 In the schedule. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog.Interior Construction ➤ C1010 . for Assembly Code. right-click Generic .Fixed Partitions. click the Fields tab.Drywall w/ Metal Stud.Partitions ➤ C1010100 . click the Value field. and click . 9 Click OK twice. expand Families ➤ Walls ➤ Basic Wall.Partitions . Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser. select the following fields.Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Properties. right-click the Design Bar. and click View. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 259 . 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog. 4 Under Available fields.Interiors ➤ C10 . under Identity Data. and select C1010145 . expand C . and click OK. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active.

11 Close the exercise file. under Database. type Revit_Project. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. click OK. click the File Data Source tab. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. 1 On the File menu. 9 Under Directories. and click OK to create the database.mdb. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. select a location for the database file. for Database Name. click Create. 5 Type RevitDSN for the name of the file data source. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. and click Next. 3 Click New. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog.rvt. NOTE Depending on your version of Microsoft Access. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. 260 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 12 Open the database in Microsoft Access. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. 10 When the confirmation dialog displays. 6 Click Finish. 11 Click OK 3 times. and click Next. click Training Files. the database display may be different than that shown. select the Microsoft Access Driver (*. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 In the New Database dialog.mdb).

tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type.Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture exports. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. For example. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 261 . Additionally. 13 Close the exercise file. in addition to the Id column.

262 .

and how to annotate and dimension your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project.Annotating and Dimensioning 6 In this tutorial. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm. You accomplish this in Revit Architecture by defining levels as either project or shared levels. 263 . or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project.

Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project

264 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Shared levels report elevation relative to the base height

Relocating a Project
In this exercise, you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project, the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1.

Relocating a Project | 265

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt.

Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. The levels in the project are not shared, so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project.

266 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. 3 On the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated, you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. If you did that now, the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. However, to better demonstrate how shared levels work, only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time, and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. 5 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

Click Duplicate. In the Name dialog, type 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation, and click OK. Under Constraints, for Elevation Base, select Shared.

6 Click OK twice. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 8 Select the Level 1 line. By selecting the Level 1 line, you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line, type 10000 mm, and press ENTER. By typing 10000 mm in this step, you specify the new location of the project. 10 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. The south elevation is displayed. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. The elevation of the other levels remains the same.

Relocating a Project | 267

Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. 12 In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. 13 On the Design Bar, click Modify. The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration.

14 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view, as well as other views of the building model.

268 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Define the remaining levels as shared:
■ ■ ■

While pressing CTRL, select Levels 2-4, the Penthouse level, and the Roof Plan level. In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. On the Design Bar, click Modify. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation.

Relocating a Project | 269

16 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 17 Proceed to the next lesson, Dimensioning on page 270.

Dimensioning
In this lesson, you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. In Revit Architecture, there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created, except when you sketch profiles to complete families. In this case, permanent dimensions are created automatically, although you must turn on their visibility to view them.

Creating Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. You place linear, multi-segmented, radial, and angular dimensions, and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model.

270 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Linear and multi-segmented dimensions

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. By default, dimensions are aligned, snap to wall centerlines, and are created by selecting individual reference points.

3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain wall, select it.

Creating Dimensions | 271

4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall, select it.

5 Move the cursor above the view, and click to place the dimension.

272 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. The lock displays as locked, indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way.

7 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step, and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays, and select it. 11 Using the same method, select the right endpoint of the planter.

Creating Dimensions | 273

12 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall Faces. 13 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select its left exterior face.

14 Move the cursor to the right, and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. 15 After you select the reference points on the final planter, select the right side of the curtain wall. 16 Move the cursor up, above the plan view of the building, but below the first dimension that you placed, and click to place the multi-segmented dimension.

Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 17 With the multi-segmented dimension selected, click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another.

18 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

274 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Create a baseline dimension style 19 Select the dimension string, and on the Options Bar, click 20 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 21 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 22 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline, and click OK. 23 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Dimension String Type, select Baseline. Create an ordinate dimension style 24 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 25 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Ordinate, and click OK. 26 In the Type Properties dialog, for Dimension String Type, select Ordinate. 27 Click OK twice. View and apply the new dimension styles 28 Zoom in to the dimension string. The dimensions start from 0 mm and increase moving away from the origin. .

29 Select the dimension string, and in the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline. The dimensions are stacked and measure from the same baseline.

Creating Dimensions | 275

30 In the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial to return to the original dimension style. Add text below a permanent dimension You can add supplemental text above, below, to the left, or to the right of a permanent dimension value. 31 Click the dimension value to which you want to add text, for example Text dialog displays. 33 Under Text Fields, for Below, enter Planter. 34 Click OK. . The Dimension

32 In the Dimension Text dialog, under Dimension Value, verify that Use Actual Value is selected.

35 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. suffix 36 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4.

276 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

37 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 38 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Radial).

For Prefer, select Wall faces.

39 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights, and select it. 40 Move the cursor outside the wall, and specify a point to place the dimension. 41 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.

42 Select the radial dimension. 43 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right.

44 With the dimension still selected, click the dimension text. 45 In the Dimension Text dialog, for Suffix, type Typ., and click OK. 46 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

Creating Dimensions | 277

Place an angular dimension 47 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

48 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 49 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Angular).

For Prefer, verify that Wall faces is selected.

50 Select the horizontal line. This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building.

278 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

51 Select the left exterior face of the planter.

52 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc, and click to place the dimension. 53 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

54 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions on page 279.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. When you dimension the wall, you select only the wall, instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 279

Automatic wall dimension

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 3. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows.

Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 3 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Prefer, select Wall centerlines. For Pick, select Entire Walls. Click Options.

4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog:

Under Select references, select Openings, and select Widths.

280 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Click OK. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings, and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string.

Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall.

6 Move the cursor down below the plan view, and click to place the automatic dimension string.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

8 Proceed to the next exercise, Controlling Witness Lines on page 281.

Controlling Witness Lines
In this exercise, you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions, and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. When you place dimensions, you specify their origin on the Options Bar. However, in some cases, you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. For example, for a multi-segmented dimension, you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall, where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. Training File

Controlling Witness Lines | 281

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension.

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 4 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For Prefer, verify Wall centerlines is selected. For Pick, select Individual References.

5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter.

6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights, and select it.

282 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

7 Using the same method, select the right edge of the planter, move the cursor down, and click to place the dimension.

8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted, and select it.

10 Using the same method, select the bottom right endpoint. 11 Move the cursor down, and specify a point to place the dimension.

Controlling Witness Lines | 283

Dimension the partition walls to centerlines 12 On the Basics tab, click Dimension. 13 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall centerlines. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan, and when the wall centerline highlights, select it.

284 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Moving the cursor to the right, select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls, and click to place the dimension. 16 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed, and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. 18 While pressing SHIFT, select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark, and drag the dimension down the wall.

Controlling Witness Lines | 285

19 Release SHIFT, select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap.

20 Click the blue middle grip, drag it to the right, and press TAB until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall.

21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan, and using the same methods, create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. 22 On the Basics tab, click Modify. 23 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions on page 286.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. After you create the new family type, you change the dimension tick mark, text font, and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards.

286 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4, and select the lower dimension.

2 Click

(Element Properties).

3 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 4 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 5 In the Name dialog, type Office Standard, and click OK. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■

Under Graphics, for Tick Mark, select Arrow 30 Degree. Under Text, for Text Size, type 3.2 mm.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 287

For Text Font, select CityBlueprint. NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list, select another font.

Click OK twice.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type.

8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select the bottom dimension.

9 In the Type Selector, select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. 10 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

288 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

11 Using the same method, select the angular dimension on the planter, create a new angular dimension type, and modify it to use the office standard parameters.

12 Proceed to the next lesson, Creating Text Annotation on page 289.

Creating Text Annotation
In this lesson, you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes, and how to add leaders to the text notes.

Creating Text Annotation | 289

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan
In this exercise, you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Text. 3 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (None).

4 Move the cursor above grid line 4, but below the upper dimension string, and click and drag to create a text box.

290 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

5 In the text box, type EXISTING BUILDING.

Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 7 Select the text box, and click .

8 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 9 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 10 In the Name dialog box, type 6 mm Arial Notes, and click OK. 11 Under Text, for Text Size, type 6 mm, and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Arc Leaders, and click OK.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 291

You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. If so, select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box.

Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar, click Text. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4, and type Planting Bed. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

16 Select the Planting Bed text box.

292 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

17 On the Options Bar:

Click (Add Right Arc Leader). A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. Click (Add Left Arc Leader). Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box.

Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 20 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders, and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 23 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

.

Click Rename. In the Rename dialog, for New, type Standard Notes, and click OK. Under Text, for Text Font, select CityBlueprint. Under Graphics, for Leader Arrowhead, select Arrow 30 Degree. Click OK twice.

24 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 293

Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar, click Text. 26 In the Type Selector, select Text: Standard Notes. 27 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (Arc).

28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3.

29 Move the cursor up and to the right, over the Planting Bed text. 30 When blue dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text, click to place the text box.

294 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

31 Click in the text box, and type 457 mm Conc. Wall, and click Modify.

32 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 295

296

you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2009. Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. you trace over the building model geometry. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. like a standard door header condition. In the callout view. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. 297 . and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. add detail components. plywood. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. and metal studs. These components display at the required scale. In order to detail from the building model.Detailing 7 In this tutorial.

and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. The roof overhang detail displays. select As underlay. and click OK. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. click Detail Component. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Open. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 7 In the drawing area. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. They are also view specific. region objects.rvt. click Training Files. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. You load detail components. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. 5 In the alert dialog. as well as detail lines.Detailing the View In this exercise. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 298 | Chapter 7 Detailing . you detail the view of the roof edge. which means that all detail components. After you add components. double-click the detail callout head. and insulation objects. Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects.rfa. Exact location is not important.

13 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate. 10 On the Options Bar. for Pattern ➤ Detail. 15 For Spacing. click (Element Properties). 17 In the drawing area. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. and click OK. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. 18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. enter 406. click Modify. click Edit/New.5mm. 16 Click OK twice. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. 12 In the Type Properties dialog.8 Delete the component. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. click Repeating Detail. Detailing the View | 299 . enter Corrugated Metal Siding. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 On the Design Bar. select Corrugated Metal.

Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. ■ ■ Click Modify. verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected. 25 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration.20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. click Training Files. 300 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click (Move). Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. and on the Edit toolbar. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section. 24 In the Type Selector. click Load.rfa. and click Open. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. 22 On the Options Bar. Add lumber detail components 21 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.

and place it in the detail view as shown. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components.Because you still have several components to load. click Training Files. 31 To properly orient the component. Load components as a group 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. click Detail Component.rvt. you load them as a group from a single file. 30 In the Type Selector. press SPACEBAR 3 times. 27 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. click OK. 28 In the Duplicate Types dialog. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal. and click Open. 32 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. 29 On the Design Bar. 33 In the Type Selector. Detailing the View | 301 .

The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. 302 | Chapter 7 Detailing . select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm. and click Modify. select Chain. click the Flip instance arrows. 37 Click Modify. 38 Select the horizontal segment. 35 On the Options Bar.Add wallboard detail component 34 In the Type Selector. 36 Place the wallboard component as shown. NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification.

Add lumber components 44 On the Design Bar. click Insulation.Add insulation 39 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. enter 140mm. click (Move). as shown. and on the Edit toolbar. Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point. 41 Place 2 segments of insulation. For Offset. select to near side. Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point. Detailing the View | 303 . 42 Click Modify. 43 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. ■ Click Modify.

as shown. 47 In the Type Selector. 2 In the Type Selector. Add rigid insulation 49 In the Type Selector. 52 Proceed to the next exercise. 51 Click Modify. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. 50 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. select Thin Lines. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. they are view specific. Like detail components. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component. you add lines to your detail.rvt. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar.45 In the Type Selector. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 46 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. 48 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component. click Detail Lines. select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm. meaning they display only in this view. 304 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and lock the component. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal. Adding Detail Lines on page 304. select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm.

7 In the Type Selector. select Thin Lines. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. enter 10mm. select Medium Lines. 5 Select the vertical plywood component. enter 10mm. and press ENTER. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component. For Offset. click Detail Lines. Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component. as shown. click Detail Lines. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 10 On the Design Bar. Adding Detail Lines | 305 . 11 In the Type Selector. For Offset.4 Click Modify. as shown.

as shown. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component. select Chain. 306 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 17 Draw a horizontal line as shown.Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. and draw the detail lines as shown. 16 On the Options Bar. and clear Chain. click (Draw).

for Graphics ➤ Display Model. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. Click (Pick Lines). and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. select Vapor Barrier. enter 10mm. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. and press ENTER. draw the detail lines as shown. click Detail Lines. 20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. select Thin Lines. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. select Do not display. click Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. Adding Detail Lines | 307 . 24 On the View Control Bar. select the Penthouse level line. For Offset. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 26 In the Type Selector. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. and click Properties. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). When you turn the display model off. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. 22 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ➤ Hide Crop Region. right-click. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard.18 In the Type Selector.

select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. you add text notes to complete the detail. 30 In the Type Selector. select M_Break Line. click Detail Component. press SPACEBAR as necessary. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. Adding Text Notes on page 308. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. 32 Click Modify.29 On the Design Bar. Training File 308 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask.

and click to place the dimension. Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. Click again to specify the location of the text box. 2 On the Options Bar. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Enter the text. click Dimension. 6 Click Modify.rvt. click Text. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Arc) to create an arced leader. 5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component. Adding Text Notes | 309 .

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. and press DELETE. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. right-click. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 310 | Chapter 7 Detailing .7 Select the dimension line. right-click. enter Roof Overhang Detail . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. 8 In the Dimension Text dialog. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail.. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click the dimension text.rvt. select a text note. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. and click OK. click Select All Instances. click 6 In the Filter dialog. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. under Text Fields. right-click. and click OK. on the Options Bar. click Roof Overhang Detail. for Suffix. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. (Filter Selection). and click Rename. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. enter Typ. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. Creating Detail Components on page 310. and click OK. and save the exercise file.Keynotes.

7 Click Modify. Creating Detail Components | 311 . 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. click Training Files. and selecting the chain. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. 11 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component. 16 Click Modify.rft. while pressing CTRL. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. pressing TAB. select Medium Lines. in the Type Selector. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 14 Click Modify. 15 Use a window to select all linework. select all the coping linework. and click Open. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard.

rfa. click Load into Projects. 25 In the Filter dialog. and click OK. you place keynotes on objects. delete the underlying linework. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. click Load. enter Roof Edge. 31 Using the same method used previously. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. and the component can be placed in the detail. Adding Keynotes In this exercise.Keynotes view is not the open view. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. 21 To place the component. 26 Press DELETE. While pressing SHIFT. click Training Files. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. navigate to your preferred location. click Detail Component. 27 On the Design Bar. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . 30 In the drawing area. and click Open. 23 Using a window. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. and click Save. for File name. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 24 On the Options Bar. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. Training File 312 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 28 On the Options Bar. click . clear Detail Items. The original linework remains selected. double-click it in the Project Browser. click Detail Component. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Adding Keynotes on page 312. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping.18 In the Save As dialog. select the coping. 22 Click Modify.

Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. For the metal coping. Adding Keynotes | 313 .rvt. 63mm Rigid Insulation.B5. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag.D11. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. and click OK.rfa. select the metal fascia with drip edge. navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and click Open. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. (Element Properties). click Keynote ➤ Element. Roof Edge4. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. 3 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Training Files.C1. 5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. use keynote 07645. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. use keynote 06160. In the Keynotes dialog. 2 In the alert dialog. click Edit/New. Click to place the leader arm. 6 Click Modify. 19mm Plywood.

use keynote 06110. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 14 On the Design Bar. For the 50 x 200. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. 18 Save the file.F1.9 In the Type Properties dialog. You do this in order to keynote the component. using keynote 07460. 314 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 22mm Corrugated Steel . and click . use keynote 09250. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. FasciaProfile_1. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. use keynote 06160. 17 Keynote the component. 11 Click OK 3 times. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag. click Detail Component.I1. Creating Line-based Detail Components on page 314. select Corrugated Metal. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 12 On the Design Bar.D1. navigate to 07645. use keynote 06110. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard.D11.A8.F1. 15 In the Type Selector. Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise.G1. For the 50 x 150. For the 19mm Plywood Siding. click Keynote ➤ Element. use keynote 06110. For the 50 x 300.20 Ga. click in the Value column. 13 Tag components: ■ Tag the metal fascia with drip edge.

navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based. 6 Lock the line. click Detail Component. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 Click OK 3 times. click Detail Component. click Duplicate. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. click Lines. 2 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. select Medium Line Detail Component. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Load into Projects. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. 24 While pressing CTRL. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. 13 In the Type Selector. enter m_Medium Line Detail Component. and click Modify. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Training Files. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. navigate to your preferred location. 19 In the Name dialog. and click Open. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. select Medium Lines. 16 Select the component. select the left end point of the reference line. 4 In the Type Selector. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 315 .rvt. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. 5 In the drawing area. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and click Save. click Load. 8 In the Save As dialog. and select the right end point. click Edit/New. 15 Click Modify. 9 On the Design Bar. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 22 On the Options Bar. and click Open. for File name. and click (Element Properties). and m_Light Line Detail Component. 11 Press DELETE. m_Invisible Line Detail Component. click Training Files. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rft.

click Detail Component. click in the Value column. 48 Using the same method used previously. 46 Click Modify. and click the lower end at the break line. and click . and hidden) used in the view. 41 Select the component just added. and click . 47 Select the component. click the end points of the long detail line above the roof. and assign it keynote 06110. 30 Click Modify. 34 In the Name dialog. against the 19mm plywood. click Duplicate. click Detail Component. and click OK. 28 In the Type Selector. You add the components to the project and keynote them. 49 With the component selected. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing.25 Next. name the component 50 x 200 Framing. click Detail Component. 31 Select the component. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. select m_Light Line Detail Component. and click . name the component Air Barrier. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 37 Click OK 3 times. 29 In the drawing area.A1.A5. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 38 On the Design Bar. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. 44 On the Design Bar. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. enter EPDM Membrane. on the Edit toolbar. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. click (Move). 40 Click Modify. 50 Move the air barrier to the right. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. 316 | Chapter 7 Detailing . invisible. and click .G1. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. 42 Using the same method used previously. 27 On the Design Bar. and assign it keynote 07260.

Creating Line-based Detail Components | 317 . 52 In the Type Selector. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. and click . 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. 53 On the Options Bar.Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. select Chain. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. click Detail Component. 55 Click Modify. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. leaving the detail component lines.

64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component. Air Barrier.rfa. Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component. select Invisible Lines. 318 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Keynote ➤ Element. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 61 In the drawing area. and Vapor Barrier. select m_Invisible Line Detail Component. select the component. 63 In the drawing area. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents.rfa. 67 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component.58 Using the method used previously. and assign it keynote 07260. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. click Load into Projects. 68 In the drawing area. in the Type Selector. 60 On the Design Bar. 50 x 200 Framing.A4. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. name the component Vapor Barrier. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.69 Select the component. Enter 07460. 71 In the drawing area. and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes. The database file opens in a text editor. Update keynote settings 4 In Revit Architecture. and press ENTER. Enter 07463. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. and press TAB.rvt. 73 Proceed to the next exercise.A9.A4. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. add a keynote for the component. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog.. under Keynote Table. click File menu ➤ Save. 72 Save the file. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer. Modifying a Keynote Database | 319 . and assign it keynote 07210. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319.txt. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. name the component Batt Insul. and close the text editor. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. click Browse. and press TAB. 70 Using the method used previously.A1. and click . navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric. 3 In the text editor.

11 Click Modify. you learn how to create a drafted detail. and click OK. and click to place the note. navigate to 07463. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. click to place the leader. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. under Path Type. 320 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and click Open.6 In the Browse for Keynote File dialog. and click OK.A1. 13 Click Modify. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. 14 Save the file. In the Type Selector.txt. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. 9 In the drawing area. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. select all the keynotes. select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. select Absolute. ■ ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes. click Keynote ➤ Element. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Architecture or by importing details from an existing detail library. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. These details do not update with changes to the building model. Each keynote displays as a simple number. After you create a drafting view.

8 Proceed to the next exercise. The detail is imported as an import symbol. Creating a Reference Callout on page 321. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. and click Rename. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). 6 In the Project Browser. and click OK.rvt. enter EPDM Metal Coping. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. for Scale. For Colors. 4 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane.dwg. right-click Drafting 1. verify that Auto . you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View.Center to Center is selected. select 1 : 5. select Black and White. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail.Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. The detail that you import is in DWG format.rvt. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View | 321 . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and click OK. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 7 In the Rename View dialog. Training File Use the training file you used in a previous exercise. click Training Files. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. For Positioning. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. Click Open.

322 | Chapter 7 Detailing . select Reference other view. for New. and click Properties. 10 In the Rename dialog. 12 Click OK twice. click Edit/New. and click OK. right-click EPDM Metal Coping. click Rename. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. 11 In the Type Properties dialog.Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. 5 Click Modify. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. delete the existing value. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. 6 Select the callout. enter Detail . 3 On the Options Bar. Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser.No Reference. click Callout.

15 Under Drafting Views (Detail . drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet.No Reference).Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar./Det. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. so you use Revit Architecture tools to draft the detail.Elev. double-click A105 . 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view. Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. 18 Save the file. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View on page 323 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise. and double-click the callout./Sect. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. The callout is updated with the sheet information. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 323 . click Modify.

Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. verify that the scale is 1 : 5. select Gypsum-Plaster. . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and click OK. click Detail Component. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. for Name. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the Type Selector. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 12 In the Type Properties dialog.rvt. enter Gyp. Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. for Name. Board. enter Header @ Sliding Door. click Region Properties. click Filled Region. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 11 In the Name dialog. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. 3 On the View Control Bar. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 324 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Duplicate. 14 Click OK 3 times. click Edit/New.

16 Select the left edge of the region. click 22 On the Options Bar. select Wide Lines. and on the Edit toolbar. 17 Click Modify. click . 20 On the Design Bar. 18 While pressing CTRL.15 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and enter 20. select the left and bottom edges of the region. select the width dimension.5mm. Draw a rectangle as shown. (Mirror). Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 325 . 19 In the Type Selector. Select the lower left corner of the 50 x 150 lumber as the start point. click (Draw). click Finish Sketch. Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region.

select Wood . 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and click OK.Finish. click Edit/New. click Filled Region. Move the cursor up. enter Wood . Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. click Region Properties. and click above the top of the region as the end point. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 Click Modify. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 326 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Duplicate. 29 In the Type Properties dialog.Finish. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern.23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point. and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150. 30 In the Name dialog. 33 Click OK 3 times. . for Name. 24 Select the mirrored region.

click (Rectangle). sketch the new region as shown. Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150. 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. Draw a rectangle as shown. click . 40 On the Options Bar. select Medium Lines. 39 In the Type Selector. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 327 . verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63. 37 On the Design Bar.5mm. Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. 36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. in the Type Selector.34 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. click (Align). verify that the thickness is 19mm. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. and select the right edge of the wood region. 38 On the Design Bar. click Filled Region. select Medium Lines. click Finish Sketch.

For Offset. and press ENTER. and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Filled Region. click 48 Click Modify. click Finish Sketch. enter 10mm. 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. (Align). and press ENTER. 46 On the Tools toolbar. For Offset. Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. 328 | Chapter 7 Detailing .42 On the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. 47 Click the reference plane. 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. enter 6mm.

and click to select the point. click (Trim/Extend). enter 0. and select the bottom horizontal line. Select Chain.52 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click (Draw). 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. Move the cursor left 25mm. 54 On the Tools toolbar. For Offset. and click to select the point. click Finish Sketch. Move the cursor down 305mm. Move the cursor right 25mm. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 329 . 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. 56 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. and click to select the point.

top. and right edges of the door panel region. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line. TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation. For Offset. 65 On the Options Bar. 330 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 60 Select the left. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Detail Lines. 58 In the Type Selector. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side. click Load. and press ENTER.rfa. 68 Click Modify. 69 Select the bolt. select Medium Lines. and press ENTER. enter 76. click Detail Component. 66 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.Add detail lines for mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. 63 Repeat for the right detail line. 61 Click Modify. 62 Select the left detail line.2mm. enter 3mm. select the height dimension. click Training Files. and click Open.

rfa. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail. select Wide Lines. click Load. click Training Files. 74 Select the expansion bolt.70 On the Design Bar. 71 On the Options Bar. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. 72 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 331 . navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side. click Detail Component. click Detail Lines. use the images as a guide. 76 In the Type Selector. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150. and click Open.

(Mirror). 85 On the Options Bar. 79 In the Type Selector. 82 Select the rectangle. and on the Edit toolbar. click Detail Lines. select Thin Lines. click . click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. 80 On the Options Bar.78 On the Design Bar. 84 On the Design Bar. 87 Click Modify. click . 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. click Detail Lines. 332 | Chapter 7 Detailing .

92 Select the line. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 333 . drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. 89 On the Design Bar.88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. click Detail Lines. Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line. 90 In the Type Selector. and on the Edit toolbar. as shown. click (Mirror). select Medium Lines.

click Detail Lines. click Detail Component. click . 101 On the Design Bar.94 Select the mirrored line on the right. 102 In the Type Selector. select the length dimension. 97 On the Options Bar. and click to place the arc as shown. and press ENTER. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents. enter 3mm. 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. 95 On the Design Bar. 96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line. 99 Click Modify. draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. 103 Add two break lines as shown. select M_Break Line. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. 334 | Chapter 7 Detailing .

drag the text for the smaller dimension. 110 Select the dimension line. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region.Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. 109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2. click Dimension. and click Modify. 107 On the Design Bar.5mm Arial. using the Drag Text grip. 108 In the Type Selector. and click Modify. click Dimension. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 335 . 105 In the drawing area. 106 Click to place the dimension.

and click the dimension text. 119 Select the topmost of the 3 wall dimensions. select Replace With Text. click Dimension. under Dimension Value. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types. 116 In the Type Selector select Linear Dimension Style: Detail Linear .2.5mmArial. 117 Click to place additional dimensions on the wall as shown. 112 In the Dimension Text dialog. 113 Under Text Fields. and then click the dimension text. under Dimension Value.Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types 111 Select the wall dimension. 118 Select Modify to end the command. enter See Schedule. 120 In the Dimension Text dialog. and enter Varies. for Below. 336 | Chapter 7 Detailing . select Replace With Text. 114 Click OK. Add dimension strings based on the wall type 115 On the Design Bar. and enter 175 mm @ Type A.

130 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown.121 Click OK. 122 Repeat this process for the next 2 dimensions: ■ ■ Enter 200 mm @ Type B. Enter 225 mm @ Type C. Board. 127 Enter Gyp. 126 In the drawing area. 123 Click OK. click to create an arced leader. Add text notes to complete the detail 124 On the Design Bar. and click Modify. 125 In the Options Bar. and click to place the text. click (Add Right Arc Leader). select the gypsum board region on the left. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 337 . click Text. and on the Options Bar. 128 Select the note. 129 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region.

click Modify to end the command. 132 Save the file.131 On the Design Bar. 338 | Chapter 7 Detailing .

expand Elevations (Building Elevation). Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets. click Training Files. you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the note text.Finishing the Sheets 8 In this tutorial. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. including: ■ ■ ■ Creating a note block that contains typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources (images and text) from other applications into project sheets ■ ■ Using Note Blocks In this lesson.rvt. and double-click East. 339 . Creating a Note Block In this exercise.

7 On the Design Bar. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag. click Modify. click Training Files.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door. for Number of Leaders. 8 Select the keynote. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project.rfa. type 1. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 On the Options Bar. 340 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . click Symbol.Hexagon.

type Seal existing doors and insulate. click (Copy).9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. 13 Select the tag. under Identity Data. for Text. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. on the Options Bar. Creating a Note Block | 341 . and click OK. 12 On the Edit toolbar. and click above the tag to place the copy. click (Element Properties).

click (Element Properties). click Copy. 17 Click OK. 16 For Tag. 18 Using the same method. and on the Options Bar. on the Edit toolbar. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. 15 For Text. and click. on the Options Bar. 19 With the tag selected. clear 20 To create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building. type B. (Mirror). type Repair existing door surround. 342 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays.14 With the copy selected.

21 On the Design Bar. Remove all existing windows. click Modify. and moving counter-clockwise. 22 Optionally. using the table as a reference. Tuckpoint as required. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B Text Seal existing doors and insulate. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. Clean existing concrete loading dock. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. C D E F G Creating a Note Block | 343 . Repair existing door surround. Repair as required. Clean exterior brick wall. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required.

30 Click to place the block in the upper left corner of the sheet. for Sort by. and drag it to the sheet. and click Add. verify that Arial is selected. expand Schedules/Quantities. for Heading. and for Alignment. select Tag. Select Text. under Available fields. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. Create. On the Formatting tab. 24 In the New Note Block dialog. expand Sheets (all). for the value. and click Add. type Description. 27 In the column header (text). format. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. for Header text. and double-click A103 . for Note block name. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. 344 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .Tag H Text Saw cut existing brick wall. and click OK. Clean cut and repair wall as required. select Center. On the Appearance tab. 28 In the Project Browser. type 6 mm. 26 Click OK. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. type Mark. and select Bold. select Tag. 29 In the Project Browser. type Exterior Construction Notes. select Exterior Construction Notes. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab.Elevations.

Using Drawing Lists In this lesson. Creating a Drawing List In this exercise. under Sheets (all).rvt. 33 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. double-click T . 32 Zoom in to see the note block.rvt. you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress.31 On the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 1 In the Project Browser. you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project.Title Sheet. click Modify. Using Drawing Lists | 345 .

double-click T . 8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower right corner. for Filter by. ■ 4 Click OK. select does not equal. for Sort by. expand Schedules/Quantities.Title Sheet. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. On the Filter tab. and expand the right column to accommodate the text. under Sheets (all). and click Add. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Sheet Index. under Available fields. and in the third field. in the second field. 346 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 5 In the list title field. change Drawing List to Sheet Index. select Sheet Number. Select Sheet Name. The drawing list displays. and drag it to the sheet.2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. 6 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Project Browser. type T. and click Add. select Sheet Number. select Sheet Number. in the first field.

On construction documents. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Architecture building model. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. 11 Save the file. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. On construction documents. click Modify. you use a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. Annotation legends are made up of components (such as section markers and door tags) that are paired with text that identifies them.9 On the Design Bar. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. door frame schedule. Finally. windows. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. For the text. and so on). Training File Using Legends | 347 . and door frames. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. doors.

Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. for Name. 6 On the Options Bar. type Typical Symbol Legend.Open Level Head .Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. click Symbol. click Text.Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote . 8 In the Type Properties dialog. 9 For Text Font. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Custom-Section Head: Section Head . and click OK. 348 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 10 For Text Size. click Duplicate. click Edit/New.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. type 3mm. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. type Legend Text.rvt. you create a text type with the necessary size. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. click . and click OK. for Name. and click OK twice. Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Arial. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown.

Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. and for Leader. 14 Working from the top down. drag it to the lower right corner of the sheet. 12 Click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. expand Sheets (all). 16 In the Project Browser. type the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 15 In the Project Browser.Site Plan/Floor Plan. verify that is selected. click Typical Symbol Legend. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. and click to place it. and double-click A101 . expand Legends. 13 Type Detail Callout for the text note. Creating a Symbol Legend | 349 .

22 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Type Selector. click Modify. under Sheets. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet.Unit 18. click Modify. 23 Save the file. select Viewport : No Titlemark. 19 In the Project Browser. double-click A102 .17 In the Type Selector. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required. 18 On the Design Bar. 350 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and click to place it. 20 Drag Typical Symbol Legend to the lower right corner of the sheet. select Viewport : No Titlemark.

For View. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click OK.rvt. 7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. type 900 mm. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. select 1 : 50. 6 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Family. 8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. 3 For Scale. select Section. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. For Host length. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. and press ENTER. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 5 On the View Control Bar.Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. for Name. click Legend Component. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. type 4th Floor Wall Types. Creating a Component Legend | 351 . select Medium for Detail Level.

click Text. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. click to add text without a leader. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. 12 In the Type Selector. for Leader. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line.9 On the Design Bar. 352 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . for Family. click Modify. and on the Options Bar.'' 15 Click below the lower wall and type Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. 10 Select the second wall. 14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. and type Wall Type 1 Patio Divider.

Creating a Component Legend | 353 . under Floor Plans. 18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. select Level 4. right-click Sheets (all). 19 Type the following text.Add text to the legend 16 On the Options Bar. 24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. 17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. The text note with leader is added to the legend. 22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser. 23 In the Project Browser. click OK to accept the default titleblock. and click New Sheet. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking. pressing ENTER between component descriptions. click to add text with a single-segment leader. 20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. and drag it to the new sheet.

and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. The open drawings are both visible. 29 In the Project Browser. drag it onto the sheet. under Floor Plans. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser. 26 On the Design Bar. 354 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .25 In the Project Browser. 28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. double-click Level 4. click Modify to end the command. under Legends. select 4th Floor Wall Types. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile.

select the Wall Type 2 component. 33 In the floor plan view. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. 32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. 35 On the View Control Bar. zoom to the lower right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. 34 Select the patio divider wall. indicating that it captured the wall type properties. Creating a Component Legend | 355 . select Detail Level: Medium.Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar. click (Match Type).

rvt. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. These changes can be due to owner requests. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. 356 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. you open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.36 Optionally. You can create a sequence of revisions. or changes in building material availability. unanticipated changes in construction conditions. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. Using the table. double-click Level 4. In this exercise. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. click 37 Save the file. Using Revision Tracking Revit Architecture provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. under Floor Plans. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. contractor inquiries. if you do not want to save the change to the wall type.

6 Verify that Issued is cleared. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. In general. Add a revision to the project 4 For Date. 7 Under Show. 5 For Description. When Issued is selected. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. When you use this option. verify that Per Project is selected. In most instances. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. if the active revision is number 1. If you select Per Sheet. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. type Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. 3 On the right side of the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. Setting Up a Revision Table | 357 . for Numbering. If Visible is not selected.2 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. yet as concise as possible. type a date. the revision is locked and issued to the field. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. For example.

Revision clouds have read-only properties. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. including revision number and revision date. click (Move).rvt. double-click Level 4. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. 3 Select the divider. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views.8 Click OK. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 9 Save the file. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. move the cursor up. 358 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 4 On the Edit toolbar. you make changes to the project floor plan. 6 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. 5 Select the divider.

10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. and click OK. Sketching Revision Clouds | 359 .Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Revision Cloud. 11 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 8 In the drawing area. select Snaps Off. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. click near the partition you moved. NOTE To turn off snaps when drawing a revision cloud. In the Snaps dialog. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. Revit Architecture is now in sketch mode.

and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. Training File 360 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. for Line Weight. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 16 Click OK. 17 Save the file. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. you load a revision tag into the project. select 6. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. click the Annotation Objects tab.

2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. 5 In the Tags dialog. click Training Files. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. the cloud is tagged as number 1. 8 In the Tags dialog. click OK. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. double-click Level 4. 10 In the drawing area. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. you create additional revisions in the revision table. 7 In the left pane of the dialog.rfa. click Tags. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Leader. 6 Click Load. 12 Save the file. Working with Revisions In this exercise. click Tag ➤ By Category. 11 Click to place the tag. you view a sheet on which you place a revised view. Training File Working with Revisions | 361 . under Floor Plans. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. You then issue a revision. scroll down to Revision Clouds. you need to add one. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. 4 On the Options Bar. Because you chose to number by project. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. If the cursor is just inside the cloud.rvt. and because the revision is the first in the project.

8 Add another revision row. and click OK. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. 9 Click OK. Create additional revisions 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. double-click A107 . you can no longer modify it. View the revision schedule on a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. Issue a revision 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. and enter a date. 362 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . You do this by issuing the revision. You can continue to add revisions. and enter a date for the revision.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. 2 Zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. under Sheets. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. select Issued. 6 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. type Modify Paving Area. NOTE After you issue a revision.rvt. 7 For Description. Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. with the description Relocate Door. click Add.Unnamed. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. you prevent further changes to the revision.

under Floor Plans. click outside each of the two revision clouds you just drew. for Revision.Modify Paving Area. click to add a revision clouds. select Revision Cloud. in the drawing area. 19 To add tags. 16 Add another revision cloud as shown. 15 On the Options Bar. under Sheets (all). Apply revisions to revision clouds 14 In the drawing area. select Tag ➤ By Category. select Seq. 17 Using the same method learned previously. Tag the revision clouds 18 On the Drafting tab.Relocate Door to the revision cloud. 12 In the drawing area. 20 On the Project Browser. select the revision cloud. Working with Revisions | 363 . 13 Click Finish Sketch.Unnamed. and then specify the revision table sequence to alphabetic. double-click Level 4. 10 In the Project Browser. 2 . double-click A107 . 21 Zoom in to the revision schedule in the titleblock. 11 On the Drafting tab. Information for all tagged revisions displays in the schedule.Change revision scheme from numeric to alphabetic You place the new revisions on a sheet. 3 . apply Seq.

Click Options. clear Issued. select the titleblock. beginning with "D". You can modify the sequence of characters used for the alphabetic numbering scheme. select Alphabetic. In order to make formatting changes (appearance. You want to change the numbering value from numeric to alphabetic for all sequences. and rotation) to the revision schedule. 25 Click OK twice. 23 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog: ■ For Sequence 1. delete the first 3 characters. ■ ■ 24 In the Sequence Options dialog.Change the sequencing of revision to use alpha characters 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. The revision schedule now uses alphabetic characters. for Numbering. For each revision. 26 In the drawing area. you edit the titleblock family. You do this so that the revision can be changed. height. Edit the titleblock family The revision schedule is part of the titleblock family. for Sequence. 364 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .

33 Select the schedule header. under Other. right-click Revision Schedule. and then zoom in to the revision schedule. click Load into Projects. 37 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Clear Blank row before data. and press DELETE. on the Appearance tab: ■ ■ Under Graphics. and delete the schedule lines because the table will be dynamically built. Select Outline. click Yes. and select Wide Lines for the outline type. for Build Schedule. Reload the titleblock family into the project Because you changed the titleblock family.27 On the Options Bar. Working with Revisions | 365 . Relocate revision schedule You relocate the revision schedule to the bottom of the revision area. 36 Drag the header to the bottom of the revision schedule area. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. Select Grid lines. 35 Select the existing schedule lines. and drag it above the schedule area. 28 In the alert dialog. click Yes. click Edit Family. click Modify. ■ ■ 32 Click OK twice. for Appearance. Modify the revision schedule properties 29 In the Project Browser. 31 In the Revision Properties dialog. click Edit. 34 On the Design Bar. and click Properties. 38 In the Reload Family dialog. select Bottom-up. all sheets that use this titleblock in the project will be affected. Grid lines will now be dynamically added as the revision schedule is built. expand Views (all) ➤ Schedules.

When the height property is variable. click Edit. for Heading. select User defined.. and click Properties. select 90° Counterclockwise. for Rotation on Sheet. for Height. enter Rev. With a user-defined height. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. Rotate revision schedule to display it vertically 39 Using the same method learned previously. 44 On the Formatting tab of the Revision Properties dialog. open the titleblock family for editing. under Other. the schedule continues to add rows as revisions are created.The revision schedule is now shown in a bottom-up format. 48 Click the circular grip and drag it so that the schedule fills the revision area. right-click Revision Schedule. and the most current revisions display in the available rows. Modify the properties of the revision schedule 42 In the Project Browser. 46 Click OK twice. 45 On the Appearance tab. for Formatting. the schedule is restricted to a specific size. 366 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . Use grip editing to resize the revision schedule 47 In the drawing area. select the revision schedule. 40 Select the revision schedule header. 41 Drag the header to the right side of the titleblock.

and spreadsheets) from other applications into a project. click Yes. 50 In the Reload Family dialog. 51 Save the file. you learn to import information (such as images. text. click Load into Projects. Importing from Other Applications | 367 . The modified revision schedule displays on the project sheet. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson.Load revised schedule into the project 49 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.

Title Sheet. double-click T . you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. under Sheets. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet.rvt. for Leader.JPG. 3 On the Options Bar. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 1 In the Project Browser. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo.Importing Image Files In this exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click to add text without a leader. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. 5 On the Design Bar. under Sheets. double-click T .rvt. and place it on a sheet. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Text. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 368 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .Title Sheet. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. click Modify. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.

9 On the Design Bar. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy.Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. click Modify. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. 11 Save the file. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image.doc text file in another window. Training File Importing Spreadsheets | 369 . Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit Architecture window. 6 Select the text. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. NOTE Some formatting may be required after the text is placed in Revit Architecture. with the new text box still selected.

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. This process may vary from system to system.JPG. 5 Click OK. 7 In the Revit Architecture window. 3 In Microsoft Excel. click Desktop. select the document writer. double-click A102 . click Training Files. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image.xls.Unit 18. and open Common\Fixture Schedule. 4 Under Printer. 6 In the left pane of the Save the file as dialog. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format.mdi. 370 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and click Save. type Fixture Schedule.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. click File menu ➤ Print. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. for File name. This exercise demonstrates a common method. 8 In the left pane of the Import Image dialog. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. for Name.JPG. and saved as Fixture Schedule. 12 Save the file. under Sheets. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. This step has been completed for you. 10 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet.

To effectively document this project. called dependent views. 371 . you break up the plan into sections. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. or footprint. The large floor plan.Using Dependent Views 9 In this tutorial. as well as a large lab building. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary.

Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes. 372 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .

Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson. you ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation ■ ■ Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views.rvt Using Dependent Views in Documentation | 373 .

under Floor Plans.Aviary. double-click Level 2. 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building. 3 In the Project Browser. under Level 2. enter Level 2 . 374 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. for Name. and the model crop is the interior crop region. right-click Level 2. and click Rename. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. select the crop region. click Zoom To Fit. 6 In the drawing area. 2 In the Project Browser. and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region. 5 Click in the drawing area. and click OK. 4 In the Rename View dialog. The dependent view opens. right-click Dependent on Level 2.

confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary).8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up. 9 On the View Control Bar. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 375 . click (Hide Crop Region).

for Name. 12 In the Project Browser. and on the Zoom flyout. enter Level 2 . 14 Click in the drawing area.10 Click in the drawing area. right-click Level 2. 17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes. and click Rename. click Zoom To Fit. and click OK. 15 Select the crop region.Labs. 13 In the Rename View dialog. and on the Zoom flyout. right-click Dependent on Level 2. 376 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs). 11 In the Project Browser. click Zoom To Fit.

(Align with the second column of lab cubicles. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser. 19 On the View Control Bar. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split for dependent views. click Matchline.The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. 23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. 18 On the Design Bar. and on the Zoom flyout. click Modify. under Floor Plans. click Zoom To Fit. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.) Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 377 . click (Hide Crop Region). double-click Level 2. 20 Click in the drawing area.

■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. Click above the left corner of the lab building. 378 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . and click. Move the cursor left about 4800 mm. click Finish Sketch. 24 On the Design Bar. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary.

and click Rename. 28 For Line Pattern. 31 In the Project Browser. and click OK. select 9. and drag it onto the sheet. click OK to accept the default titleblock. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet. for Name.Aviary. and click OK. 27 Under Matchline. expand Sheets. enter Level 2 Aviary.Unnamed. 26 In the Object Styles dialog. right-click A101 . click the Annotation Objects tab. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 379 . under Floor Plans. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog. click Level 2 . 33 In the Project Browser. select Double Dash. for Line Weight.25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet.

Aviary is selected. 36 Use the same method to create another sheet. rename the sheet Level 2 Labs. under Floor Plans. click View Reference. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. 39 On the Options Bar. verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 . 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline. double-click Level 2. for Target view. click Modify. 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.35 On the Design Bar. 380 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . and place the Level 2 . Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser.Labs dependent view on the sheet.

for Target view. NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references. select Floor Plan: Level 2 . 45 On the Zoom flyout. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 381 . 41 On the Options Bar. 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. 44 On the Design Bar. click Modify.The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline. click Zoom To Fit.Labs. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline.

double-click Level 2 .46 In the Project Browser.Aviary. after modifying the annotation crop region. 47 On the View Control Bar. 48 Select the crop region. click the far right control. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. click (Show Crop Region). right-click. under Floor Plans. select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. 49 If. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. 382 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view. the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display. and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference.

and click OK. under Floor Plans. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. leaving 4 rooms visible in the view. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. select all views in the list. expand Level 1. 51 On the View Control Bar. 53 In the Select Views dialog. and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. 52 In the Project Browser. you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. and click Apply Dependent Views. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 383 . click Zoom To Fit.50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). right-click Level 2. click Apply dependent view settings to other plans (Hide Crop Region). but are not placed on sheets. 55 On the Zoom flyout. 54 In the Project Browser. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view.

click Zoom To Fit. click Training Files. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise. and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). The matchline is already placed in the view. 384 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and double-click South Elevation. right-click South Elevation.57 On the Zoom flyout. 2 In the Project Browser.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser.

cropping the view to the lab building. enter South Elevation . 6 Select the inside crop region control on the right. and click Rename. for Name. 5 In the drawing area. 8 In the Project Browser.Right. cropping the view to the aviary. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 385 . right-click South Elevation.Left. 4 In the Rename View dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 11 Select the crop region. and drag it toward the center of the view. select the Crop Region. for Name.The dependent view opens. enter South Elevation . and click Rename. click (Hide Crop Region). 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. 9 In the Project Browser. expand South Elevation. 7 On the View Control Bar. 10 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. 3 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and drag it toward the center of the drawing.

13 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock. 16 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, right-click A103 Unnamed, and click Rename. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation, and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Left, and drag it onto the sheet. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet.

20 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Right, and drag it onto the sheet. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.

386 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 23 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South Elevation. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference. 25 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Elevation: South Elevation - Left is selected. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline.

28 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Elevation: South Elevation - Right. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 387

30 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 31 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A103 - South Elevation. NOTE If the view references are not visible, you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. Right-click the view, and click Activate View. Select the crop region, and use the annotation crop controls to modify it.

388 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

Viewing and Rendering

389

390

Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

10

In this tutorial, you learn to use the rendering features in Revit Architecture 2009 to create rendered interior and exterior views of a building information model. You also learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of a model.

Rendering an Exterior View
In this lesson, you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a pool house building model and create rendered images for daytime and nighttime lighting.
Daytime rendering of the pool house

391

Nighttime rendering of the pool house

You learn to create and apply materials to the building model, add trees to the building site, and create the perspective view that you want to render. After you create the perspective view, you specify options that define the model environment, and then render a final exterior view.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model
In this exercise, you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. You also learn how to create a new material and apply it to a building component. You work with a building model that already has materials applied to it.

In this exercise, you:
■ ■ ■

change the render appearance of the wood material applied to the exterior screen wall of the pool house. change the material of the pad of the pool house from the default material to concrete. define a new black anodized aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions of the pool house wall.

When you complete these changes, you render a region of the building that includes the exterior wall, the pad, and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes.

392 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Pool_House.rvt.

View the finish material of the screen wall 1 Verify that the 3D view of the pool house is displayed.

2 Zoom in to the wall of the house near the pool.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 393

3 In the drawing area, select the wooden screen wall, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

You check the construction of the screen walls to determine the material assigned to the wall, so you can change the render appearance for the material.

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 5 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 6 In the Edit Assembly dialog, verify that the material for Structure [1] is Wood - Teak, Solid. 7 Click OK 3 times. Change the render appearance of the wood material 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. The Wood - Teak, Solid material is currently a light stained teak. The design calls for the use of a dark stained, satin-finished teak. 9 In the Materials dialog, for Materials, select Wood - Teak, Solid. 10 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace.

394 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

11 In the Render Appearance Library dialog, click Wood Teak Stained Dark Medium Gloss, and click OK. You do not want the medium gloss finish, but it is the closest material to what you want. You make modifications to the settings for this material to more closely match the desired finish. 12 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog, for Finish, select Satin Varnish. 13 Click Update Preview, and click OK. The Update Preview option provides a real time rendering of the changes to the material. It can be used for visual feedback to see if the setting produces the desired results. Change the material of the pad from the default material to concrete 14 In the drawing area, select the pad, and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

The material assignment for the pad is currently set to By Category, which is using a default material. You change the material assignment to use a concrete with a straight broom finish.

15 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 16 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for the Structure [1] Material value, click <By Category>, and click . 18 In the Materials dialog, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 19 On the Render Appearance tab, for Finish, select Broom Straight, and click Update Preview. 20 Click the Graphics tab, and review the material patterns. 21 Click OK 4 times. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 395

Define a new material and apply it to the mullions 23 Zoom in to view the curtain wall mullions.

24 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. You create a black anodized aluminum material, and apply it to the mullions of the pool house wall. 25 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum. You use an existing material as a template to create the black anodized aluminum material. 26 At the bottom left corner of the Materials dialog, click (Duplicate).

27 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog, for Name, enter Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black, and click OK. 28 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, select Use Render Appearance for Shading. By selecting this option, the color used for this material in shaded views is an average color defined by the render appearance. 29 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace. 30 In the Render Appearance Library, click Aluminum Anodized Black, and click OK. 31 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, review the material appearance (color and pattern), and click OK.

396 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

32 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The mullions and frame for the wall are defined as By Category. You change the material used by the curtain wall mullion category. 33 In the Object Styles dialog, for Curtain Wall Mullions, select the Material value, and click 34 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black. 35 Click OK twice. .

36 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view.

Render a region of the model to view the material changes 37 On the View Control Bar, click 39 Select the rendering crop boundary. (Show Rendering Dialog).

38 At the top of the Rendering dialog, select Region.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 397

40 Adjust the extents of the region by dragging the borders in tight around the areas where the materials changed (pool house screen, mullions, and pad). NOTE The smaller the region, the faster the image renders. It is a good practice to define a precise render region until you are ready to create the final rendered image.

41 Zoom in to the region in order to see the results of the rendering test more clearly.

398 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

42 Specify options in the Rendering dialog:

Under Quality, for Setting, select Medium. Several quality settings are available. The higher the quality, the longer the rendering process will take. Refer to the Revit Architecture Online Help for best practices for optimizing quality and output settings. Under Lighting, for Scheme, select Exterior: Sun only. For Sun, select Sunlight from top left.

■ ■

43 Click Render. The Rendering Progress dialog displays, providing information on the status and duration of the rendering process.

44 To display the building model, after the rendering process completes, on the Rendering dialog, under Display, click Show the model. 45 Close the Rendering dialog. 46 Click File menu ➤ Save, and save the project as c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. 47 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Trees to the Site on page 399.

Adding Trees to the Site
In this exercise, you place trees and shrubs on the building site in order to provide a more realistic context for rendering the project.

Adding Trees to the Site | 399

In a later exercise, when you render an exterior view of the model, the RPC model is used in the rendering. NOTE For simplicity, imperial components and units are used in this lesson. Specific types and sizes of trees are referenced in the steps, but any type and size can be used. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Add shrubs and trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Site.

2 Zoom in so you can easily view the area surrounding the pool house and walkway.

400 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Site Component. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Site. 4 In the Type Selector, select RPC Shrub : Yew 2'-4''. NOTE If planting families are not loaded into a project, they can be loaded from the Content Library. See Loading Families in the Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. 5 Place 4 shrubs to the right of the patio, near the walkway, as shown. (Exact placement is not important.)

6 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Red Maple - 30', and place 2 trees in the project, similar to the locations shown.

Adding Trees to the Site | 401

7 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Scarlet Oak - 42', and place a tree to the left of the pool house between the 2 maple trees.

Create a tree type and add it to the site 8 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Honey Locust - 25', and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

9 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. You change the size of the existing Honey Locust tree family. 10 In the Type Properties dialog, click Rename. 11 In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Honey Locust - 18', and click OK. 12 In the Type Properties dialog, for Height, enter 18'. 13 Click OK twice. 14 Click in the drawing area to the right of the pool house to place the tree.

402 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Creating a Perspective View on page 403. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render.15 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Creating a Perspective View | 403 . Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save.

click Camera.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. c_Pool_House_in_progress. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ Specify the first point along the curve of the walkway facing the pool house to position the camera. Place a camera in the site view 1 With the Site view open. Specify the second point in the upper left corner of the pool house to define the target point of the camera. The perspective view displays. ■ Exact placement is not important because you modify the view as required.rvt. on the View tab of the Design Bar. 404 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

and select the crop boundary.3 Zoom out. With the camera shown. 4 Adjust the crop boundary to display the entire building and some of the pool in the foreground. double-click Site. the triangle that represents the field of vision can be adjusted. and click Show Camera. The camera can also be moved along the walkway to get the desired perspective view. Creating a Perspective View | 405 . right-click 3D View 1. the back wall of the yard may be cut off. If the camera is not shown in the view. as necessary. under Floor Plans. in the Project Browser. Adjust the back clipping plane so that it is beyond the wall in the yard. Adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane 5 In the Project Browser. as shown. and adjust the field of vision. Depending on camera placement.

Day. 406 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . right-click 3D View 1. 9 Zoom to fit the perspective view in the window. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. under 3D Views. 10 Save the file. Creating the Exterior Rendering on page 407. 8 In the Project Browser. and make any final adjustments to the crop boundary to improve image composition. enter Exterior . 7 In the Rename View dialog.Day to open the view.6 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. double-click Exterior . and click OK.

c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 407 . and create lighting groups for a nighttime view of the exterior. under 3D Views.Day. and render a daytime view of the exterior. you specify the time and location settings for the rendering.Creating the Exterior Rendering In this exercise. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. modify render settings. double-click Exterior . You then duplicate the view.

enter Spring Equinox . For information on how the rendering/sun relates to the location settings.Santa Monica. In this case.Specify rendering settings for a daytime view 2 On the View Control Bar. export the resulting image in PNG or TIFF format. click (Show Rendering Dialog). 3pm. under Background. and click Rename. select Spring Equinox. under Lighting. see Re-orienting the Project on page 447. 6 Click OK twice. and click Render. 4 On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. for Setting. NOTE If a background image is required. for New. The PNG and TIFF formats place the chosen background on an alpha channel for easier manipulation during photoediting. You create a location and time for the rendering. 8 Under Quality. 5 In the Rename dialog. select Medium. 408 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . select Edit/New. 7 In the Rendering dialog. 3 In the Rendering dialog. You adjust cloud settings as required. select Sky: Cloudy. the sky will be a procedural sky based on cloud settings and time of day. for Sun.

For Files of type.png). After the image is rendered. click Show the rendering. Export the rendered image to an external file 11 In the Rendering dialog. you can switch between the rendered view and the model view as long as the Revit Architecture session is open. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 409 . 13 Close the Rendering dialog. 12 In the Save Image dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. click Show the model. The image file is saved to the Desktop for later reference. select Portable Network Graphics (*.9 In the Rendering dialog. click Desktop. click Export. Click Save. 10 In the Rendering dialog.

and click Move to Group. and select the last light. click New.Night.120V through 35 :Sconce Light . for Scheme.Flat Round : 60W . and click OK.Flat Round : 60W . 24 In the New Light Group dialog. 15 Rename the Copy of Exterior . Create lighting groups 18 In the Artificial Lights . under Group Options. 20 In the Artificial Lights dialog. verify that Pool Lights is selected. you duplicate the view and change the settings. highlight 9 :Sconce Light . and click OK. on the View Control Bar. click Render.Day.Flat Round : 60W . 16 With the Exterior . 22 Using the same method. enter Pool Lights.Flat Round : 60W .Specify rendering settings for a nighttime view 14 In the Project Browser. Lighting groups allow greater control over lighting schemes used in renderings. add 16 :Light Fixture through 29 :Light Fixture to the Pool House Lights group. for Name. click New. enter Pool House Lights.120V. add 30 :Sconce Light . under Lighting. under Ungrouped Lights. under Group Options.Night. click OK.Day view to Exterior . 19 In the New Light Group dialog. To select a sequential list.Exterior . You change the rendering settings to create a nighttime rendering of the same view. right-click Exterior . under 3D Views. click Dialog). select the first light. press and hold SHIFT.Night view open. 410 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . select Exterior: Artificial only.120V through 14 :Sconce Light . (Show Rendering 17 In the Rendering dialog. To create a similar view using different rendering settings. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. 21 In the Light Groups dialog. 27 In the Rendering dialog. for Name. 25 Using the same method.120V to the Pool Lights group. 23 In the Artificial Lights dialog. under Ungrouped Lights. dialog. and click Artificial Lights. 26 In the Artificial Lights dialog.

and click OK. you change the brightness of the exposure. click Show the model. but the other settings can be modified as well to control the final rendering. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson.Adjust the exposure 28 In the Rendering dialog. Settings can be changed at any time within the Revit Architecture session. the exposure can be modified to improve the output. under Image. After the image is rendered. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. you create a nighttime and a daytime rendering of the interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. click Adjust Exposure. and then switch between the views by clicking Show the rendering. enter 4. for Exposure Value. 29 In the Exposure Control dialog. 30 In the Rendering dialog. 31 Close the Rendering dialog. In this example. 32 Save the file. Rendering an Interior View on page 411. Rendering an Interior View | 411 .

rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 412 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . you add ArchVision® realpeople (RPC content) to the interior of the pool house. Adding RPC People In this exercise. define the perspective view and rendering settings. render the views. and finally. RPC people are represented by a 2D symbol in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. c_Pool_House_in_progress. you add an RPC person to the interior view that you render in a later exercise.Draft nighttime rendering of the interior High quality daytime rendering of the interior To create the rendered view.

click 7 Rotate the figure: The pointed portion of the symbol represents the front of the figure. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Click to set the rotate start point at the line of sight. click Modify. ■ (Rotate). double-click Level 1. 4 In the Type Selector. 6 Select the figure. but place the figure close to the front of the vanity so that her reflection displays in the mirror after the scene is rendered. Exact placement is not important. 5 On the Design Bar. Adding RPC People | 413 . click Component. and place the component inside the pool house. the person’s line of sight. select RPC Female : YinYin. under Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in to the pool house. and on the Edit toolbar.Add an RPC figure to the view 1 In the Project Browser.

11 In the Render Appearance Properties dialog. and click so that the figure is angled toward the vanity.■ Rotate clockwise about 20 degrees. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. the reflection of RPC content is turned off in order to enhance rendering performance. under Parameters. If reflections of RPC content are important to the rendering. on the Options Bar. the reflective properties must be turned on for the family type. By default. for Render Appearance Properties. 13 On the Design Bar. In order to see the figure’s reflection. under Identity Data. click Modify. you can enable this option. 12 Click OK 3 times. 414 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . select Cast Reflections. Enable reflective properties for RPC content 8 With the RPC figure selected. 14 Save the file. click Edit. click Edit/New. click (Element Properties). 9 In the Element Properties dialog.

Click outside of the pool house to the left to place the target point. You place a camera into the view to create an interior perspective. click Camera. c_Pool_House_in_progress. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson.15 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Click inside the lower right corner of the pool house to place the camera. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. You define the interior perspective by placing a camera. and using a section box to limit the geometry included in the rendering process.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 415. Exact placement is not important because you will adjust the crop boundary of the view in later steps. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 415 .

6 Zoom out so that you can see the selection box. 416 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . select Section Box. and click Properties. right-click 3D View 1. and click OK. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. under Extents. 4 In the Project Browser. You can use a section box to limit the geometry included in a rendering. under 3D Views.The perspective view displays. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 3 Zoom to fit the view in the window.

double-click Level 1. select the section box. double-click South. under Floor Plans. 9 In the Project Browser. 11 In the 3D view.7 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. In order to accurately adjust the section box. in addition to the 3D view. under Elevations (Building Elevations). you display an elevation/section view and a plan view. 10 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. 8 In the Project Browser. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 417 .

size the box as shown. select the section box. size the box as shown. and click Hide in view ➤ Category.12 In the floor plan view. right-click. 418 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 13 In the South Elevation view. 14 In the 3D view.

you define artificial lighting and render a nighttime view of the interior. and render the interior view. Creating the Interior Rendering In this exercise. 17 Save the file. Training File Creating the Interior Rendering | 419 .15 Maximize the 3D view. you define daylight portals for the glazed panels of the curtain wall. To create a daytime view. Daylight portals improve the quality of light that shines through windows. 16 Zoom to fit the view in the window. and adjust the crop boundary to match the illustration. doors that contain windows or glass. and curtain walls. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Interior Rendering on page 419.

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. After these settings are established. clear Pool Lights. Using light controls and lighting groups can help to define multiple lighting conditions for views. 8 In the Rendering dialog. select Interior: Artificial only. You can specify a lower quality. for Setting.Night. 3 On the View Control Bar. These settings can be adjusted after the rendering is complete using the Adjust Exposure option. click Render. and click Rename. 5 Click Artificial Lights. the view can be rendered at a higher quality level. 2 In the Rename View dialog. Define lighting for a nighttime view 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Under Quality. select Draft. and click OK. right-click 3D View 1. 6 In the Artificial Lights dialog. and click OK. and render the view to check lighting levels and material selections. under 3D Views. c_Pool_House_in_progress. The Interior: Artificial only option defines a baseline for the exposure and other settings for an interior rendering without daylight. for Scheme. 4 In the Rendering dialog. under Lighting. click (Show Rendering Dialog). Because the exterior pool lights will not have an effect on this rendering. 420 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . enter Interior . you turn them off for this scene.

and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. for Daylight Portal Options.Day. The preset schemes are read-only. Creating the Interior Rendering | 421 . you must create a custom setting. 11 Rename the copied view to Interior . select Edit. The daylight portals help to further refine this daylight into a more realistic rendered effect.Santa Monica. 3pm. This process must be repeated if you want to use custom settings in other views.Night. see the Revit Architecture Online Help. select Interior: Sun only. 15 In the Render Quality Settings dialog. In this case. select Curtain Walls. select Spring Equinox . For sunlit interiors. 16 Scroll to the bottom of the dialog. You have to copy a preset scheme to your custom settings in order to make changes. Create an interior day view 10 In the Project Browser. IMPORTANT Enabling daylight portals can drastically increase rendering times. for Scheme. By default they are turned off. but the space will receive standard daylighting. NOTE The custom setting is only applied to this view. You create a view for the interior during the day. Specify rendering settings 12 On the View Control Bar. for Sun. select Region. and click OK.9 Close the Rendering dialog. click 14 For Setting. 17 In the Rendering dialog. You can duplicate the view for each lighting condition/time of day you want to render. (Show Rendering Dialog). 13 In the Rendering dialog. in order to turn on daylight portals. click Copy To Custom. and click Render. the daylight portals can be turned on. For more information on daylight portals. right-click Interior .

Notice that the speckling on the wooden column in the foreground is reflecting too much light. select the column on the right. Click OK. click Show the model. and close the Rendering dialog. (Element 422 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and on the Options Bar. For Saturation. click Adjust Exposure. click Properties). you adjust the material of the column to improve the effect.18 In the Rendering dialog. under Image. 19 In the Exposure Control dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Exposure Value. enter 10. Modify the column material 21 In the drawing area. enter 1. In the next steps. View the properties of the column and note that the assigned material is Wood. 20 In the Rendering dialog.

add a bump map to create texture. and rotate the material so that the grain of the wood runs vertically along the column. click OK. 26 Click Update Preview. click the dimensions for Size. 28 In the Rendering dialog. For Amount. You change the varnish setting. click Settings menu ➤ Materials. select Wood. select High. clear Region. For Bump. and click OK. select Unfinished. The rendered output can be set to a printed ratio and the printed size of the output as well as the DPI for the image can be controlled. Creating the Interior Rendering | 423 . you can define the output and quality settings for final output. Click OK. 31 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. and on the Options Bar.6. select Scale (locked proportions). 32 In the Rendering dialog. for Setting. select Based on wood grain. under Output Settings. 29 In the Rendering dialog. move the slider to the right until the value is approximately 5. For Width. and click Render.22 In the Element Properties dialog. For Rotate. enter 90. select Printer. select the crop boundary. As size and DPI are increased. 23 With the column still selected. enter 5''. 30 In the drawing area. 25 Specify options on the Render Appearance tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Finish. After you use the test renderings to verify that you made the correct lighting and material selection. Create a print quality rendering 27 On the View Control Bar. for Resolution. 24 In the Materials dialog. the render time increases significantly. click (Show Rendering Dialog).

which is the path that a camera will follow through the building model. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Architecture 2009. you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. Usually. elevation. In a plan view. The walkthrough path is a spline. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. but you can also define it in a 3D. or section view. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shading 424 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. 33 Close the exercise file with or without saving.The rendered image displays. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. independent of the Revit Architecture software. you can record it by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. The file can now be exported or saved to the Revit project. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. You learned to create perspective views suitable for rendering and to modify rendering options in order to optimize the final output.

4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. NOTE Some imperial values are used by default in this exercise. proceeds through the dining room. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Floor Plans. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. and click the tab in the context menu. on the Options Bar. click Training Files. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse.■ ■ Shading with Edges Rendering Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click to specify the start point (the first key frame) of the walkthrough. 5 Specify 4 additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown. Creating a Walkthrough | 425 . 3 To create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. expand Views (all). If you prefer to use metric values.rvt. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. click Settings ➤ Project Units. click Walkthrough. right-click in the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and double-click 1st Floor. and change unit formats as desired. verify that Perspective is selected. and open Common\c_Townhouse. and ends in the far corner of the living room.

on the Options Bar. The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. 426 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . expand Views (all) ➤ Walkthroughs. click Finish. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same.6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown. and double-click Walkthrough 1.

12 On the View menu. 16 On the Options Bar. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of a total of 300 frames. on the Options Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. 11 Under Change. 17 Click . enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. 14 Click . and for Height. and select the crop boundary. enter 1. If it is not.8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. click Edit Walkthrough. verify that Field of view is selected. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). enter 16''. Creating a Walkthrough | 427 . and click OK. 9 To change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. enter 9''. and click OK. click the dimensions for Size. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. for Width. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). for Frame. select the crop boundary.

Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. double-click 1st Floor. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. click (Element Properties). click Edit Walkthrough. c_Townhouse. and click OK. 2 On the Options Bar. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position on page 428. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. press ESC. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. under Floor Plans.The walkthrough plays. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. proceed to the next exercise. clear Far Clip Active. 3 In the Element Properties dialog.rvt. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. 428 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . under Extents.

7 Click the third key frame position. so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. and drag it to the location shown. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 429 . 6 On the Options Bar. You can move any camera target or key frame position. select Path.5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration. for Controls.

and click OK. and click OK. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. and save the exercise file with a unique name. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 8 If you want to save this exercise. click File menu ➤ Save As. shading with edges. enter 15. 430 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 4 In the Export Walkthrough dialog.rvt. The walkthrough is recorded. Recording the Walkthrough on page 430. on the Options Bar. 9 To play the walkthrough. 2 In the Length/Format dialog. and click Save. double-click Walkthrough 1. shading. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. 3 Under Format. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. select <Shading>. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. under Walkthroughs. If you are unsure of what option to use. When you export the walkthrough. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. c_Townhouse.Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. . perhaps to 6'' wide x 4'' height. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walkthrough from the location that you specified previously. or rendering. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. click Edit Walkthrough. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. for Compressor. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI file. under Output Length. hidden line. specifying the number of frames. without opening Revit Architecture 2009. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. reducing the size of the image. for Model Graphics Style. 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Walkthrough. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. for Frames/sec.

In this tutorial. You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images. you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year. you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies.Creating Solar Studies 11 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. 431 . A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building. you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define. Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year. Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. More specifically. ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings. A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building.

Courtyard View In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and double-click 01 Entry. 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point.rvt.Creating a Solar Study . 4 On the View toolbar. expand Floor Plans. A 3D view is created. you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis. expand Views (all). as 432 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click Training Files. and open Common\c_Solar_Study. click Camera. 1 In the Project Browser. (SteeringWheels). as shown. click shown. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement. and use the Orbit tool to adjust the view.

click Modify. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View on page 433. double-click 01 Entry. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house. click Save As. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. as shown. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view. 3 On the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. right-click 3D View 1. expand 3D Views. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and. 7 In the Project Browser. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise. and click OK.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. 8 In the Rename View dialog. enter Solar Study . you create a section cutaway view. if necessary. 9 On the File menu. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration.Courtyard View.5 On the Design Bar. 6 Click the view boundary to select it. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. under Floor Plans. and click Rename. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 433 . click Section.

434 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click Orient to View ➤ Section: Section for Solar Study Cutaway. and click Rename. 7 In the Project Browser. 12 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view down and to the right. 6 To view the section. click Modify. 11 On the SteeringWheel. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. click .5 On the Design Bar. enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. expand Sections. click Modify. 13 On the Design Bar. double-click the section head. click 10 On the View toolbar. right-click Section 1. Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar. as shown. 8 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. (SteeringWheels).

NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View on page 435. 17 To hide the section box. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. then Fine. click . clear Section Boxes. you create a plan cutaway view. double-click Callout of 01 Entry. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. and click OK. 4 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. click Save. do not display many elements in 3D. and click Rename. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. On the Annotation Categories tab. under Floor Plans. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. under Floor Plans. 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. right-click Callout of 01 Entry. then select Medium. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. click Callout.14 In the Project Browser. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. and click OK. right-click {3D}. double-click 01 Entry. Typical plan views. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. under 3D Views. 6 In the Rename View dialog. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. including the house. 18 On the File menu. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 435 . as shown. 16 On the View Control Bar. In some cases. 15 In the Rename View dialog. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.

13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 9 On the SteeringWheel. 16 On the View Control Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. 436 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click (SteeringWheels). 10 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. so you can see into the building from the top. and click Orient to View ➤ Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. 15 Select the Roof. click Modify. as shown. 12 Select the section box in the drawing area.8 On the View toolbar. as shown.

18 In the Project Browser. and preview the effects of each study as an animation.Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial. 19 In the Rename View dialog. 21 On the File menu. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway. right-click {3D}. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations | 437 . double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study . click Detail Level ➤ Fine.17 On the View Control Bar. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site. click Save. and click Rename. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson. under 3D Views. and click OK. 20 On the View Control Bar. Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate.

For the Single-Day solar study. and click OK. CA. Click the Single-Day tab. and 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. click . for City. click . as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. USA is selected. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. For this study. 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. MA.rvt training file you used in the previous lesson. For the Multi-Day solar study. Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. select Los Angeles. 10 Under Place. expand 3D Views. Los Angeles.Boston. you specify the location. 3 Select Cast Shadows. 4 For Sun Position. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice.Creating Solar Studies . date range.Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. and double-click Solar Study Courtyard View. single-day. Training File Continue to use the customized c_solar_study. and time. The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. USA. click click OK. and click Duplicate. or multi-day solar study. enter Summer Solstice. 9 In the Name dialog. 2 On the View Control Bar. expand Views (all). . You can create a still. 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . 438 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. leave the slider at 50. 5 Click the Single-Day tab. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser. and time range. date. you specify the location.

■ For Time Interval. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. 2008. click . 14 In this case. Under Frame. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click OK. and click OK. under Frame. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. For Time Range.Courtyard View is currently displayed. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. for Sun Position. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. confirm that Summer Solstice. Los Angeles. 2008. Clear Ground Plane at Level. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. and click OK. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 7 On the Options Bar. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . select Winter Solstice. and click Duplicate. click OK. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. enter 10 and press ENTER. Los Angeles. select December 22. on the Single-Day tab. you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. for Date. 8 On the Options Bar. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. enter Winter Solstice. select June 22. enter 20 and press ENTER. 2 On the View Control Bar. Los Angeles is selected. 16 In the Name dialog. Previewing Solar Study Animation | 439 .12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. Previewing Solar Study Animation on page 439. 6 On the View Control Bar. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click .rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. 19 On the File menu. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click Save. You can select the level to be used for shadow display. and click OK.

Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. click Text. Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. approximately as shown. 440 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click OK. Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. click To play the animation from start to finish. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. ■ To display the previous sequential frame. AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. click . 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click 01 Entry. click . on the Single-Day tab. 14 On the Options Bar. you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. The solar study animation plays. click To display the next sequential frame. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. for Sun Position. . showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. 13 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans. Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson. you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. and click OK. . click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click . Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation.■ To display the next key frame. You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. click ■ ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. . 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Los Angeles. select Summer Solstice. PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson.

NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. 5 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 4 Sketch rooms: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 6 On the View Control Bar. verify that Cast Shadows is selected. click . and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. On the Options Bar. click Lines. Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. as shown. click . approximately as shown. as shown. 8 For Sun Position. expand 3D Views. Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. Exporting the Study as AVI | 441 . click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Click and enter Dining.■ ■ Click outside of the text box to end the command. Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area.

on the Single-Day tab. Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Output Length. and click OK. and click OK. select the section box. NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. as shown. select Frame Range. if necessary. Los Angeles. and click OK. On the Annotation Categories tab. 12 In the drawing area. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. and enter 5 to 50. select Summer Solstice. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. verify that the value is set to 15. On the Annotation Categories tab. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. click OK.9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 14 Click outside of the section box. 11 To display the section box. ■ For Frames per second. select Section Boxes. NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. 17 Specify the export options: ■ In the Length/Format dialog. 15 To hide the section box. 442 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . clear Section Boxes.

and enter 5 to 10. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. verify that Hidden Line is selected. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. 7 Specify the export options: ■ ■ ■ In the Length/Format dialog. select Frame Range. For File Name. select Winter Solstice. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. enter 450 in the first field (width). you open each image. select AVI Files. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. To view the animation. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. For Dimensions. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. for Model Graphics Style. ■ ■ ■ ■ 18 Click Save. verify that the value is set to 15. for Compressor. you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically. Click OK. and click OK.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. click OK. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file.Los Angeles. under Output Length. Under Format. To maintain the proportions of the frame. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. for Model Graphics Style. verify that Hidden Line is selected. For Frames per second. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. on the Single-Day tab. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. 19 In the Video Compression dialog.■ ■ Under Format. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway . Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. 2 On the View Control Bar. 3 For Sun Position. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. For Files of Type. Los Angeles. of the animation separately. Exporting a Study as PNG | 443 . and click OK. or frame. click . Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. Exporting a Study as PNG on page 443.

Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. For File name.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway.■ For Dimensions. you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building. the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. click Save. or any single-frame format. Click OK. Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise. In this example.Los Angeles. TIFF. as shown: 9 On the File menu. 8 Click Save. under 3D Views. or GIF. BMP. The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day. enter 450 in the first field (width). such as JPEG. depending on the Frame Range. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. select PNG. Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser. For Files of Type. click the Desktop icon. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . 444 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE When you export to PNG. The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files.

2 Select the section box in the drawing area. as shown. 3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 445 . NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen.

for Sun Position. and click OK. For Time. click OK. Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box. and on the View Control Bar. 446 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. and click OK. 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study .Boston. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On. click the Multi-Day tab. and click Duplicate. 12 In the Name dialog. USA. select One week. specify 2:00 pm. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. for File name enter 2pm . 8 On the View Control Bar. For Time Interval.Los Angeles . 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. clear Section Boxes. Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building. MA. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain. On the Annotation Categories tab.Week Interval. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 5 Select the roof.

click OK. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. Re-orienting the Project | 447 . select Full Frames (Uncompressed).15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. you mirror all model elements. click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. In the Length/Format dialog. You also re-orient the project to True North and compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North.West or North . under Floor Plans. such as East . for Compressor. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. Re-orienting the Project In this lesson. model views. ■ 16 In the Video Compression dialog. you re-orient a building information model by creating an exact mirror of the project along an axis. Mirror the project 1 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry. and click OK.South. 17 On the View Control Bar. When you mirror a project. Click the Desktop icon. enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway. and click Save. for File Name. Mirroring the Project In this exercise. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. you use the Mirror Project feature to create a mirror of the project along an axis. 2 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. and annotations in non-drafting views.

select the roof.3 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Mirror Project.West. 4 In the Mirror Project dialog. For additional information. you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. see Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. 2 In the drawing area. View still solar studies 1 In the Project Browser. click (Undo) to restore the project to its original configuration. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that Project North is the top of the view. Then. right-click. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. NOTE Some elements may have to be checked manually for proper placement after the mirror process. 6 On the Standard toolbar. under 3D Views. 448 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click OK. The project is mirrored along the East . In this exercise. 5 In the warning dialog. click OK. you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy.West axis. select East .

click Apply. click . select Cast Shadows. click . 10 Under Date and Time. 5 For Sun Position. and click OK. you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.3 On the View Control Bar. click . click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. click the Still tab. select Summer Solstice. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. on the Still tab. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. For example. and click OK. 8 For Sun Position. 12 Under Date and Time. and select Winter Solstice. Orienting to True North | 449 . NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting. change the time back to 12:00 PM. 11 For Sun Position. and click OK. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. specify 11:00 AM for time. so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. to see the sun at its highest point on June 22.

19 In the Project Browser. In order to rotate True North so it is not coincident with Project North. the Project North and True North are coincident and pointing toward the top of the computer monitor (in most cases). click . IMPORTANT After you toggle the views. click at the intersection of the arrows that have been draw in the project representing True North and Project North. 14 On the View Control Bar. select True North. click the Still tab. 22 Re-orient the project: ■ To relocate the rotation center point. and click OK. 21 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North.13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click OK. double-click 01 Entry. When a project is started. the view settings must be set for True North. Notice that the drawing did not change when you changed the orientation from True North to Project North. and select Winter Solstice. and click OK. Plan views are defined to use Project North or True North for the representation. click OK. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 450 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 15 For Sun Position. make sure to click in the view and zoom slightly in and out. 18 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. right click 01 Entry. This process establishes the view setting to True North. and click Properties. Rotate project to True North True North and Project North can have different values for rotation. NOTE When rotating True North it is often helpful to draw lines representing the relationship between Project North and True North. for Orientation.

Orienting to True North | 451 . ■ To establish the new direction of True North. click above the end of the magenta line representing True North. click toward the top of the screen. as shown. The floor plan rotates in the view.■ To establish the True North direction.

32 On the View Control Bar. select True North Orientation. click . click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. 25 In the Project Browser. and click OK. select Summer Solstice. 31 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. 33 For Sun Position. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. 34 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. right-click 01 Entry.23 In the Project Browser. right-click. 28 In the Project Browser. right-click. 452 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click the Still tab. under 3D Views. Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. select Project North. and click Element Properties. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. for Orientation. and click OK. for Orientation. and click Rename. View the solar study with the Project North orientation 30 In the Project Browser. right-click 01 Entry. 26 Right-click Copy of 01 Entry. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. enter True North Orientation. Notice that the view now displays the plan in the correct orientation for True North. select True North. and click Properties. and click Apply.

and click OK. 36 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Click OK. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. for Compressor. click the Single-Day tab.35 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. verify that AVI Files is selected. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. click OK. click Summer Solstice. In the Length/Format dialog. For Files of Type. 39 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. Los Angeles. enter 600 in the first field. For File Name. and click OK. Click Save. for Dimensions. click the Desktop icon. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 38 In the Video Compression dialog. under Format. Export animated solar study 37 Export the animation: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. Orienting to True North | 453 .

For Sun. Under Lighting. for Scheme. select Medium. click 4 Specify rendering options: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. (Show Rendering Dialog). for Date and Time. under 3D Views. 1 In the Project Browser. In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. capturing it. Rendered views do not have this limitation. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Refer to Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391 for additional information on rendering. enter Winter Solstice 2pm Los Angeles. Since a rendered image is temporary. In the Name dialog. 3 On the View Control Bar. In this exercise. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. and exporting it as a JPEG image. 454 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . you also save the image to the project and export it as a JPEG file for future use.Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. and click OK. for Setting. select Interior: Sun only. The scene is rendered in full color at medium quality. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering. click Render. select Edit/New. ■ ■ 5 In the Rendering dialog. under Settings. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. under 3D Views. and click Duplicate. 2 In the Project Browser. On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. select 12/22. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. select Winter Solstice. and click OK. under Quality. and 2:00 PM.

9 Click File menu ➤ Save. verify that JPEG Files is selected. click Save to Project. In the left pane of the Save Image dialog. Rendering an Interior View | 455 . so use the Save to Project option to save the view in the project.6 In the Rendering dialog. 8 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. 7 In the Save To Project dialog. For Files of type. click Desktop. enter living area_winter solstice. NOTE Rendered views are temporary. and click Save. The rendered image is saved under the Renderings folder in the Project Browser. click Export. and click OK.

456 .

Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391. you explore the stylistic approach. In this series of exercises. and details. sections. an outside reviewer. help to explain the subjective complexity of the work. use the tutorials for the rendering features of Revit Architecture. and section boxes. and other quantifiable elements in construction documents. you learn several graphic techniques using various tools to create an analytique. length. you learn various methods of communicating your design intent by creating presentation views. elevations. however. a consultant. In this tutorial. you can choose between realism and stylistics. Co-house. Many tools in Revit Architecture 2009 describe number. or the client. The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. linework. Revit Architecture provides several options for expressing the architecture. When organizing presentation graphics. Other tools in the software. Using the pre-built building model. For the realistic approach. Whether the audience is the general contractor. They include rendering. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. type. transcending the building process to recognize the architecture of the project. advanced model graphics. 457 . You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales.Presentation Views 12 In this tutorial.

Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast. 458 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. To fit the floor plan into the analytique. you create a presentation floor plan. you create a copy of the plan.

TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique | 459 . you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. Cnst. Cnst. click in the drawing area. 2 In the Project Browser. Modify visibility/graphics 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. right-click 2nd Flr. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under Floor Plans. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click OK.Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise.rvt. and click Rename. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. click Training Files. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. 3 In the Rename View dialog. exit the menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

and clear Show annotation categories in this view. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. this represents the view getting smaller.5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and other annotations in this view. sections. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. dimensions. and click Save. UP Text. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. and clear DOWN Text. expand the Stairs category. navigate to the folder of your choice. Using Advanced Model Graphics on page 460. elevations. and Up Arrow. click the Annotation Categories tab. Down Arrow. Modify the view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. This turns off the visibility of all tags. click the Scale control and select 1:100. 460 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Notice the immediate change in the line weights. 7 Under Visibility. No annotations display in the view. 11 In the Save As directory.rvt. 8 Click OK.

10 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. ■ 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Boston. 12 Click OK. The sun and shadow settings can also be used when rendering a 3D view. The higher the number. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen. 13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 3 On the View Control Bar. select Cast Shadows. 1:00 PM. and click OK. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 461 . modify. NOTE Shadows can display in all view styles except Wireframe. 6 Under Settings. specify 10/27. 11 Select Ground Plane at Level. for Date and Time. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.rvt. specify 35. and select 1st Flr. Within a project. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and delete multiple locations to analyze a single prototype. Time and Place. click OK. specify the following: ■ Under Shadow. Cnst. For Sun Position. on the Still tab. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. NOTE For this step. If you select a different city.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. The shadow contrast dictates the darkness of the shadow display. ■ For Contrast. 9 For City. however. you can create. select By Date. the darker the shadows. you can select any city. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click . At that place. MA. click . Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 2 On the View Control Bar. double-click it in the Project Browser. 7 For Place. click the Place tab. select Sun and Shadow Settings. click (Shadows Off). you can specify one place where the project resides in the world.

under Settings. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet on page 462. Turn off the ground plane shadows 14 On the View Control Bar. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. for Sun Position. click OK. . and click Advanced Model Graphics. clear Ground Plane at Level. 15 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. click 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 462 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. click (Shadows On). 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. 19 Proceed with the next exercise. This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save.

select Arch Portrait. and click View. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. The viewport displays at the cursor. 6 On the Design Bar. and click to place it. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. and notice the view title. and click OK. right-click the Design Bar. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 463 . 7 Zoom in around the viewport. and click Add View to Sheet. 4 In the Views dialog. click Modify. click Sheet. The blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. click Add View.Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. TIP If the View tab is not available. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown.

10 In the Element Properties dialog. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. for Show Title. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. and click OK. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. To accomplish this. click OK. enter Presentation. For this analytique. 12 In the Name dialog. select No. click Edit/New.Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. click Duplicate. and click Activate View. The viewport no longer displays a view title. click . 464 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under Graphics. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. 9 On the Options Bar.

TIP Use care when sketching this chain. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. 17 In the Type Selector. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Edit/New.This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 465 . select Invisible lines. click . You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. fill properties. TIP If you have difficulty sketching with invisible lines. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. 20 On the Options Bar. 22 On the Design Bar. When you finish drawing the chain. click Filled Region. click Region Properties. and the boundary of the region. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. If necessary. 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. select the entire chain (use Tab) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. 18 On the Options Bar. click . and select Chain.

for Sheet Name. click OK. and click OK. click . and click View Properties. click Duplicate. 466 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .24 In the Type Properties dialog. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Graphics. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. select Solid fill. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. 25 In the Name dialog. 27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. under Identity Data. enter Solid Black. for Fill Pattern. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. and click OK. and click OK. 35 Proceed with the next lesson. 30 On the Design Bar. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. scroll down. and click Deactivate View. under Name. enter Presentation. and click OK. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique on page 466. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black.

m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. right-click South.rvt. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 467 . expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations.Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view.

5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. exit the menu. 14 For Sun Position. 18 For Time. 16 In the Name dialog. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. 12 Under Shadow. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 468 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . enter Presentation South Elevation. under Settings. right-click Copy of South. click in the drawing area. 9 Click OK. under Visibility. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click Duplicate. and click OK. and click OK. specify 35. 11 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. scroll up. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. under Visibility. click . specify 2:30 PM. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. expand the Doors category. Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. 3 In the Rename View dialog. click OK. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and clear Elevation Swing. click in the Walls row. under Pattern Overrides. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. select By Date. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. Time and Place. click Override. select Cast Shadows. under Elevations. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 13 For Contrast. on the Model Categories tab. click (Shadows Off). Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. By changing the angle of the sun. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.2 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. clear Visible.

double-click A105 . 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. and click Add View to Sheet. Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 469 . m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Add View. 3 In the Views dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet on page 469. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all).rvt.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation.Presentation.

5 In the Type Selector. The view title no longer displays. select Viewport : Presentation. 470 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .The viewport displays a view title.

you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique.6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. 7 On the Design Bar. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 471 . 9 Proceed with the next lesson. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. Adding Section Views to the Analytique on page 471.

Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. for Scale. click Section.rvt. Cnst. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click 1st Flr. select 1: 100. 472 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Adjust the controls to modify the extents. under Floor Plans. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique.Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. 4 Add the section shown below. and use the flip arrows if necessary. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser.

click Callout. 7 On the Options Bar. To fit correctly in the analytique. 8 Draw a callout around the building model in the section view. for Scale. you will create a callout around the building model in the section view. To accomplish this. and double-click Section 2. select 1 : 100.Section 2 is added to the building model. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 473 . 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. expand Sections (Callout 1). as shown. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so you can see it easily. this view needs to be rotated 180°.

In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. 11 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. double-click Presentation Section 2. expand the Doors category. 17 Under Visibility. click Modify. 15 Under Visibility. under Sections (Callout 1). 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. enter Presentation Section 2. 10 In the Project Browser. scroll up. under Sections (Callout 1). Modify visibility/graphic overrides 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. under Pattern Overrides. right-click Callout of Section 2. click Override. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ Casework Ceilings 474 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click in the Walls row. and click OK. and clear Elevation Swing. 12 In the Project Browser. click the Model Categories tab. and click Rename. clear Visible.

This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 475 . The inner boundary shows the crop region for model elements. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View on page 476. (Hide Crop Region). click The crop regions no longer display. 24 Proceed with the next exercise. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. The outer boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements.■ ■ ■ Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. When you select the crop region. Revit Architecture displays 2 boundaries. 22 On the View Control Bar. 20 Click OK. Hide the crop region 21 Select the crop region.

3 On the View Control Bar. click Duplicate. specify 35. specify the following: Under Shadow. click . you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. double-click Presentation Section 2. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). TIP You may need to move the dialog to see the view. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar. ■ For Sun Position. The shadows do not offer much contrast. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section.Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. in the Project Browser. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.rvt. For Contrast. and click Advanced Model Graphics. Click Apply. In addition. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. you create new sun and shadow settings to add contrast to the presentation view. In the steps that follow. under Sections (Callout 1). m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. select Cast Shadows. 476 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 6 In the Name dialog.

Click OK. Apply silhouette edges 9 On the View Control Bar. Silhouette Edges. TIP You can also use the Linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. was added to this training file for training purposes. specify 70°. NOTE The line style. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. click OK. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 477 . For Azimuth. click (Shadows On). You can modify this line style by clicking Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. specify 135°. The shadows now provide more contrast and a sense of depth. and click Advanced Model Graphics. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique on page 478. for Silhouette style. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Notice the application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Silhouette Edges. and click OK. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. Select Relative to View. select Directly. For Altitude.

Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 3 In the Views dialog. select Section: Presentation Section 2. 478 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .Presentation.rvt. Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. and click to place the selected view. and click Add View to Sheet.Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Add View. under Sheets (all). 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click A105 . 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180°.

Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 479 . 6 On the Design Bar. double-click Section 2. 9 On the Edit toolbar. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point.5 In the Type Selector. under Sections (Callout 1). click Modify. you click to specify the start radius. and press Enter. and enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. To rotate an object. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. select Viewport : Presentation. enter 180 to specify the degrees of rotation. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. Using a clock as a reference. The view title no longer displays. you accomplish this by rotating the callout in the section view. In the steps that follow. Rotate the callout 7 In the Project Browser. The section needs to be rotated 180°. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. click (Rotate).

The callout rotates 180°. under Sheets (all). 12 Drag the callout boundaries until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. double-click A105 . 480 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .Presentation. Its boundaries need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model. The Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180° and needs to be repositioned. Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser.

After applying the view template to a new section view. you create a view template for presentation views to reduce repetitive work when creating subsequent views. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. Working with a Presentation View Template on page 481. click Modify. and drag it up and to the left as shown.14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. Working with a Presentation View Template | 481 . 15 On the Design Bar.

6 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Rename View dialog. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. enter Presentation. 3 In the New View Template dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. you can simply apply the presentation view template. Rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. under Sections (Callout 1). under Sections (Type 1).rvt. 2 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. Apply the presentation view template 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. click OK. and click Rename. 482 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . enter Presentation Section 1. right-click Section 1. and click OK. right-click Copy of Section 1. Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the View Templates dialog. double-click Presentation Section 2. under Sections (Type 1). and click OK.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.

11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Activate View. and click Deactivate View. select Section: Presentation Section 1. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view.Presentation. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. and click Add View to Sheet. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. and elevation swings no longer display. for Rotation on Sheet. select Presentation. 15 Right-click the viewport. and click OK. 12 In the Views dialog. select 90° Counterclockwise. 18 Right-click the viewport. double-click A105 . click Add View. lighting fixtures. The furniture. 16 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. annotations. 14 In the Type Selector. under Names. under Sheets (all). under Graphics. select Viewport : Presentation. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. Working with a Presentation View Template | 483 .

In this exercise. 484 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . traditional analytiques contain a detail. Working in a Callout Analytique Typically. Working in a Callout Analytique on page 484. such as a tracery window or a column capital. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. 21 Proceed with the next exercise.

After you add the callout. Working in a Callout Analytique | 485 . Create a callout 1 In the Project Browser. select the callout. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Modify. 4 In the Project Browser. and modify its boundaries and the location of the callout head. as shown.rvt. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. right-click Callout of Section 1. and click Rename. double-click Section 1. under Sections (Type 1). 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Sections (Callout 1). click Callout.

enter Presentation Callout. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region.5 In the Rename View dialog. 486 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 6 In the Project Browser. clear Crop Region Visible. and click OK. and click View Properties. double-click Presentation Callout. clear Annotation Crop. and click OK. 7 Select the crop region. under Sections (Callout 1). 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 Right-click. under Extents. and adjust the bottom to create a small gap. as shown.

17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. double-click A105 . Working in a Callout Analytique | 487 . click Add View. specify 22. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For View Scale. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 In the Views dialog. select Section: Presentation Callout. under Sheets (all). click Modify.Presentation. and click Add View to Sheet. 14 In the Type Selector. For Scale Value 1. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. Click OK. and click Activate View. select Custom. Modify the presentation callout on the sheet 16 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 15 On the Design Bar.Add the callout to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. select Viewport : Presentation.

In the steps that follow. When finished. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. Although you can use several methods to create these areas of contrast. NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. under Sections (Callout 1). the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. Apply filled regions to the presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. double-click Presentation Callout. and click Deactivate View. click Edit/New. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. click Filled Region.19 Right-click the callout presentation view. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. and make adjustments as necessary. 488 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 23 On the Design Bar. and move it to the position shown below. activate the viewport. click Region Properties.

double-click A105 . under Sheets (all). 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as a stylized representation of the architectural forms.Presentation. click Filled Region.25 In the Type Properties dialog. for Fill Pattern. Working in a Callout Analytique | 489 . 28 In the Project Browser. and click Activate View. on the Design Bar. You do not have to replicate the image exactly. 26 In the Fill Patterns dialog. When you are finished. click . select Solid fill. click Finish Sketch. 27 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. and click OK 3 times. You can sketch one filled region at a time or all of them at once. Add a poche region 29 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport.

click . click Finish Sketch. and sketch the rectangle shown below. click (Show Crop Region). 32 On the Design Bar.31 On the Options Bar. The entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. 33 On the View Control Bar. 490 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and drag the left and bottom boundaries until the entire poche region displays. 34 Select the crop region.

38 Proceed with the next lesson. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 491 . and click Deactivate View.35 On the View Control Bar. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes on page 491. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. 36 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. click (Hide Crop Region). You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. 37 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and click 1 : 200. Create a southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Isometric. you create 3 similar isometric views with different cutaways. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. 492 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . You then add each view to the presentation sheet. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 3 On the View Control Bar. click (Shadows Off). and apply shadows to the views. click the Scale control. under 3D Views.rvt. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. 5 On the View Control Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.

and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 493 . right-click Copy of Isometric 1. Select Relative to View. under 3D Views. select Silhouette Edges. and click OK. click Duplicate. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. Cnst. 8 In the Name dialog. and click Rename. specify 45°. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. specify 35. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. and click Rename. Click OK.6 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. and click OK. Add a section box to Isometric 2 16 In the Project Browser. enter Isometric 1. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. select Section Box. in the list. enter Isometric 2. click . under 3D Views. right-click Isometric. For Contrast. Rename and duplicate isometric views 11 In the Project Browser. Select Ground Plane at Level. double-click Isometric 2. 7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. For Azimuth. for Silhouette style. A section box displays around the building model. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Shadow. and click OK. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. For Sun Position. select Directly. 14 In the Project Browser. specify 135°. Select 1st Flr. 13 In the Project Browser. select Cast Shadows. under Extents. 15 In the Rename View dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. right-click Isometric 1. For Altitude. 12 In the Rename View dialog.

494 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .19 Select the section box. These grips allow you to modify the boundaries of the section box. as shown. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the third floor. click Modify on the Design Bar. When you are finished. TIP Notice the rotation symbol. Grips display on each face of the section box. 20 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. You can use this to rotate the section box.

clear Section Boxes. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Next. enter Isometric 3. under 3D Views.Before turning off the visibility of the section box. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. 31 In the Project Browser. 29 To hide the section box. under 3D Views. 22 In the Project Browser. On the Annotation Categories tab. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. and click OK. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 495 . double-click Isometric 2. In the Type Selector.Presentation. under 3D Views. select Viewport : Presentation. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Sheets (all). under 3D Views. On the Annotation Categories tab. 28 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. clear Section Boxes. 21 In the Project Browser. 24 In the Project Browser. you stack the 3 isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. and click Rename. double-click Isometric 3. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click Modify on the Design Bar. double-click A105 . The section box no longer displays. 23 In the Rename View dialog. make a copy of the view. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. and click OK. right-click Isometric 2. and click OK. When you are finished. If desired. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 30 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. drag Isometric 3 under the left section view as shown. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 26 In the Project Browser. the stairs and railings may display. you can adjust the plane location. 27 Select the section box. 25 To hide the section box.

drag Isometric 2 under Isometric 3 as shown. In the Type Selector. select Viewport : Presentation. drag Isometric 1 under Isometric 2 as shown. select Viewport : Presentation.32 In the Project Browser. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. 496 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . In the Type Selector. 33 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. The filled region partially covers the view.

click Edit/New. click Region Properties. and click Activate View. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. 36 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 38 In the Type Properties dialog.Modify filled region boundaries 34 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 497 . 40 Click OK twice. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. This will make it easier to draw lines. The image below shows the redrawn lines. 41 On the Design Bar. You change the fill pattern back to solid fill when you are done. You may need to use the Split tool and the Trim tool to modify lines during this process. select Transparent. 42 Using the drawing tools. for Fill Patterns. 35 Select the poche filled region. 39 For Background. select Concrete. On the Options Bar. click Edit.

and click Deactivate View. 50 Proceed with the next exercise.43 On the Design Bar. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views on page 499. for Fill Pattern. 45 In the Type Properties dialog. 46 Click OK twice. click Finish Sketch. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. select Solid fill. 498 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. click Edit/New. click Region Properties. 47 On the Design Bar.

Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. under Floor Plans. then you specify the eye direction and range.rvt. Adding a camera is a 2-click process: first you specify the eye location. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. double-click 1st Flr. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 499 . Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. you add it to the presentation sheet. The view opens immediately. Cnst. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. a cutaway perspective view. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. click Camera. you create the final view for the analytique. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view.

and click Advanced Model Graphics. select Silhouette Edges. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. For Contrast. select Cast Shadows. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. specify the following: Under Shadow. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. specify 35. and click OK. For Sun Position. and click OK. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 6 On the View Control Bar. click .4 Adjust the crop region so the entire building model fits in it. 500 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . for Silhouette style. for Name. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off).

11 In the Element Properties dialog.Add a section box 10 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. You may need to adjust the location of the crop region as well. under Extents. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 501 . select Section Box. 12 Select the section box. 13 Use the section grips to modify the location of each plane until your view resembles the following image. Grips display on each plane of the section box. A section box now cuts through the building model. and click OK.

and click OK. for Width. double-click A105 . under Sheets (all). 19 To hide the section box. under 3D Views. clear Section Boxes. Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 In the Project Browser. and click OK.14 Select the crop region. Because scale does not apply to perspective views.Presentation. 502 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under Change. select Scale (locked proportions). click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. On the Annotation Categories tab. 17 Under Model Crop Size. 21 In the Project Browser. In the Type Selector. click (Hide Crop Region). enter 165 mm. you must specify the actual size of the image. select Viewport : Presentation. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. 18 On the View Control Bar. click Size. 15 On the Options Bar.

enter Description. click Edit/New. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. Create new text types 1 If the Sheets: A105 . select Text : Title. click OK. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. Add a title and description 13 In the Type Selector. click Text. and click OK. Annotating the Analytique | 503 . select a font. under Text. under Text. click Duplicate. 6 In the Name dialog. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and click OK. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.Presentation sheet is not the active view. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click it in the Project Browser. and click OK. 3 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. Annotating the Analytique on page 503. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 14 Add a title to the analytique as shown.rvt. 10 In the Name dialog.22 Click File menu ➤ Save. click . click Edit/New. click Duplicate. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Title. select the same font as the title. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. specify a text size of 6 mm. specify a text size of 40 mm. and click OK.

18 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 504 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. select Text : Description. 19 Click File menu ➤ Save. 17 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. 16 In the Type Selector.15 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text.

Importing and Exporting 505 .

506 .

Once the model has been imported. After you import the SketchUp model. you create a small building from the front mass form. such as walls. In this tutorial. curtain walls. that compose the building. and roofs. You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements. you can easily add detail with Revit components. you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an in-place mass family.Importing SketchUp Files 13 The ability to import SketchUp® files directly into Revit Architecture allows you to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. 507 .

click Browse. enter Import SketchUp. for File name. This option allows you to select what to import: all elements. and click Save. The in-place mass family is saved only in context of the project. click OK. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. Create a Revit project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. click OK. and import a SketchUp model into the project as an in-place mass family. right-click in the Design Bar. or select from a list. click Training Files. 9 In the informational dialog. under Template file. Click the Sketchup file. select SketchUp Files. you create a Revit Architecture project. TIP If the Massing tab does not display in the Design Bar. and not in the library. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. buildings. 11 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats.skp. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and click Massing on the context menu that displays. Import a SketchUp model 7 On the Design Bar.rte. click Create Mass. ■ 508 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . For Layers. 10 In the Name dialog. enter SketchUp Model. 4 In the New Project dialog. For Import units. 12 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Training Files icon. select Auto-Detect. For Files of type.Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass In this exercise. 2 In the New Project dialog. select All. click the Massing tab. and click OK. select Preserve. 6 In the Save As dialog. For Colors. visible elements. Double-click the Common folder. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As.

click the Close button. ■ ■ For Positioning. select Manual . For Place at level. 17 In the warning dialog. Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass | 509 . 13 Click to place the lower right building inside of the elevation markers.Center. select Level 1. In a new project. The mesh geometry (faces) will be used in another exercise to create Revit elements. Click Open. such as walls. Level 1 is the only choice. depending on the complexity of the project. 15 Enter ZR to zoom in on the lower right building. An existing project may have options for many levels to choose from. curtain walls. ■ The model displays in the view on the Level 1 floor plan. 16 On the Design Bar. and roofs. click .You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information. click Finish Mass. 14 On the View toolbar. NOTE A warning message displays because the mass contains only mesh geometry.

4 On the Options Bar. you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design. select the face so that it highlights in red. Creating a Building from Mass Faces In this exercise. you use the faces of the front mass form to create Revit Architecture elements. curtain walls. and on the View Control Bar. click Roof by Face.18 Proceed to the next exercise. Create roofs from mass faces 1 Zoom in to the front mass form. that compose the building. such as walls. verify Level 2 is selected.400mm displays. 5 Move your cursor over the top face of the left mass. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. and when the cursor displays a plus sign. 3 In the Type Selector. You turn their visibility off to view only the building. verify Basic Roof: Generic . and roofs. Creating a Building from Mass Faces on page 510. for Level. The mass faces are not converted to Revit elements: they remain in the project. After you create the building from the mass faces. 510 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files .

9 On the Options Bar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 511 . click to display masses. on the Options Bar. 8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right. A roof is created from the mass face. 6 On the Options Bar. indicating that you are adding or subtracting faces to and from the selection. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. (It is difficult to see the roof in the current view. click Create Roof. click Create Roof. verify that Select Multiple is selected. on the View toolbar. Click again 7 With the Roof by Face command still active. This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof.) to turn off mass visibility in the view. To see the new roof.The cursor displays a plus or a minus sign. 10 Adjust the view: ■ On the View toolbar.

512 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 11 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. click Roof by Face. 12 On the Design Bar. click Create Roof.■ Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. 13 Select the top 4 faces of the mass. 14 On the Options Bar.

click Wall by Face.15 On the Design Bar. and display only the 17 Click again to redisplay the masses. 22 In the Type Selector. verify Basic Wall: Generic .200mm displays. This option lets you create the walls on the inside of the mass. 16 On the View toolbar. 20 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. select Core Face: Exterior. to turn off the mass visibility in the view. 23 On the Options Bar. Create walls from mass faces 18 On the View toolbar. click Modify to end the command. click roofs that you created. 21 On the Design Bar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 513 . click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 19 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. for Loc Line.

24 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below. Create curtain systems from mass faces 27 On the Design Bar. 514 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . verify Curtain System: 1500 x 3000mm displays. click Curtain System by Face. 26 Click to redisplay the masses. 28 In the Type Selector. 25 On the View toolbar. 29 Select the left face of the left mass. click to view only the walls and roofs.

33 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the back of the mass forms. click Create System. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 32 On the View toolbar. 31 Using the same technique.30 On the Options Bar. Create walls from mass faces 34 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. create the 2 curtain systems shown below. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 515 .

click Wall by Face. 38 Select the mass face shown below. Create a roof from a mass face 37 On the Design Bar. 40 Select the 4 mass faces shown below. press TAB until the desired wall highlights. click Curtain System.35 On the Design Bar. select the other wall. and on the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. click Create Roof. click Roof by Face. Create additional curtain systems from mass faces 39 On the Design Bar. 36 Select the 5 walls highlighted below. 516 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . and select it. click Create System. TIP If you have difficulty selecting a wall that shares an edge with another wall.

46 Place the camera and its target: ■ ■ On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. specify a point to place the camera. Below the right corner of the view. click Camera. 43 Click to redisplay the masses. click to view the building that you have created. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 517 . 42 On the View toolbar. double-click Level 1. and select the mass face shown below. Create a 3D perspective view of the building with a camera 44 In the Project Browser. click Wall by Face. 45 Zoom out beyond the drawing extents.Create the final wall 41 On the Design Bar.

■ In the far left corner of the building that you created. The perspective view created by the camera displays. and click in the drawing area to hide the grips. roofs. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. 48 On the View toolbar. and curtain systems that make up You may need to resize the view again. 47 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building. specify a point for the camera target. 518 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . as shown. to view only the walls. Click the frame to display its grips. click your building in the view.

Modify the roofs 53 On the Views toolbar. Under Grid 1 Pattern. click . Under Grid 2 Pattern. and select the left curtain system in the view.Change the justification of the curtain systems 49 On the Design Bar. 50 On the Options Bar. click 51 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . click Modify. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 519 . select Center. for Justification. for Justification. select Center. 52 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view. Click OK.

59 On the View toolbar. verify M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm displays. 60 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the building. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 62 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 56 In the Project Browser. Add doors to the building 58 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 63 In the Type Selector. 57 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. double-click {3D}. 55 Right-click. and move the roof edges as shown below. and click Cancel to end the command.54 Select each roof to display its grips. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. under 3D Views. click Door. 520 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . double-click 3D View 1. 61 Close the Full Navigation Wheel.

65 Save and close the drawing. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 521 .64 Add doors to the building as shown below.

522 .

Using Advanced Features 523 .

524 .

Flat Curtain System In this lesson. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. you need to change the length of the wall. you create a curtain system using the wall command. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. This affects the entire curtain system. grid lines. to resize the system. or you can use a specific curtain system command. 525 . you select the grid. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. For example. Like windows. and you can change these elements individually. To switch panel types. Unlike windows. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Like walls. you need to select a panel. and mullions. To change grids. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior.rvt. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. click Training Files. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. panel. and they are not windows. and open Metric\m_Curtain_Walls.Curtain Systems 14 Curtain systems are not walls.

1 In the Project Browser. 6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. 526 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . click Wall. and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown. and double-click Ground Floor. 5 Start the curtain system where shown. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. 4 In the Type Selector. 2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1.

9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. 10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added. Creating an Entrance | 527 . 8 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views.7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall. and double-click Southeast Isometric.

Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels. The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. enter 1200. Click OK. select Up to level: TOP OF ROOF. 13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel. For Top Offset. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Constraints ➤ Top Constraint.11 Select the curtain system. top constraint. top and base attachments. 528 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . using curtain grids. and room bounding. You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. and click (Properties).

21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Creating an Entrance | 529 . under Floor Plans. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. 18 In the Project Browser. right-click Elevation 1 . 25 On the Design Bar. click Elevation. 20 In the drawing area. 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar. double-click GROUND FLOOR. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. click Modify. and resize the crop boundary as shown. and click OK. and click Rename. and click to place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line.Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. 23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. 15 On the View tab of the Design Bar.a. click Curtain Grid. 22 Move the cursor along the edge of the wall. 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line.

28 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. 27 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. SIXTH FLOOR. and SEVENTH FLOOR. Click to create a vertical grid. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. and click OK. THIRD FLOOR. while pressing CTRL. click Modify. Click to place another grid line. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. one larger than the other. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. 29 In the Select Levels dialog. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. FIFTH FLOOR. 530 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. click Curtain Grid. 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. FOURTH FLOOR. 33 On the Design Bar. select the 3 grid lines you just placed.26 While pressing CTRL. select SECOND FLOOR.

35 Select the left vertical grid line. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. Creating an Entrance | 531 . click Add or Remove Segments. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. you add a doorway to the curtain system. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. and then select the segment above it. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. Instead of using the Door command. The two segments are removed.Next. and on the Options Bar. 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. The segment line style changes to dashed.

remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step. select One Segment. 39 On the Design Bar. 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. and lock them. 42 Place dimensions as shown.38 Using the same method. click Curtain Grid. 532 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 40 On the Options Bar.

You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids.TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. 43 Delete the dimensions. Use the following image as a guide. Creating an Entrance | 533 . 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. click in any white space to exit the editor. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). Do not click between the 1800 mm panels. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays.

52 On the Type Selector. They are part of the curtain panel category. The panel changes to a double door. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. Now. 55 In the Project Browser. on the new curtain system you added. not as curtain panels. double-click Entrance Elevation. under Floor Plans. double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 57 On the View Control Bar. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. and open Metric\Families\Doors\M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. 49 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. click Training Files. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. and click Wireframe. 56 In the Project Browser. This changes the graphics style of the Next.Next. click Modify. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. 59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door.rfa. 534 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . click view. 54 On the Design Bar. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. These panels schedule as doors. under Elevations. .

61 With the panel still selected.60 On the Type Selector. 63 Click OK twice. and Material specifies the shading and patterning. Creating an Entrance | 535 . 62 In the Element Properties dialog. and the solid panels display in white. The glazed panels display in blue. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. click System Panel : Solid. 65 On the View Control Bar. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. click . 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. 66 Change the graphics style back to Wireframe. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

rvt. 2 On the Options Bar.68 On the File menu. Name the file m_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. select Grid Line Segment. select Entire Grid Line. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. 536 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. you place mullions on curtain panel grids. click Save As. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Mullion. 4 On the Options Bar.

7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in to the set of doors. Changing mullion joins 11 On the View Control Bar.6 On the Options Bar. Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. You are going to change some mullion joins. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. however. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System | 537 . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. so you remove them next. 10 Delete the mullions below them. there are a few that you do not want. because their width reduces the size of the doors. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. 12 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors. select All Empty Segments. clickModify.

The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. 13 Click the lower mullion join control. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. you can also right-click.Two mullion join controls display. 14 Click the top mullion control. 15 On the Design Bar. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. and click Join Conditions ➤ Break at Join to break the mullion at both joins. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. click Modify. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. Finally. 538 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 16 In the Project Browser. double-click Southeast Isometric. 17 Save the file.

The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. 7 On the Options Bar. Click OK. 9 Place the second point at the lower right side. For Top Offset. 6 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. (Arc passing through three points). click Wall. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. Curved Curtain System | 539 . enter 1200. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 2 Zoom in to the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. under Floor Plans. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR. for Top Constraint. Finally. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Type Selector. 1 In the Project Browser. click 8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. 5 Click ■ ■ ■ .Curved Curtain System In this lesson. you add a curtain system using the wall command.

Next. click Curtain Grid. The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. Divide the halves into quarters. eighths. 12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click.10 Finish the wall by clicking at the top of the arc. 540 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. you place grids on the system. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. double-click East. You are going to use one of these snaps points. under Elevations. 14 In the Project Browser. and then sixteenths. 13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

select Basic Wall: Generic . select the bottom layer of panels. Remember to click other elements from the selection except Curtain Panels. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system. you change some panels in the system. 18 In the Type Selector. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 541 . and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. 16 On the Design Bar.15 Zoom in to the cylinder. Next.300mm. Using walls as panels 17 Using a selection box. click Modify. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise. to filter out all 19 Save the file.

5 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click Training Files. 7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference line intersection.rft. clear Chain. under Elevations.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 8 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. click Model Lines. . 3 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 542 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . and click OK. 11 On the Design Bar. click . for Depth. click Lines. 6 On the Options Bar. for Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. 9 Select the extrusion. enter 100. and click 13 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. select Glass. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Curtain Wall Panel. 4 On the Design Bar. double-click Exterior. and click . 12 On the Options Bar.

Pattern.Pattern. All the panels change to the custom panel you created. and click Change Walls Orientation. 17 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. All fourth floor panels are selected.14 On the Design Bar. 24 On the View toolbar. and return to the project file.rfa.rfa family. right-click. and save the family as Curtain Panel . double-click FOURTH FLOOR. click Modify. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. 21 In the Type Selector. 26 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 23 Right-click. (SteeringWheels). 19 In the Project Browser. select Curtain Panel . and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. click (Default 3D View). under Floor Plans. 22 Select the curved arc curtain wall. 20 Press TAB until a panel in the arc is highlighted.Pattern. 18 Load the Curtain Panel . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 543 . click 25 On the View toolbar.

28 Highlight a panel in the arc. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise. 30 Save the file.The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel. 29 In the Type Selector. 544 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . under Floor Plans. 27 In the Project Browser. All fifth floor panels are selected. All the panels change to the solid panel. The finished arc wall should look like the following image. you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. double-click FIFTH FLOOR. right-click.Solid. select System Panel .

rft. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. 8 On the Design Bar. . 10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. and click OK. click ■ ■ For Sides. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. double-click East. enter 8. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. click Lines. Select Radius. 9 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Polygon). For vertical mullions. Click again to specify the ending point. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. under Elevations. except at the GROUND FLOOR level. click Mullion. for Profile Usage. 7 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. select Mullion. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile. and select it. and enter 50 mm for the radius. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 545 . If Polygon does not display on the Options Bar. 5 In the left pane of the New dialog.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion. click Training Files.

click Detail Component. 13 On the Options Bar. double-click Southeast Isometric. 26 Load the Cylinder Mullion. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 12 Select the lines in the octagon. 21 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 29 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system.rfa family. clear Fine. click Modify. 28 On the View toolbar. 15 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click Visibility. 31 Click . and click OK.rfa. 20 Select the detail component. 18 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown. and open Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Cylinder Mullion .rfa. 23 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion. 27 In the Project Browser. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. click Modify. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. 19 On the Design Bar. under 3D Views. 546 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . and return to the project file. click Training Files.detail. click Mullion. 25 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. After the new profile is loaded. and click OK. click (SteeringWheels). it can be added as a mullion type. clear Coarse and Medium.11 On the Design Bar. and click Visibility. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 17 On the Design Bar.

double-click GROUND FLOOR. under Floor Plans. right-click. 33 Click Edit/New. You have placed more mullions than you want. 38 On the Options Bar. select Circular Mullion for Family. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 547 . and click OK. 37 Click OK twice. 39 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder.32 In the Element Properties dialog. for Profile. 43 Press DELETE. 42 Highlight a mullion in the arc. select Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion. 35 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. select All Empty Segments. 36 Under Construction. 34 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. so you remove the unwanted ones. 44 Save the file. 41 In the Project Browser. click Modify. and click Select Mullions ➤ On Gridline. 40 On the Design Bar.

make custom curtain panels and mullions. you learned to create a curved curtain system. and press TAB. and a ruled curtain system. 5 On the Options Bar. and you can click to select them all. double-click TOP OF ROOF. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. 2 Zoom in to the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. select Defines slope. 1 In the Project Browser. TIP To chain select all the walls. 4 On the Design Bar. 548 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. and then apply those custom elements to the system. a storefront system. Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. click Pick Walls. All the inside faces highlight.This completes the exercise for adding mullions. In this lesson. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.

enter 600. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. select System Family: Sloped Glazing. 14 On the Options Bar. 8 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Family. click Roof Properties. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 16 On the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. double-click Southeast Isometric. 9 On the Design Bar. click Modify. under 3D Views.7 On the Design Bar. 12 Zoom in to the skylight. 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 10 In the Project Browser. 17 On the View Control Bar. Sloped Glazings | 549 . Click OK. 11 On the View Control Bar. 15 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. click Mullion. For Constraints ➤ Base Offset From Level. select Entire Grid Line. 18 Save the file.

You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. and enter 2400. 5 On the Options Bar. you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. select Unconnected for Height. 1 In the Project Browser.Storefront System In this exercise. under Floor Plans. 550 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 4 In the Type Selector. 2 Zoom in to the wall at the right of the model. click Wall. 6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline. double-click GROUND FLOOR.

and the Spacing (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to 1524 mm. For this wall. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. 10 In the Project Browser. and press ENTER. The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout. The curtain wall cuts the original wall. The type parameters under the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern headings create the predefined layout. even if the wall height changes. click Modify. click OK to close the Type Properties dialog and return to the Element Properties dialog that displays the instance parameters. 9 On the Design Bar. The Layout (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to Fixed Distance. the Layout (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to Maximum Spacing. under 3D Views. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. and click . This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. which is specified in the type. enter 10200 mm. This specifies an exact length for the wall. This means that the panel heights will be exactly 2400 mm. 12 Select the storefront wall. To see how the grid layout is defined. 8 Click the temporary dimension. 11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall.7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. double-click Southeast Isometric. 14 After you have looked at the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern parameters. Storefront System | 551 . and the Spacing (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to 2400 mm. click Edit/New.

you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. 18 On the Options Bar. Angle. under 3D Views. enter 45 and for Horizontal Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. 20 Save the file. 16 Click OK. Justification. and Offset. enter 15. or end. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. For more information about these curtain wall parameters. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you find Number. By setting the Angle value. 552 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . for Vertical Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. see the Revit Architecture help. center. In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. 19 Select a curtain grid. the Number is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning.The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. double-click Southeast Isometric. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. You see these same parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern. Under the Vertical Grid Pattern heading. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Mullion. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. The Horizontal Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. select All Empty Segments. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system.

Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 6 Click the highlighted line. making sure Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted.3 On the View Control Bar. 5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab. click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. and highlight the model line. 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level. Curtain System by Lines | 553 . Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line.

you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 10 Select the panel. A panel between the 2 lines is created. click Curtain Grid. but now that you have created a ruled curtain system. click Modify. 9 On the Design Bar. 554 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . and click . Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. Next. NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids.8 Select the highlighted line. 11 Click OK.

17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid. embed a curtain system inside another wall. and then eighths. and define a ruled curtain system. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system. quarters. 18 Save the file. right-click. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves.13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps. Curtain System by Lines | 555 . 16 In the Type Selector. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. select System Panel : Solid. quarters. and then eighths. 15 Highlight a top level glazed panel. Finally. 14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Grid 2.

556 .

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. gable. You do not need to create the work plane. you learn to create several different types of roofs. In this lesson. 557 . you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture 2009. In addition. mansard. gutters.rvt. Creating Roofs Creating an Extruded Roof You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. and open Metric\m_Roofs. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. In this exercise. In this tutorial. shed. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. and low sloped roofs. you learn how to add fascia. and soffits to the roofs that you create. click Training Files. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. Before you can sketch the roof profile. including hip. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion.Roofs 15 In this lesson.

7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. expand Views (all). 5 In the Go To View dialog. and so on). click the blue square on the witness line. centerline. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. 558 | Chapter 15 Roofs . This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. and click OK. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. 4 Click OK.1 In the Project Browser. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. and double-click Level 1. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. expand Floor Plans. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. select Name. TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions.

Creating an Extruded Roof | 559 . 11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2.9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls.

Next. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. select Chain. 16 On the View toolbar. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 560 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. 13 On the Options Bar. The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. click Lines. sketch the roof profile.

press CTRL. 17 On the Tools toolbar. The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. and select the second wall. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. The roof should resemble the following illustration. click Modify. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. Next. 21 In the Project Browser. 18 Select the edge of the roof. Creating an Extruded Roof | 561 . click (Join/Unjoin Roof).Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. press TAB. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). and then select the exterior face of the wall. expand Sections (Type 1). and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. 19 On the Tools toolbar. and double-click Section 1. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. expand Views (all).

(Default 3D View) to view the completed breezeway roof in the 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. click Attach for Top/Base. click model. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. 562 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 26 On the View toolbar. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 562. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof.24 On the Options Bar. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint.

click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. m_Roofs. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall.rvt.You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. expand Floor Plans. 2 Select Garage Roof to move the roof to the correct level. 5 On the Options Bar. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 563 . expand Views (all). To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. and double-click Garage Roof. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click Yes. sketch the roof footprint. Next. 6 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. 3 In the Project Browser. verify that Defines slope is selected. click Pick Walls. and enter 600 for Overhang.

click (Properties). and on the Options Bar. the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on page 565. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. click Finish Roof. and click OK. click the model. 13 On the Design Bar.7 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. 9 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. 564 | Chapter 15 Roofs . The Element Properties dialog is displayed. 8 On the Options Bar. 10 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. select both slope definition lines. click Modify. 14 When you see the informational dialog. 15 On the View toolbar. under Dimensions. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. By default. 11 Press CTRL. (Default 3D View) to view the gable roof and attached walls in 16 Proceed to the next exercise. clear Defines slope.

click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 3 On the Options Bar.Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. m_Roofs. and enter 600 for Overhang. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. clear Defines slope. expand Floor Plans. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint.rvt. and double-click Level 3. click Pick Walls. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. expand Views (all). 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 565 . 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. and then verify that a dashed blue line displays to the exterior side of the walls. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. press TAB. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. When you complete the roof. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

10 On the View menu. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. select Defines Slope. sketch the chimney opening. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. Next. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. 15 On the Options bar. 13 On the Options Bar. Next. add new slope lines to the roof. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line.6 Click to select all the walls. click Lines. select Defines Slope. 566 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Modify. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 17 When you see the informational dialog. click (Rectangle). 9 Using automatic snaps.

click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 567 . 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Options Bar. click Pick Walls. and enter 600 for Overhang. click (Default 3D View) to view the new roof in the model. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. and double-click Level 2. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint.18 On the View toolbar. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 567. expand Floor Plans. m_Roofs. expand Views (all). select Defines slope.

select the left vertical slope definition line. click (Trim/Extend). using the following illustration for guidance. 8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. close the roof sketch. Next. 9 On the Tools toolbar. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. 11 To trim the first line segment. clear Defines Slope. click Lines.5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. 568 | Chapter 15 Roofs . The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. 10 On the Options Bar. and click (Pick Lines). verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. Verify that a dashed blue line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. 7 On the Options Bar. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch.

12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. and click OK. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. raise the roof 600 mm above the current level. Next. click Finish Roof. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof.) Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. click Modify. (Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. 17 On the View toolbar. 18 On the Design Bar. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. 16 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 14 Under Constraints. and use the Orbit tool to view the back of the house. click (SteeringWheels). click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. click Roof Properties. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 569 .

22 Using the same method that you used previously. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. 23 On the Tools toolbar. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 571. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. 570 | Chapter 15 Roofs . The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. and use the Orbit tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. Next. join the two remaining walls to the roof.21 Click (SteeringWheels).

m_Roofs. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. expand Floor Plans. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch.rvt. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. 4 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. clear Defines Slope. click Pick Walls. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 571 .Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. expand Views (all). 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 10 To trim the first line segment. 8 On the Tools toolbar. click (Trim/Extend). 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Next. enter 0 for Overhang. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. press TAB. Verify that a blue dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. select the left vertical roof line. 6 On the Options Bar. and enter 300 for Overhang. and double-click Level 2. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier.

11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. and click OK. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 16 Under Constraints. you add a slope-defining line. click Roof Properties.rvt. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. (SteeringWheels). 572 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. Next. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click 3D. select Defines slope. you add slope arrows to the shed roof. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. and press ENTER. click Modify. 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. 13 On the Options Bar. click 20 On the View toolbar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. expand 3D Views. and use the Orbit tool to rotate the model. m_Roofs. 19 On the View toolbar. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof.

8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. 9 On the Tools menu. To help locate the position of each split. click Modify. 3 On the Options Bar. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. 7 On the Options Bar. Next. 4 In the Project Browser. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 573 . click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. expand Floor Plans. you need to add two reference planes. 11 On the Design Bar. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. 12 On the Options Bar. and double-click Level 2. Before you can add slope arrows. click Split Walls and Lines. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. add two new slope arrows. and enter 600 for Offset. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line.2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. click Slope Arrow. 5 On the View menu. expand Views (all). verify ■ (Draw) is selected. 14 On the Options Bar. click Ref Plane. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. click (Pick Lines). 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. clear Defines Slope. Next.

use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. select both slope arrows. the adjacent eave heights must align. select Slope for Specify. click Modify. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. and move the cursor to place the arrow. Aligning Roof Eaves on page 574. expand Floor Plans. 18 Press CTRL. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head.rvt. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 20 Under Dimensions. 1 In the Project Browser.■ Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. 574 | Chapter 15 Roofs . The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. (Properties). When you sketch a hip roof. and then click OK. When eave heights differ. 16 Repeat steps 13 . 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. enter 500 for Rise/1000. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. 22 Click (Default 3D View) on the View toolbar to display the model. and click 19 Under Constraints. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. expand Views (all). Begin the tail at the right reference plane. click Edit. and double-click Garage Roof. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise.15 to add the second slope arrow. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. m_Roofs. 3 On the Options Bar.

14 If you want to save your changes.4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 On the Design Bar. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. under Dimensions. Creating a Mansard Roof on page 576. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. click Save As. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. on the Options Bar. click Finish Roof. select a method to align the eaves. click Align Eaves. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. Next. select Defines Slope. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. 5 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 10 On the Options Bar. enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. (Properties). When aligning eaves. The eave lines display with a dimension. on the File menu. 13 On the View toolbar. Aligning Roof Eaves | 575 . This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

and double-click North. under Constraints. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). 3 Select the roof and.rvt. expand Elevations. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. 576 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and open Metric\m_Mansard_Roof. on the Options Bar. (Properties). you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. click Modify. click 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3.Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3.

15 In the Element Properties dialog.6 On the View toolbar. click (Pick Lines). 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. 14 On the Options Bar. expand Views (all). 10 On the Options Bar. under Dimensions. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. click Lines. press TAB. click Modify. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and select the remaining three lines. and double-click Level 3. Next. expand Floor Plans. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. and click OK. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. Creating a Mansard Roof | 577 . click Finish Roof. enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 7 In the Project Browser. and then select Defines slope. click .

NOTE This exercise uses a common training file and Imperial units.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. (Default 3D View) to display the model with the complete 18 If you want to save your changes. After you add the roof. click Training Files. on the File menu. Creating a Low Slope Roof on page 578. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 578 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 20 Proceed to the next exercise. and open Common\c_Low_Slope_Roof. click mansard roof.17 On the View toolbar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you modify the slab to represent roof drains in the low slope roof. click Save As. You also modify the structure of the roof slab to more accurately represent the tapered insulation condition used to create the roof drainage system. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. you add a roof to a building shell. Creating a Low Slope Roof In this exercise.

under Floor Plans. 6 Select the interior face of a wall segment on each side of the building and 1 on either side of the arc wall at the entry. 3 On the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the drawing area. verify that Defines slope is not selected. click Pick Walls.Create a flat roof by footprint 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 579 . and that Overhang is 0' 0''. 4 On the Options Bar. select the interior face of the curved wall on the right. double-click Roof.

as shown: 9 On the Design Bar. and click OK. Instead you select walls on each side of the building and then use the Trim tool to create a closed loop sketch. select Steel Truss .Insulation on Metal Deck . 8 Select the walls to create a closed loop. for Type. click Roof Properties. 11 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 On the Tools toolbar. you cannot use TAB to select the chain of walls.Because the walls are not continuous. click Finish Roof. click (Trim/Extend).EPDM. 580 | Chapter 15 Roofs .

Open a section view 12 In the drawing area. and click to select it. Add split lines to segment the roof 14 In the Project Browser. click (Draw Split Lines). under Floor Plans. you alter the shape of the slab to represent a roof drainage layout. double-click the section head to open the section view. 15 Use the TAB key to highlight the roof. 13 Zoom in to the upper left area of the roof. but it is a flat object with no slope or indication of roof drainage. 16 On the Options Bar. The roof has been created. double-click Roof. In the next steps. You use this tool to split the roof slab into 6 regions so that you can modify the slope independently. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 581 .

19 Select the lower endpoint of the arc line. add a second horizontal split line beginning at the top endpoint of the arc. 582 | Chapter 15 Roofs .17 Select the midpoint of the top horizontal roof line. 18 Move the cursor down. 20 Using the same method. and select a point on the opposite roof line. move the cursor horizontally to the left. and select the midpoint of the bottom horizontal roof line You create a split line vertically down the center.

click (Modify Sub-Elements). click 22 Click to add a point close to the center of each section. You could also select multiple points and change them all at once from the Options Bar. on the Options Bar. exact placement of the points is not important. Next. (Add points).The roof is now divided into 6 sections. 23 On the Options Bar. In this exercise. You modify the points individually. Layout tools in Revit Architecture such as reference planes and dimensions can be used to more accurately place editing points on a roof slab. you begin to shape the slab by adding points for the roof drains and modifying the elevations of the points and edges. Add elevation points 21 With the roof still selected. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 583 .

Edit the roof edges 26 On the Options Bar. 25 Using the same method. The dimensional value is relative to the roof plane. click (Modify Sub-Elements). specify a -2'' dimension for the remaining 5 points. and press ENTER. enter -2''. for the dimension.24 Select the point in the upper left region of the roof. The lines on the roof now represent the ridges of the deformed slab shape. 584 | Chapter 15 Roofs .

including the interior edges of the roof regions. 31 Select the roof slab. for Elevation. 29 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. Modify the construction of the slab type 30 In the drawing area.27 Press and hold CTRL. Clicking Modify or pressing ESC exits the editing mode and the shape edits are applied to the slab. enter 4''. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 585 . as shown: 28 On the Options Bar. click (Properties). double-click the section head to view the additional affects of the shape editing. and on the Options Bar. and select all of the roof edges. click Modify.

on the File menu. the slope will be accommodated in the insulation layer. By making the insulation layer variable.The slab has not responded exactly as intended. leaving the other layers to maintain the original plane of placement for the roof. 39 Proceed to the next lesson. You edit the construction of the slab type to achieve this result. 37 If you want to save your changes. Creating Fascia. gutters. In some cases this type of slope is desired. for the Thermal/Air Layer. click Edit. Gutters. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog. under Construction. but in this case you want the insulation layer to create the slope. gutters. you can easily create its fascia. select Variable. and soffits. you learn how to create roof fascia. 38 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Edit/New. 35 Click OK 3 times. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. and Soffits on page 586. and soffits in Revit Architecture. Creating Fascia. The insulation now tapers from the edges to the drain in the center. 36 View the results in the section view. Gutters. for Structure. click Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. The entire slab is sloped. 586 | Chapter 15 Roofs . After you create a roof. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. and Soffits In this lesson.

and click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Open.rfa and M_Gutter-Cove. Creating Roof Fascia | 587 . under Construction. click Training Files. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. select M_Fascia-Built-Up. and open Common\c_Condominium. 3 Press CTRL. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. click Duplicate.Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 8 In the Name dialog. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. click (Properties). 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Built-up Fascia. and click OK twice. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia.rfa. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and open Metric\Families\Profiles\Roofs. 5 On the Options Bar. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile.

588 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 14 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 On the Options Bar.11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. 13 On the Design Bar. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. click Modify to exit the Fascia command. Creating Gutters on page 588. click (Properties). Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. Creating Gutters In this exercise. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. c_Condominium.

and click OK. under Construction.3 In the Properties dialog. Creating Soffits on page 590. click in the Value field for Material. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. click Edit/New. Creating Gutters | 589 . 4 In the Type Properties dialog. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. . 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 10 Click to place the gutter. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. and click OK three times. and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. 11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. click Duplicate. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile.

and double-click Roof.Creating Soffits In this exercise. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 590 | Chapter 15 Roofs . expand Views. 3 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you learn how to place a roof soffit. expand Floor Plans. 1 In the Project Browser. click Pick Roofs. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. c_Condominium.

expand Views (all). click Join Geometry. Creating Soffits | 591 . 5 On the Design Bar. and double-click 3D. 8 Select the roof. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. 7 On the Tools menu. expand 3D Views.4 Select the roof. click Finish Sketch. 6 In the Project Browser. and then select the soffit to join them.

10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Save As. 592 | Chapter 15 Roofs .9 If you want to save your changes. on the File menu.

Click OK. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. click Project Units. 3 Under Area. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. click Training Files. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. click Format and specify the following: ■ For Units. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. 2 In the Project Units dialog. If you are using metric units. under Length. and open Common\c_Area. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. 593 . NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes. In the final exercise. select mm. select Square meters. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans.Area Analysis 16 In this tutorial. your values will be different. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. Finally. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. For Unit Suffix. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. select Millimeters.

it is not necessary in this exercise. the system-computed height defaults to the level. click the Area Schemes tab. 7 In the Room and Area Settings dialog. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. right-click in the Design Bar. expand Views (all). select 2 decimal places. ■ At system computed height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. expand Floor Plans. click the Room Calculations tab. These schemes define spatial relationships. For Unit Suffix. ■ At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings.■ ■ ■ For Rounding. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. or 0. View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. click Settings. as well as selecting whether to have room volumes calculated automatically. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. 9 Click Cancel. and click Room and Area. Click OK. Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. select m2. There are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. click OK. 4 In the Project Units dialog. TIP If the Room and Area tab is not visible. 594 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . 8 In the Room and Area Setting dialog.

NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. you must select one of the reference lines. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print. you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. 13 In the Project Browser. 15 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 595 . forming a closed loop. Click OK.Create a gross building area plan 10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. under Views (all). area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. 12 When the informational dialog displays. The Area Tag command is used to tag existing areas. 11 In the New Area Plan dialog. rather than the area tag. click Area. ■ ■ Verify that the scale is 1/8'' = 1'-0''. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. When you select Yes in this dialog. To modify the area. you must manually add these boundary lines. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. If you select No. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). click Area Plan. An area is represented by two crossed reference lines.

verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. If you do not select this option. When you pick the walls. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. 18 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). common areas. Expand Area Plans (Rentable). you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. When you add area boundary lines. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings. and store area. Next. the area boundary lines do not update automatically. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. Click OK. Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. Add area boundary lines 20 On the Design Bar. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. click Area Boundary.NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. 596 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . 19 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. 22 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 16 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. you can either draw them or pick them. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. 17 In the New Area Plan dialog. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. 21 On the Options Bar. click Area Plan. you create a new area plan for rentable space.

26 Select the area you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 597 . 27 On the Options Bar. click Area. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 In the upper left corner of the building model. do the following: Enter Tenant 1 for Name. click ■ ■ .23 On the Design Bar. and click to select the area. click Modify. click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. Select Office area for Area Type. place the cursor over the Area Tag and press Tab until Area displays in the status bar. 25 On the Design Bar. NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the area.

add an area in the common space to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. do the following: ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. Select Office area for Area Type. 30 Add the area to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. 31 On the Design Bar. click Modify and select the area. 34 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. 598 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . Select Building Common Area for Area Type. Click OK. click ■ ■ ■ . 32 On the Options Bar.■ Click OK. 29 On the Design Bar. In the Element Properties dialog. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. click Area. do the following: Enter Tenant 2 for Name.

and Tenant 4 in the lower right. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. 35 Add an area to the building model core. enter Core for Name. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 599 . Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4.■ Click OK. and select Store Area for Area Type. 36 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model.

2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. click Save. name the project Area-in progress. click Color Scheme Legend. and click to place the legend. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. 600 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. and click Save. 37 On the File menu.rvt. In the next exercise.Notice that within the two store areas. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. Create a color scheme legend 1 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. 38 Navigate to your preferred directory. In this exercise. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise.

5 In the New Schedule dialog. select Areas (Rentable). Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 7 Under Available fields. and click OK. 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog. 8 Add the fields Area and Name. under Category. click OK to make the required visibility setting changes. click Schedule/Quantities.3 When the dialog displays. select Area Type and click Add. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 601 . click the Fields tab.

602 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the schedule.9 Click OK.

After creating mass floors. In this tutorial. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. After you make building elements. You create a mass floor schedule and assign mass usage to analyze floor area. building elements. You use mass floors to divide the mass at each level of the building model. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. At any time. curtain systems. floor. you can specify the view to display massing elements. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. and perimeter information. you then need to update the building face. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. roofs. If you modify a massing face. the building model uses those element types to define the walls. You assign the default wall. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. floors. volume. 603 . or both. and floors. you can create a schedule to assign usages and to analyze the design. and roofs. Using Massing Tools In this lesson.Massing 17 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project.

and open Metric\m_Massing_Start. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. Add a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. sweeps. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. double-click Level 1.rvt. under Floor Plans. The Design Bar title changes to Mass. click Create Mass. 4 Click OK in the Name dialog to accept the default name Mass 1. 604 | Chapter 17 Massing . and click Massing. 5 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). right-click anywhere over the Design Bar.Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. and cutting geometry. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar. 3 Click OK in the Show Mass mode informational dialog.

under Floor Plans. under Constraints. click the value for Material. click 18 On the Options Bar. for Extrusion End. for Name. 8 On the Design Bar. 19 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. click Finish Sketch. Create next extrusion form 14 In the Project Browser. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Shape Handle. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. click 7 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. 13 On the View toolbar. This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. 16 On the Design Bar. enter 1550 mm. click Extrusion Properties. click Lines. and on the Options Bar. and click OK. click Lines. (Pick Lines). 15 On the View Control Bar. under Views (all). 12 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Materials dialog. select Mass (Opaque). for Offset.6 On the Sketch Design Bar. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 605 . and click . enter 25000. (Line). click (Default 3D View). and on the Options Bar. under Materials and Finishes. 17 On the Sketch Design Bar. and click OK. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. double-click Level 1.

and click OK. double-click West. under Views (all). and click OK. select Pick a plane. click Finish Sketch. click Extrusion Properties. and click . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. click the value for Material. 21 On the Design Bar. 25 On the Design Bar. under Constraints. for Name. and click OK. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. under Elevations (Building Elevation). The second form is on top of the first form. 29 In the Work Plane dialog. highlight the larger form. under Materials and Finishes. 23 In the Materials dialog. for Extrusion Start. select Mass (Transparent). 606 | Chapter 17 Massing . 28 On the Design Bar. enter 27500. enter 25000. 30 In the drawing area. under Views (all).Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. 26 In the Project Browser. press TAB to highlight the entire face. for Extrusion End. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click {3D} to see the results. Continue creation of next massing form 27 In the Project Browser. TIP If necessary.

you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. 36 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown. and on the Options Bar. The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. click Sketch the blend base 33 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. Next. click (Arc passing through three points).31 Click to select the face. and click to select the line start point. 34 On the Options Bar. click (Draw). (Pick Lines). 32 On the Sketch Design Bar. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 607 . 37 On the Options Bar. click Lines. 35 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown. and clear Chain.

under Elevations (Building Elevation). click 47 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. (Line). 45 In the Project Browser. double-click East. click Edit Top. on the Options Bar. 43 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. click Lines and. Sketch the blend top 44 On the Design Bar. click (Move). 46 On the Design Bar. 40 Select the arc and the horizontal line. and delete the vertical construction line. under Views (all). 38 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. 608 | Chapter 17 Massing .TIP If you do not see this option. 42 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. 41 On the Edit toolbar. 39 On the Design Bar. click the arrow next to the drawing options. click Modify.

you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model on page 610. 53 On the View toolbar. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 609 . and click OK. and that -92000 is specified for Second End. In this exercise. 50 On the Design Bar. click 49 Create an arc as shown. (Arc passing through three points).48 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. In the next exercise. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Default 3D View). verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected. 54 Proceed to the next exercise. click Blend Properties. 52 On the Design Bar. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created. for Material.

click (Pick Lines) and enter 15000 for Offset. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids.Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Ref Plane. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. select the mass. double-click Level 1. as shown. 1 In the Project Browser. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. under Views (all). 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. 7 Using the same technique. 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. and select Chain. click Lines. 9 On the Design Bar. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. 4 On the Options bar. and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. click (Line). 2 In the drawing area.rvt. place 3 more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. m_Massing_Start. 610 | Chapter 17 Massing . 10 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans.

click Extrusion Properties. The curved form you create connects 2 pieces of the sloped face side of the massing. When sketching each extrusion. enter 0. Using Swept Blends In this exercise. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 14 Under Constraints. 13 On the Design Bar. snap the corners to the intersections. 12 Sketch 2 additional void extrusions as shown. click (Default 3D View).NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. click Finish Sketch. for Extrusion End. 15 Click OK. 11 Enter SI for intersection snap. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. you add a swept blend shape to the massing study created in the previous exercises. 17 On the View toolbar. 16 On the Design Bar. Using Swept Blends | 611 . In this exercise. on the View Control Bar. enter 12000 and for Extrusion Start. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise.

2 On the Mass tab of the Design Bar.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises and the resulting building model. and click Lines. select a point below the mass elements. Sketch a 2D path 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar. 612 | Chapter 17 Massing . ■ Select the lower left endpoint of the left mass. 3 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. ■ For the radius. click Sketch 2D Path. Select the midpoint of the lower face of the middle mass. click 5 Sketch the arc: ■ (Arc passing through three points).rvt. m_Massing_Start. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Swept Blend. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

and click Edit. verify that <By Sketch> is selected. The only way to align these elements is visually. click Finish Path. click Profile 1. Sketch profile 1 7 On the View toolbar. 10 On the Design Bar.Use a radius for the arc (about 180 degrees) that will make the beginning and end planes of the sweep parallel to the face of the existing mass. 9 On the Options Bar. click (Rectangle). 6 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. From a 3D view you can sketch the profiles for the 2 ends of the swept blend. as shown. 11 On the Options Bar. click (Default 3D View). Using Swept Blends | 613 . 12 Select the right endpoint of the arc as the lower right endpoint of the rectangle. and sketch a 6000mm x 6000mm rectangle on the face of the mass. click Lines.

15 On the Design Bar.13 On the Tools toolbar. Sketch profile 2 16 On the Design Bar. 17 Using the same method. and press ESC. sketch a second rectangle: ■ Click to position the lower left corner of the rectangle at the left endpoint of the arc. Align the top of the rectangle with the top edge of the cut extrusion. 14 Align the left edge of the rectangle to the mass edge. click (Align). click Profile 2. and sketch a rectangle on the face of the mass. as shown: ■ ■ 614 | Chapter 17 Massing . (The size of the rectangle is not important because you align it to the mass edges. click Finish Profile.) Align the right sketch line of the rectangle with the right edge of the mass.

under Materials and Finishes. and click . click Swept Blend Properties.18 On the Design Bar. 23 On the Design Bar. Change the material properties of the mass 19 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Materials dialog. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. select Mass (Transparent). Using Swept Blends | 615 . click <By Category>. click Finish Profile. 22 Click OK twice. click Finish Swept Blend.

Finally.24 On the Design Bar.rvt. click Finish Mass. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. You place several instances of the mass families into the project. Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. You then load that mass family file and others into a project. 25 Click File menu ➤ Save As. In this exercise. 26 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements. you create new family types from a mass family file. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. you added a swept blend shape to the massing study. 616 | Chapter 17 Massing .

for Depth. and click Apply. and click OK. enter 12000 mm. enter 11000 mm. click Training Files. and click Apply. 2 In the Family Types dialog. enter 46000mm. enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click OK. 4 In the Family Types dialog. 7 Click New. and click Apply. enter 18000 mm.rfa. 6 For Width. 5 Click New. and open Metric\Families\Massing\Box. 8 For Width. enter 15000mm. and for Name. under Other. enter 68000 mm. for Width. enter 18000 mm. you opened a mass family file and created 3 new types of this family file. enter 9000 mm. 3 In the Name dialog. In this exercise. for Depth.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating New Mass Family Types | 617 . for Depth. for Height. click Family Types. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm.rfa. and click OK. for Height. Create 3 family types 1 On the Design Bar. enter 6000 mm. enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. for Height. click New. and for Name. 9 Click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

and open the Metric\Families\Massing folder. and Triangle. on the View toolbar.rfa. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. 6 Open the Box-Training. Arc Dome. click Place Mass. 3 On the View Control Bar. 7 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and open Metric\m_Massing_In-place.rfa. 4 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. under Floor Plans.rvt. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog. as shown. You also load other existing mass families and place them. 9 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. 2 In the Project Browser.Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. click Training Files.rfa. 1 If not already selected.rfa family files. 618 | Chapter 17 Massing . In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click Site. click TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. Semi Barrel Vault. you load and place the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. under Views (all). 8 In the Type Selector. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. click Training Files. (Show Mass) to show the massing model.

as shown. specify Mass (Transparent). 24 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family. select Rotate after placement. 22 Place the cursor in the drawing area. and click OK twice. select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. click Place Mass. 18 In the Element Properties dialog.10 On the Design Bar. 17 Press CTRL. and click to place the mass. and click (Element Properties). and on the Options Bar. 21 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Type Selector. for the Material parameter. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. 13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 20 In the Type Selector. and click OK twice. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. for the Material parameter. select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. specify Mass (Opaque). click Modify. select the 3 boxes. Loading and Placing New Mass Families | 619 . 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select the triangle. 25 In the drawing area. enter 90 for Angle. 11 Select the box. 23 On the Options Bar. click Modify. click (Element Properties). click Place Mass.

for the Material parameter. 31 Select the box and click (Element Properties). for the Material parameter. click Place Mass. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 29 In the Type Selector. and click (Element Properties). 28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 34 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast.26 Select the triangle. select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. click (Default 3D View). and click OK twice. specify Mass (Opaque). 30 Place the box mass family as shown. and click OK twice. specify Mass (Transparent). 27 In the Element Properties dialog. 620 | Chapter 17 Massing . 33 On the View toolbar.

You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element. you join these mass elements. NOTE When you join geometry. In this exercise. Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. you join and modify the mass elements that you placed in the previous exercise. In the next exercise. (Join Geometry). click (Default 3D View). you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. Training File ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place. Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar. click 2 On the Tools toolbar.Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed overlap. Joining Mass Elements | 621 .rvt file.

click (Mirror). 622 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Views (all). on the Edit toolbar. 4 Select the triangle.3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown. Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected. under Floor Plans. 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown. Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. double-click Site.

enter SM. (Join Geometry). 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first. click 14 On the Tools toolbar. 17 Press ESC to see the result. click (Draw). 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. Joining Mass Elements | 623 . click (Default 3D View). 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. for Axis. 12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. as shown. Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. and snap to the midpoint of the edge.8 On the Options Bar. 11 Move the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection. and then select the triangle.

click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. (If Design Options is already selected. Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson. You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element. click (Add to Design Option Set). You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. 624 | Chapter 17 Massing . 2 On the Window menu. you joined mass elements together.) 3 On the Design Options toolbar. 1 On the Design Bar. and select the triangle mass element. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place.rvt.In this exercise. click Modify. do not clear the check mark.

under Floor Plans. Mass Elements in Design Options | 625 . 17 In the Type Selector. 14 In the drawing area. double-click Site. select Sloped (primary). 10 On the Options Bar.4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. for Angle. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. Place arc dome mass elements 16 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. specify Mass (Transparent). select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. and click (Element Properties). 7 In the Type Selector. select Rotate after placement. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. and click OK twice. 13 On the Design Bar. enter 90. select the 2 semi barrel vaults. 8 On the Options Bar. 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. 18 Place 3 arc domes as shown. click Place Mass. clear Curved. Place semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. under Views (all). 5 In the Project Browser. for the Material parameter. click Modify. click Place Mass.

While pressing CTRL. 20 In the drawing area. move the cursor over shapes in the drawing. 24 Move the 3 arc domes to the position shown. select Curved. 26 On the Design Options toolbar. click Modify. It will indicate when you locate an arc dome or semi barrel vault. double-click {3D}. click to select each of the arc domes and semi barrel values. 27 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. click (Add to Design Option Set). 23 On the View Control Bar. 626 | Chapter 17 Massing . and click OK. Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. specify Mass (Transparent). clear Sloped. and watch the status bar. and click (Element Properties). select the three arc domes. under 3D Views. and click OK twice. TIP To find the correct shapes. double-click North. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. for the Material parameter. under Views (all). 28 In the Project Browser. 22 In the Project Browser. Create a Design Option set 25 Select the 3 arc domes and the 2 semi barrel vaults.TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. under Views (all). 19 On the Design Bar. under Elevations.

29 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click (Design Options). 34 Close the warning that displays. you placed mass elements into Design Options. 35 On the File menu. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. select Curved from the Design Option menu. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes. click the Design Options tab. under Option. 32 On the Design Options toolbar. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. In this exercise. select Curved and. 31 Click the value for Design Option. you can make it the primary option. click Make Primary. You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 627 . 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 33 In the Design Options dialog. and click Close.rvt. click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. and click OK.

6 On the Options Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. Create walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select Wall Centerline. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Brick on CMU. you pick massing faces to create walls. click Wall by Face. 3 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southeast. 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown.rvt. click (Pick Faces). In the left pane of the Open dialog. 628 | Chapter 17 Massing . click (Show Mass) to show the massing model. select Basic Wall: Exterior .Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. double-click {3D}. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. under Views (all). and open Metric\m_Massing_Building_Components. 2 On the View toolbar. 5 In the Type Selector. click Training Files. and for Loc Line.

12 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. under Views (all). 10 Select all the faces shown in red.The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. under Views (all). 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. double-click Level 5. 8 In the Project Browser. click Wall by Face. 14 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 3. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. under Floor Plans. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. click Wall by Face. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. Creating Walls by Picking Faces | 629 . click Wall by Face. 16 In the Type Selector. NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed. 9 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Design Bar.

21 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. If desired. you can select the overlapping curtain wall. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. click Wall by Face. under Views (all). You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. double-click Level 9.18 Select all the faces shown in red. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 630 | Chapter 17 Massing . 19 In the Project Browser. 20 On the View Control Bar. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar.

In this exercise. and click OK. Curtain Systems. under Views (all). volume. select all levels. Revit Architecture generates a mass floor for each selected level that intersects the mass. you pick mass elements and select levels to create floors. 7 In the Mass Floors dialog. clear Curtain Panels. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. Creating Floors by Picking Masses In this exercise. click Mass Floors. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 631 . Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. perimeter. and Walls. click Modify.rvt. 6 On the Options Bar. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. When you select levels. The following information is available for mass floors: mass floor area. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Model Categories tab. 8 On the Design Bar. 4 Click OK. double-click {3D}. and exterior surface area.

632 | Chapter 17 Massing . and click OK. select Levels 1-4.9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. 11 On the Options Bar. click Modify. click Mass Floors. 12 In the Mass Floors dialog. and select the three15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown. 13 On the Design Bar. 10 Press CTRL.

select Level 1. clear Exclude Design Options (to allow you to select the semi vault barrel elements in the next step). and click OK. NOTE The semi vault barrel elements are the 2 sloped components in the front of the view. 17 In the Mass Floors dialog. 16 On the Options Bar. The box mass is the long box element in the middle of the model. and select the 2 semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 633 . 15 Press CTRL.14 On the Options Bar. click Mass Floors.

select Floor Area.In this exercise. Floor Volume. Now that the floor areas have been added to the mass objects. Creating a Mass Study Analysis In this exercise. you generate mass floor schedules for the hotel and retail massing in the model. under Category. schedules can be created using the mass floors. select Mass Floor. Floor Perimeter. and Level fields should display under Scheduled fields (in order). The Floor Area. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.rvt. and click Add. and select Level. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. add the following additional fields: ■ ■ Usage Mass: Family and Type You use the Mass: Family and Type field to help sort the schedule so it is easier to assign usage to the different masses. press and hold SHIFT. and click OK. Create a mass floor schedule 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. under Available fields. 4 Using the same method. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. 634 | Chapter 17 Massing . you created floors by selecting mass elements and levels for the floors.

The Mass Floor Schedule displays. select Mass: Family and Type. and click OK. you can select it from the drop-down list for subsequent entries. for Sort by. NOTE Double-click the column divider in the schedule header to automatically expand the column to fit the text. Assign usage values to the mass components 8 In the first entry in the schedule. enter Retail. 6 Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. according to the following guidelines: NOTE After you enter a usage value in the schedule.5 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. for Usage. 7 Adjust the schedule columns so the entire field is displayed. Mass Family Box-Training: 1500 mm x 1800 mm x 1200 mm Usage Retail Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 635 . 9 Enter or select the appropriate usage value for all items in the schedule.

select Mass: Family and Type. After you assign usage. 14 Select Level. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. the column Mass: Family and Type can be deleted. and click Properties. expand Schedules/Quantities. right-click Mass Floor Schedule. click Move Up until Usage is listed first.Mass Family Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 1100 mm Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm Mass 1: Mass 1 Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500 Usage Atrium Atrium Hotel Atrium Modify the schedule to calculate hotel floor area 10 In the Project Browser. 13 With Usage selected. under Other. click Edit. for Fields. under Scheduled fields (in order). You can also arrange the schedule so it is more useful for analyzing the massing. 636 | Chapter 17 Massing . and click Remove. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Move Up until Level is listed second.

22 In the Project Browser. under Other. enter Hotel. select Usage. 24 In the Project Browser. right-click Hotel Floor Area Schedule. select Floor Area. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 Click in the title of the schedule. under Fields. and click OK. TIP The values from these floor area schedules can be tagged in section. 27 Click OK twice. 16 On the Formatting tab. Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 637 . and click Properties. 19 Click OK twice. and in the field below. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog.15 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Level. 18 On the Filter tab. right-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. for Then by. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Rename. and plan views. select Calculate totals. right-click Copy of Hotel Floor Area Schedule. and select Grand totals. click Edit. for Sort by. for Field formatting. elevation. select Usage. and click OK. 23 In the Rename View dialog. in the field under Filter by. You create separate schedules to calculate retail and hotel space independently. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Retail Floor Area Schedule. Create a retail floor area schedule 21 In the Project Browser. for Filter by. for Filter. enter Retail (instead of Hotel). for Filter. click Edit. and enter Hotel Floor Area Schedule. under Other.

Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.rvt. the floor area. 1 In the Project Browser. by level. you created mass floor schedules.In this exercise. Create roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise. click Roof by Face. The mass floor schedules list. floor perimeter. under Views (all). double-click {3D}. you pick massing faces to create roofs. 638 | Chapter 17 Massing . 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown. and floor volume information of hotel and retail massing in the model.

This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces | 639 . click Create Roof. 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. 7 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest. and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family. click Create Roof. 5 On the Options Bar. select Basic Roof : Generic .400mm.4 In the Type Selector. Your model should now look as shown.

create the same roof on the swept blend (curved) mass. 10 With the Roof by Face command still selected. and click OK. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. 9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view back to the Northeast.8 Using the method you just learned. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. 15 Click the Model Categories tab. select Sloped Glazing. 13 Using the same method. In this exercise. Curtain Systems. 640 | Chapter 17 Massing . create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. 12 On the Options Bar. select Curtain Panels. 14 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Create Roof. and Walls. 11 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. in the Type Selector.

click Create System. verify that Select Multiple is selected.Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.rvt. 3 In the Type Selector. Creating Curtain Systems | 641 . and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown. click Curtain System by Face. 1 In the Project Browser. select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm. 5 Press CTRL. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. under Views (all). 6 On the Options Bar. double-click {3D}.

7 Using the same method. select the blended form on the in-place mass. create a curtain system for each of the other 2 domes. 642 | Chapter 17 Massing . 8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected.

10 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest. 11 Using the same method. Creating Curtain Systems | 643 . click Create System. create a curtain system for the walls of the swept blend (curved mass).9 On the Options Bar.

12 Click Modify to exit the command.rvt. you created curtain systems on non-planar faces. you change the size of an existing mass family. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. In this exercise. 644 | Chapter 17 Massing . and modify building elements to resize with the new mass family. Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise.

Floors. you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. and click OK. for Width. 7 On the Options Bar. click Visibility/Graphics. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 645 . and then click OK. 4 Select the box mass family as shown. clear Curtain Panels. 6 On the Design Bar. and click (Element Properties). 2 On the View menu. click Modify. double-click Site. clear Exclude Design Options. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family.1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Model Categories tab. enter 30000. and Walls. under Views (all). under Floor Plans. Curtain Systems. 9 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. Next. Roofs.

12 On the View Control Bar. In the next steps. under Floor Plans. 646 | Chapter 17 Massing . The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. 11 In the Project Browser. you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. under Views (all). double-click Level 1. 13 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the 3 walls shown. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe.10 Open the 3D view to see the result.

click Remake. click OK.TIP To select the curtain wall. Also. you want to select the smaller one. press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. 14 On the Options Bar. 15 In the Exclude Hosts dialog. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 647 . click (Default 3D View). remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. 16 On the View toolbar. 17 Select the roof as shown.

18 On the Options Bar. 19 Select the arc dome curtain system. click Remake. and click Remake. 648 | Chapter 17 Massing .

1 Open the 3D view. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 649 . Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. Turn off massing 2 On the View toolbar. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family. you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements. you changed the size of an existing mass family. double-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. Notice that the values have changed in the schedule to reflect the changes in the mass elements.20 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. under Schedules/Quantities. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise. click (Show Mass) to turn off massing.rvt.

9 Select Mass.The 3D view now shows only the building shell. and click OK. 3 In the Project Browser. 8 Click None to clear the selection. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click {3D}. 6 On the Model Categories tab. 4 Rename the view 3D . 5 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 650 | Chapter 17 Massing . 7 Clear one of the check boxes. under 3D Views.Massing only. click All to select all categories. Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing.

such as columns and an extruded roof. This concludes the massing tutorial.In this exercise. you can continue adding additional Revit Architecture modeling components. You might create the model shown. you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model. If desired. to the building shell. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 651 .

652 .

You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. In this exercise. In this tutorial. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. place. or with those working on a different project. the host group is also updated automatically. After you create a model group. By grouping objects. hotel rooms. You mirror one instance of the group. Modifying. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. For example. In another exercise. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. all instances in the building model are updated. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit.Grouping 18 Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2009. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. The new group is considered nested within the host group. and modify repetitive units. and typical office layouts. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. you also simplify the modification process. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. When you make changes to a nested group. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. you add the new model group to a previously created group. You can also nest groups within other groups. you not only simplify their placement. 653 . Creating. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group.

and double-click First Floor. expand Floor Plans. 654 | Chapter 18 Grouping . NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder. and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan.rvt. click Training Files.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_Groups-Condominium. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. enter ZR. 2 Click in the drawing area. expand Views (all).

Creating and Placing a Group | 655 . and click OK. The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. 4 On the Edit toolbar. enter Typical Kitchen.3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen. click (Group). 5 In the Create Model Group dialog.

click Modify. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 656 | Chapter 18 Grouping .Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. 7 On the Design Bar. select the center control for the group origin. and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen.

12 On the Design Bar. expand Model. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. right-click Typical Kitchen. and click Create Instance. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. Creating and Placing a Group | 657 . 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. under Groups. click Modify.

16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. clear Copy. NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image.14 On the Edit toolbar. 15 On the Options Bar. 658 | Chapter 18 Grouping . The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. click (Mirror). select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments.

18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. click (Rotate). 19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. and on the Edit toolbar. Creating and Placing a Group | 659 .17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell.

and one rotated. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. click Modify. as shown. one mirrored.NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. 660 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. 20 On the Design Bar.

Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. When you finish editing. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Save As. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. name the file m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.rvt. Modifying a Group | 661 . you make changes to an instance of a group. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. press TAB to highlight the wall. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. and click Save. and click to select it.Save the training file 22 On the File menu. Modifying a Group In this exercise.rvt.

and click to select the door. (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member.3 Click (Group Member. click Modify. and click member to group instance.). 8 On the Design Bar.). Click icon to exclude in this group instance. 7 Click (Group Member. and click to select the wall. 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. 4 Move the cursor over the door. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. NOTE To display an excluded element. press TAB. select the element.). press TAB. Click icon to exclude in this group instance.). Click icon to exclude in this group instance. 662 | Chapter 18 Grouping .

move the cursor to the left. 13 On the Design Bar. select Bifold-4 Panel : 1220 x 2134mm. 14 In the Type Selector. select Basic Wall : Generic .Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. clear Tag on Placement. 10 In the Type Selector. Modifying a Group | 663 . click Wall. 11 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. click Door. click Modify.127mm. 16 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. 15 On the Options Bar.

and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. All other elements in the model are grayed out. move the cursor up. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. click Modify. click Edit Group. 24 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. 18 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 23 In the drawing area. 20 Select the Typical Kitchen group. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. 21 On the Options Bar.17 On the Design Bar. 664 | Chapter 18 Grouping . Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 19 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. In edit group mode.

and on the Options Bar. 26 Select the opening. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. click Modify. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. and click OK. (Element Properties). enter 2134. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. which acts as the host. 29 On the group editor toolbar. click 28 For Base Offset. Nesting Groups | 665 . Nesting Groups In this exercise. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. under Constraints. enter 1000. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. you add the Typical Kitchen group. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. click Finish. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. for Unconnected Height.25 On the Design Bar. created in an earlier lesson.

5 In the drawing area. click (Add to Group). 4 On the group editor toolbar. select the Typical Kitchen group. 3 On the Options Bar. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. 666 | Chapter 18 Grouping .Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. double-click First Floor. in the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan.rvt. click Edit Group. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.

Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. select the wall between the folding doors. and each of the bifold doors. double-click Second Floor. click Finish. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group. 7 On the group editor toolbar. 8 In the Project Browser.6 Press TAB. under Floor Plans. Nesting Groups | 667 .

Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. under Floor Plans. In the next exercise. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. and filled regions. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group.10 Click File menu ➤ Save. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 668 | Chapter 18 Grouping . you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. such as text. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model.rvt. such as door and window tags. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. double-click First Floor. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. you add door tags to a group.

and select a point below the left elevator. click to draw a rectangular region. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. 4 On the Options Bar.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Detail Group | 669 . 7 On the Design Bar. click Filled Region. click Finish Sketch. 6 Move the cursor down and to the left.

Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and select the text note and the filled region. 12 Enter Tile. click to add an arc leader. click (Group). Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. 14 On the Edit toolbar. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. click Text. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. as shown. click Modify. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. and click OK. 16 In the drawing area. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. 670 | Chapter 18 Grouping . and on the Design Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point.

double-click Second Floor. under Groups. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. and click Create Instance. expand Detail. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 22 On the Design Bar. Because the detail group contains variables. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. click Modify. under Floor Plans. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 671 .18 On the Design Bar. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. 21 In the drawing area. 20 In the Project Browser.

rvt. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. as shown. double-click First Floor. 3 On the Options Bar.manner that a drawing component can be added. click Tag ➤ By Category. under Floor Plans. click Modify. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different. 5 On the Design Bar. 672 | Chapter 18 Grouping . clear Leader.

double-click Second Floor. click (Group). select Door Tags. and click OK. 8 In the Filter dialog. under Floor Plans.7 On the Options Bar. Using Attached Detail Groups | 673 . Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. click (Filter Selection). for Attached Detail Group Name. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. 9 On the Edit toolbar. click Check None. 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. and click OK. 11 In the Project Browser.

17 Click File menu ➤ Save. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. Training File 674 | Chapter 18 Grouping . and click OK. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. therefore. 16 On the Design Bar. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. you can then work with it in the context of the new project.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. click Place Detail. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. click Modify. 14 On the Options Bar. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. When you load the group from the library into a new project. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog.

under Groups\Model. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 12 On the Design Bar. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. and click Create Instance. click Modify. for Create new.rvt. and click OK. Saving and Loading Groups | 675 . and click Open. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. and expand Model. 5 In the New Project dialog. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. and click Save. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. click Desktop. select 2 Bedroom Unit. A warning dialog displays. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. browse to the Desktop. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. 3 For File name. In this case. verify that Same as group name is selected. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. and click Save Group. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. click OK. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.rvt. expand Groups. accept the default template file. verify that Project is selected. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser.

24 In the message dialog. 676 | Chapter 18 Grouping . When a group is converted to a link. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. click Bind. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. and on the Options Bar. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. and click OK. and the link is removed. click Use Existing. 18 In the Project Browser. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. 17 On the Design Bar. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. click Remove Link. 20 On the Options Bar. click Link.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. select the linked Revit model. click OK. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. expand Revit Links. 23 In the confirmation dialog.rvt file is added as a link to the project. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project.rvt. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. verify that Attached Details is selected only. click Modify.

you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. In the final exercises. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface. islands.Site 19 In this tutorial. You add property lines manually. and then modify the data. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. and walkways. you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2009 to add and modify site components within a project. Using Site Tools In this lesson. you add a building pad to the site. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. convert the data to a table. 677 . you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project.

expand Floor Plans. 3 On the Design Bar. click Toposurface. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the second part of this exercise. and open Metric\m_First_Project. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Site. click Training Files. 4 On the Options Bar. right-click in the Design Bar.rvt. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. click Point. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed.The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. and click Site. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. Using the first method. expand Views (all). 678 | Chapter 19 Site . The scale of this view is 1 : 100. you create a toposurface using two different methods. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. This project file was created using the default metric template. enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser.

7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. 6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. Use the following illustration as a reference. Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide.5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. Creating a Toposurface | 679 . A toposurface must have at least three elevation points.

12000mm. 11 On the Design Bar. and click OK. TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. 12 On the Settings menu.8 On the Options Bar. enter 1500mm. Use the following illustration as a reference. and 18000mm absolute elevations. click Finish Surface. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000mm elevation points inside the 3000mm contour. 13 In the Site Settings dialog. under Increment. 15000mm. click Site Settings. 10 Repeat the previous step for 9000mm. under Additional Contours. 680 | Chapter 19 Site . enter an absolute elevation of 6000mm.

14 On the View toolbar. and press ENTER. Creating a Toposurface | 681 . 18 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. click to delete it. click Modify. enter 1000mm. Before importing the contour data. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. expand Elevations (Building Elevation).This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. click (Default 3D View). 16 On the View toolbar. click to view it at various angles. on the Standard toolbar. 19 On the Design Bar. 15 On the View Control Bar. (SteeringWheels). and double-click South. modify the level names and elevations. 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. click the elevation value.

You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. it is considered an import symbol. Verify that Current view only is not selected. rename the level Base Site Elevation. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. and click OK. 25 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 29 Select the imported topography. double-click Site. For Colors. For Layers. and press ENTER. 24 In the Project Browser. select Specify. under Views (all). click Training Files. click Modify. click Yes. under Floor Plans. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. click Pin Position. 26 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. 23 Click the Level 1 text. 28 On the Design Bar. Until it is exploded. and press ENTER.21 Click the Level 2 text. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. rename the level Basement. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog. select Preserve. 682 | Chapter 19 Site . Click Open. 30 On the Edit menu.

31 On the Design Bar. click Visibility/Graphics. Creating a Toposurface | 683 . 34 Under Visibility. click Toposurface. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. click the Annotation Categories tab. clear Elevations. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog. and click OK. clear C_INDX. When you select the import symbol. 32 On the View menu. click Modify. Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. when the edges highlight. 36 On the Design Bar. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. select it. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. and then click OK. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and.

The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. click (SteeringWheels). and click Save. click (Default 3D View). Notice that the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. 40 On the View toolbar. 39 On the Design Bar. Adding Property Lines on page 684. 684 | Chapter 19 Site . Using the second method. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 42 On the View toolbar. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. Using the first method. 43 Click File menu ➤ Save As.rvt. 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Adding Property Lines In this exercise. 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. you add property lines using two methods. this project file is required in its current state. name the project Site-in progress. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. click Finish Surface.

On the Design Bar. click Property Line. select Create property lines by sketching. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar.This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. click Lines. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Although you can use your preferred sketching method. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. Site-in progress. 4 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. do so before continuing. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. Select and delete the right vertical line. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Adding Property Lines | 685 . and click OK. click Lines. If you have not completed the previous exercise. Click Modify.rvt.

Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. click OK. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. 6 On the Design Bar. 7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. to delete them. 10 In the Property Lines dialog. select the lines. when they highlight. click 12 On the Design Bar.■ Using the 3-point Arc tool. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. and click OK. 8 On the Options Bar. 9 In the warning dialog. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes. click OK. click Property Line. select Edit Table. click Finish Sketch. on the Standard toolbar. add an arc line on the right. A warning dialog is displayed. 686 | Chapter 19 Site . The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography.

Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor. Adding Property Lines | 687 . scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments. This means there is no gap in the property lines. 16 Click OK.14 In the Property Lines dialog. click to place the property lines. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E Notice that after you complete the last line. 19 In the Tags dialog. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. If the gap is not closed. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. 15 Starting in Row #1. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed.

clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. 688 | Chapter 19 Site . In the next exercise.dwg and click OK. 30 On the View Control Bar. click Training Files. 29 Tag the three remaining property lines. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. click Tag ➤ By Category. 27 On the Options Bar. 25 Under Visibility. 31 Click File menu ➤ Save. clear Leader. In the final step. click the Imported Categories tab. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. 23 On the View menu. In this exercise. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. 22 In the Tags dialog. 28 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. right-click in the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog.20 Click Load. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. 24 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click to place it. Before adding property line segment tags. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. 32 Proceed to the next exercise.rfa. 26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click Drafting. click Visibility/Graphics. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Civil\M_Property Line Tag. you created two sets of property lines. and click OK. this project file is required in its current state. The tags display more prominently in this view.

6 In the Object Styles dialog.rvt. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog. Site-in progress. 2 On the Settings menu. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings | 689 . select Topography.Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. Under Subcategory. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. click Object Styles. select Single Value. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. select Dash dot. for Subcategory. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. click Site Settings. 9 In the Site Settings dialog. 10 Under Additional Contours. specify an interval of 1000mm passing through elevation 0. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. select Working Contour. enter 1000. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. under Contour Line Display. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation.0mm. 7 Click OK. click New. enter the name Working Contour. Under Line Color. Under Line Pattern. Under Range Type. In the Object Styles dialog. select a shade of Brown. and click OK. 4 Under Modify Subcategories.

In this exercise. such as material. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. 12 Click File menu ➤ Close. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. and islands. parking areas. 690 | Chapter 19 Site . parking areas. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. you create topographic subregions to define roads. The object style subcategory. and islands. Working Contour. The next exercise requires a new training file. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. you create subregions in order to define roads. In the next exercise.11 Click OK. Creating Topographic Subregions on page 690.

TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles. Although the exact dimensions are not important. click Lines. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide. click Subregion. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. and open Metric\m_Site. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. try to replicate the location and proportion. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 On the Design Bar.rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. Creating Topographic Subregions | 691 .

Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography. click the value for Material. 692 | Chapter 19 Site . select Site . and click OK.Tarmacadam for Name. enter Parking for Name. you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. 6 In the Materials dialog. and click to open the Materials dialog. When you finish the sketch in a later step. click Properties. and click OK. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. under Materials and Finishes. 8 On the Design Bar.NOTE In the Metric training file. click Finish Sketch. 5 In the Element Properties dialog.

under Floor Plans. expand Schedules/Quantities. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser. Creating Topographic Subregions | 693 . You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. 12 On the View Control Bar. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces. As you create new subregions. and double-click Topography Schedule. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. double-click Site. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site . NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. click Edit Boundary. 14 On the Options Bar. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration.Tarmacadam. the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. they display within this schedule. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.9 On the View Control Bar.

Delete overlapping lines. under Floor Plans. 17 On the View Control Bar. 694 | Chapter 19 Site . double-click Topography Schedule. 16 On the Design Bar. Notice that the project area has increased. click Subregion.TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. 21 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. In this training project. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. 20 On the View Control Bar. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. double-click Site. under Schedules/Quantities. 22 On the Design Bar. Within each subregion. 18 In the Project Browser. click Lines. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.

and click to open the Materials dialog. and click OK. 26 In the Materials dialog. 28 On the Design Bar. under Materials and Finishes. under Identity Data. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating Topographic Subregions | 695 . Precise dimensions are not important at this time. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information. and click OK. select Site . double-click Topography Schedule. 29 On the View Control Bar.Grass for Name.Grass for Name. 30 In the Project Browser. under Schedules/Quantities. use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. click Properties. 24 On the Design Bar.23 In the upper-right parking area. enter Island . click Finish Sketch. click the value for Material. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

Notice that the schedule has been updated. 35 On the Design Bar. double-click Site. under Schedules/Quantities. 32 In the Project Browser. Name the subregion Walkway.Grass. and apply the material Site . under Floor Plans. 34 On the Design Bar.31 In the Project Browser. You must sketch each region separately. double-click Topography Schedule. and apply the material Concrete Cast-in-Situ . add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration.walkway. 36 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration. 696 | Chapter 19 Site . click Lines. click Subregion. Name each region Island Grass. Using the techniques learned in previous steps. double-click Site. under Floor Plans. Add the concrete walkway 33 In the Project Browser.

double-click Topography Schedule. NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project. there is still only one toposurface. 38 In the Project Browser. Notice that the schedule has been updated. you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion. so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. Creating Topographic Subregions | 697 . 37 On the Design Bar. under Schedules/Quantities.WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. click Finish Sketch.

Site tutorial-in progress. 2 Select the toposurface.rvt. you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. name the project Site tutorial-in progress. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 41 Proceed to the next exercise.39 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise. 40 Navigate to your preferred folder. Grading the Toposurface on page 698. When you use the grading tool. this project file is required in its current state. Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points. 698 | Chapter 19 Site .rvt. double-click Site. and click Save.

select Existing for Phase Created. and click Select and Edit.3 On the Options Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. Grading the Toposurface | 699 . Notice that the toposurface displays differently. under Phasing. click Graded Region. click (Element Properties). and click OK. Using Phasing on page 761. RELATED For more information regarding phasing. select Copy Internal Points. stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. A warning dialog is displayed. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. 8 Select the topographic surface. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. 7 In the Graded Region dialog. click Modify. see the tutorial. 6 On the Design Bar.

The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area. 10 Press DELETE. 700 | Chapter 19 Site . Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area.Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration.

Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing. demolished. 11 On the View Control Bar. 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration. and new. Grading the Toposurface | 701 . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.

15 On the Options Bar. 702 | Chapter 19 Site . click (Default 3D View). The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat. click Point. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. 18 On the View toolbar. Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway. Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar.13 Press DELETE. specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm. click Finish Surface. 17 On the Design Bar. 19 On the View Control Bar.

only the original toposurface displays. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify. and click OK. click View Properties. 24 On the View menu.20 On the View toolbar. specify New Construction for Phase. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. 23 Select the toposurface. Adding a Building Pad | 703 . Therefore. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. When you add a building pad. click to view it at various angles. this project file is required in its current state. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. click View Properties. under Phasing. specify Existing for Phase. you create a building pad. and delete it. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. Adding a Building Pad on page 703. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. under Phasing. (SteeringWheels). you can delete it. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. Only the graded topography displays. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu.

click Finish Sketch. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. 704 | Chapter 19 Site . 2 On the View Control Bar. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. click Pad. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. If you have an existing building model. the Pick Walls command is active. NOTE By default. Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area. double-click Site. under Floor Plans.rvt. Site tutorial-in progress. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click Lines.

TIP You can slope building pads by adding a slope arrow to the sketch. 9 On the View toolbar. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Properties of the slope arrow specify height offsets for the slope of the pad. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Notice the new building pad. 8 On the View toolbar. see Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. click (Default 3D View). 11 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding a Building Pad | 705 . 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. Adding Site Components on page 706. this project file is required in its current state. click (SteeringWheels). For additional information on using slope arrows to modify geometry. 7 On the View Control Bar.

4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area.Adding Site Components In this exercise.90 deg.rvt. click Modify. 3 In the Type Selector. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm . 706 | Chapter 19 Site . you add parking and planting components to the site surface. 5 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. double-click Site. and select the parking space. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser. Site tutorial-in progress. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area. click Parking Component. under Floor Plans. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

Adding Site Components | 707 . click (Default 3D View).NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad. 7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space. 8 On the View toolbar. TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task.

click (SteeringWheels). 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.9 On the View toolbar. under Floor Plans. 708 | Chapter 19 Site . click Site Component. 12 In the Type Selector. Notice the new parking spaces. double-click Site. and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below. choose any tree type. Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles.

Adding Site Components | 709 . click (Default 3D View). 15 On the View toolbar. NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. In the following illustration. 14 On the View toolbar. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click (SteeringWheels). the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save.13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below. Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface.

710 | Chapter 19 Site .NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. click Tag All Not Tagged. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. and click OK. under Floor Plans. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. double-click Site. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rvt. You also add spot dimensions to the parking area and the terrain to display the actual elevation at selected points. and click Apply. click Hidden Line. click Apply. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser. Site tutorial-in progress. Tagging Site and Parking Components on page 710. 3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 5 On the View menu. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. this project file is required in its current state. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed.

You also add a spot dimension to the terrain to see how the elevation is reported. You place spot dimensions on either side of the drive entrance. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. Click again to the left to position the leader.Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. add 2 more spot dimensions: ■ Add a spot dimension in the lower left corner of the drive entrance. outside of the site. verify that Leader and Shoulder are selected. The exact position of the dimensions is not important. as shown: 10 Using the same method. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. In the following exercise. Add spot dimensions 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. to position the shoulder of the leader. 9 Add a spot dimension to the drive entrance: ■ ■ ■ Click in the upper left corner of the drive entrance. NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. 8 On the Options Bar. Tagging Site and Parking Components | 711 . Click up and to the left.

12 Press and hold CTRL. click Modify. and select the 3 spot dimensions.■ Add a spot dimension to the terrain below the drive. 13 Modify the display of the spot dimensions by selecting and clearing options on the Options Bar: ■ Clear Shoulder. 11 On the Design Bar. 712 | Chapter 19 Site .

Creating Parking Space Schedules on page 713. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. ■ Select Leader and Shoulder. 14 On the Design Bar. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 713 .■ Clear Leader. Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. click Modify. you create a parking schedule. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. this project file is required in its current state. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save.

rvt. and under Heading. number the first three spaces consecutively. If necessary. 11 On the Window menu. double-click Site. enter Space. under Space. select Mark. 12 In the Site plan. 10 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). 5 Under Available fields. and click Add. click the Fields tab. select Type. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. click Schedule/Quantities. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. click Tile. 4 Under Available fields. enter Size. 9 On the Window menu. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. and click OK. 6 Click the Formatting tab. under Floor Plans. and click OK. select Type. 7 Under Fields. select Mark. select Parking for Category. 8 Under Fields. click Close Hidden Windows. The parking schedule is displayed.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and click Add. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and under Heading. 13 In the Parking Schedule. Site tutorial-in progress. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. 714 | Chapter 19 Site .

Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. 14 In the Parking Schedule. Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule. the selected space highlights in the Site plan. This allows you to know which space you are numbering. under Space. finish numbering the remaining spaces. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 715 .

716 .

All other team members can view this workset. however. floors. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets 717 . you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. doors. select the desired workset. After the project is shared. Elements specific to a view. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. stairs. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. The first time you activate worksets within a project. go to the Worksets dialog. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2009. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. you must first enable Worksharing. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. called Worksharing. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. you specify an active workset. you can select which worksets are open or closed. To make a workset editable. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. You can enable Worksharing for any project. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. Working in a shared project In a shared project. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. use Element Borrowing. such as annotations and dimensions. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. and click Editable. A workset is a collection of building elements. In this tutorial. and so on. such as walls. Using Worksharing. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. When you are working on a shared project. they cannot make changes to it. Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project.Sharing Projects 20 When working with large building projects. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out.

You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. such as a tenant interior. Team size You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. Instead. When setting up Worksharing. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. In the next exercise. for a typical project. In the lessons and exercises that follow. Shared Levels and Grids.dialog. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. not including the Project Standards. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. You should have at least one workset for each person. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. Experience has shown that. In a multi-story structure. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. and View worksets. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets required for your work. 718 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. After learning the fundamentals. In most projects.

the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. When creating the new worksets. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. This allows Revit Architecture to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. When you create a new workset. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. with each assigned a specific functional task. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 719 . you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. As new members create worksets for their own use. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. Regardless of the default setting. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing.Team member roles Typically. On this tab. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. For example. if a workset named Interior was created. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. each team member has control over a portion of the design. designers work in teams. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use.

each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. When finished or at regular intervals. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. you should then save to your local file. your changes are saved. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. you make that workset editable by you. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. you can select which workset is active. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. However. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. the file is saved as the central file. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. When you save to the central file. Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. This makes them available to other team members. within the local file. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. proceeds as usual. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. When you save to the central file. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. Generally. your changes propagate to the entire team. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. After saving to the central file. Therefore. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. As you work. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. however. 720 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. This is called “Selective Open. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. When you save locally (to your local file).Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. On the Options Bar. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time.

WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. using VPN. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. and then save the local file. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely is supported. When working remotely. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Architecture. save to the central file. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. Alternatively. you should check out the Materials workset. make any required worksets editable. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. In this instance. In this conceptual exercise.Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. In the next exercise. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. and make that workset editable. In this situation. if you know who checked out the required workset. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 721 . for instance. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. reload the latest changes from the central file. To do this. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. you work no differently then you would in the office.

Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu.rvt." Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. Your username displays as the present owner. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. When you enable worksharing. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. click Worksets. 722 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . and open Common\c_Worksets. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. The Worksets dialog displays. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. under Show. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and notice all are editable by you. click Training Files. 3 In the Worksets dialog.

expand Views (all). Project Standards. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. clear Families. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. expand Floor Plans. Only User-Created worksets should display. Because the interior walls appear in many views. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. type the name Exterior Shell. 10 Enter Furniture Layout. and click OK. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. select Workset1. 9 Click New. and double-click Level 1. Therefore. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. For example. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 723 . all building model elements are assigned to that workset. it is better to make them visible by default. imagine four users including yourself. 7 Enter the name Interior Layout. another is assigned the interior layout. currently named Workset1. click New. For training purposes. 8 Click OK. In this case. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. You do. you can rename the default workset.■ Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". ■ 5 Under Show. 11 In the Worksets dialog. however. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. click . Subdividing the project into worksets 15 In the Project Browser. When you initially activate Worksharing. In this simple training project. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. clear Visible by default in all views. In this training file. 12 Click Rename. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. 14 In the Worksets dialog. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. a small number of team members are working on the building model. 13 In the Rename dialog. 17 On the Options Bar. click OK. and Views. 16 In the drawing area. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. under Identity Data. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default.

including the interior doors. and click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. and click OK. 23 Select all of the interior elements. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. select Interior Layout for Workset. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. 21 On the Options Bar. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 Select one of the interior walls. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset.19 Click OK. click . click the Worksets tab. and walls. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. 26 On the View menu. under Identity Data. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. 29 Click OK. stairs. 724 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 28 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. under Identity Data. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 On the Options Bar. click . select Interior Layout for Workset.

click Visibility/Graphics. Now that you have created the central file. under Floor Plans. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. under Views (all). 33 In the Project Browser. 43 Click OK. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. 35 On the Options Bar. select Interior Layout for Workset. 32 Select Interior Layout. 38 In the Save As dialog. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 725 . click the Worksets tab. Checking in the worksets 40 On the File menu. Create the central file 37 On the File menu. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. click Non Editable. click . The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. 41 In the Worksets dialog. click Save As. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. double-click Level 2. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. you enabled Worksharing on a project. 30 On the View menu. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. click Worksets. If any interior elements remain. make sure you remember the location of this central file. In this exercise. 44 On the File menu. select all of the interior elements of the building model. 34 In the drawing area. 39 Click Save. and click OK. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. under Identity Data. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. 42 On the right side of the dialog. and click OK. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. click Close. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project.

select Interior Layout for Name. 5 In the Opening Worksets dialog. 15 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 1. Before working on the model. click Worksets. 9 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. you create your local file. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. 8 In the File Save Options dialog. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. In addition. 3 Click the arrow next to the Open button. Checking out worksets 10 On the File menu.Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. select the central file. 726 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . select Interior Layout. make modifications to the building model. and select Yes for Editable. 2 In the Open dialog. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets on page 722. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. You have created a local file which is for your use only. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. please do so before continuing. check out worksets. and select Specify. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. 11 In the Worksets dialog. click Open. click Save As. click Options. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. select all the User-Created worksets. The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. and click OK. expand Floor Plans. and click OK. Next. 7 In the Save As dialog. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. 12 Click OK. 6 On the File menu. 14 On the Worksets toolbar. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. In this case. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. If you have not yet completed the exercise. and click Save. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. 13 On the Window menu. expand Views (all). 4 Click Open.

21 On the Options Bar. 23 On the File menu. 17 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. however. On the Options Bar. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. click . 24 Click OK. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. Working Individually with Worksets | 727 . 22 Click OK.16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. under Identity Data. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. click . Verify that it is cleared. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. click Worksets. In this case. Because this element is not owned by another user. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. If it was owned by another user. If this is selected. click Modify. 18 On the Options Bar. In the Worksets dialog. Revit Architecture borrows it for you and applies your changes. you can still edit this wall. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. 20 Under Constraints. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. notice the Editable Only option. and click OK. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area.

27 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. click Door. 29 In the Type Selector. The precise location is not important. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. 32 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. 28 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 31 On the Design Bar. 34 In the Type Selector. 728 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 33 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Basic Wall: Interior . click Wall.126mm Partition (2-hr). 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. 26 Delete the door. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner.Modify the building model 25 Select the door on the right side of the corridor.

save to central. two users access the central file through a network connection. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. you should perform regular saves. If you have not yet completed these exercises. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. add two door openings into the rooms you created. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. Whenever you save. you created your local file. click Save to Central. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. which matches the information in the Status Bar. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. Borrowed Elements is selected. The Save to Central dialog displays with the path to the central file automatically filled in. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. you should relinquish all worksets. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. By default. At the end of a work session. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 38 Click OK. leave this file open in its current state. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 729 . and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own.35 Using the following illustration as a guide. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. You modified the building model. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. displays the workset as well as the element type. Saving your work 36 On the File menu. and save locally immediately afterward. In this particular case. For training purposes. and reload the latest changes. When working in your local file. make elements editable. each user must check out worksets. a tooltip. If you click Modify on the Design Bar and then place the cursor over any of the new elements. In this exercise. please do so before continuing. it is recommended. checked out worksets. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. In addition. 37 In the Save to Central dialog. Throughout the process.

14 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. Using a second Revit Architecture session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Architecture window. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. 8 Click the arrow next to the Open button. click Save As. and click Save. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. instructions are staggered. click Worksets. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. click Open. For training purposes. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. select all the User-Created worksets. 15 On the File menu. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. and proceed to Creating a local copy. specifically sequenced. 4 Click the General Tab and. one user has already created a local file. enter User 2. In addition. any referenced workset is opened but hidden.rvt. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open.Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. 16 Select the Exterior Shell workset. and click OK. click Options. under Username. and reset the Username to your computer login name. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. skip the following section. and click OK. 2 Start a new Revit Architecture session by double-clicking the Revit Architecture icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. 13 In the File Save Options dialog. This file is for your use only. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. In the following section of this exercise. and click OK. 11 On the File menu. return to the Settings dialog. and select Yes for Editable. 3 On the Settings menu. 7 In the Open dialog. This is a system setting. 10 In the Opening Worksets dialog. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. 730 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 9 Click Open. click Options. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. You now have a local copy of the project. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. User 2: Create a local file. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. and select Specify. consider that person to be User 1. select the central file. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. 12 In the Save As dialog.

it becomes the active workset. click Save to Central. open it now. expand Views (all). Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. 26 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. and double-click Level 1. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. and select Yes for Editable.You are now the owner of that workset. 22 Select the Interior Layout workset. 28 In the Save to Central dialog. 25 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. select the lower exterior wall. modify the building model. 27 On the File menu. 19 On the File menu. 31 Using the following illustration as a guide. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 731 . User 1: Check out worksets. expand Floor Plans.” 29 Click OK. 24 In the Project Browser. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. 21 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. 23 Click OK. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. and publish changes 18 User 1 should still have the local file open. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. 20 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. If it is not open. 17 Click OK. and double-click Level 1. expand Floor Plans. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 30 In the Project Browser. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. If you only have one workset checked out. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. expand Views (all). click Worksets.

right-click Copy of Level 1. and click Rename. and click OK. 45 In the Rename View dialog. click Save to Central. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. click Reload Latest. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. under Views (all). 44 In the Project Browser. Before adding any furniture. 34 In the Save to Central dialog. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. under Floor Plans. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. click Worksets. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset.” 35 Click OK. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. 43 In the Project Browser.” 39 Click OK. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. The changes User 2 made are apparent. click Save to Central. Click Yes. 732 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 38 In the Save to Central dialog. 32 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. When you save to central. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. and check out additional worksets 40 On the File menu. and click OK. However. 37 On the File menu.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. under Floor Plans. User 1: Reload latest worksets. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 33 On the File menu. you should create a furniture plan view. 36 Using the following illustration as a guide. 42 Select Furniture Layout. under Floor Plans. right-click Level 1. 41 On the File menu. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. 46 In the Project Browser. select Yes for Editable.

67 In the Save to Central dialog. select Project Standards. 64 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. click Component. click Save to Central. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. rather than Families. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. enter Exterior Wall . click Modify. click Edit/New. 52 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. such as Wall Types. 66 On the File menu. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 68 Click OK. click Save to Central. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture.47 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. 51 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 65 Click OK. 49 On the Design Bar. click the Worksets tab. 62 On the File menu. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. 54 In the Save to Central dialog. click Rename.” 55 Click OK. 57 Right-click the upper exterior wall. 61 Click OK 2 times. 50 On the View menu. the Visible by default option was not selected. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. Therefore. 63 In the Worksets dialog. and click inside any room. click Worksets. 59 In the Type Properties dialog. NOTE System families. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 56 On the File menu. under Show. choose any desk. click Visibility/Graphics. click Reload Latest. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 733 . 60 In the Rename dialog. 53 On the File menu. and click OK. 48 In the Type Selector.200mm. and click Element Properties. are placed under Project Standards. and click OK.

click Save As. and save 69 On the File menu. 734 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . you need to set up your central and local files. Checking out worksets. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). In the left pane of the Open dialog. In subsequent steps. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. select the following. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” In this exercise. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. leave this file open in its current state. At the appropriate point in this exercise. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. There are specific instructions for each user. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. and published their changes back to the central file. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. finished the previous workset exercises. This exercise requires two users and.rvt. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. User 1: Reload latest. you save the training file as a central file. leave this file open in its current state. select Reload Latest. and still have your local files open. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. and these problems are rectified. Save the training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. click Options. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. click Training Files. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. Each user checked out worksets. 3 In the Save As dialog. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them.If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. modified the building model. 70 On the File menu. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. and click OK. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 734. Each user must have network access to the central file. select Save to Central. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). throughout this training. 71 In the Save to Central dialog. As each of you work. In the final exercise of this tutorial. NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section.

This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. and reset the Username to your computer login name. click Save As. User 2: Create local file 11 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. and click Save. In addition. and select Specify. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Architecture by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. click Options. 12 On the File menu. 6 On the File menu. Set the Username to User 2. Next. and click OK. 18 In the Save As dialog. and click OK. 15 Click Open. 14 Click the arrow next to the Open button. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. and click OK. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 10 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. This is a system setting. click Open. 17 On the File menu. click Save As. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. select Make this a Central File after save. click Options. The central file should still be open. and click OK. click Options. and click OK. 13 In the Open dialog.4 In the File Save Options dialog. return to the Settings dialog. This is the local file for User 1. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. You have created a local file which is for your use only. and click Save. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. 5 Click Save. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. select the central file. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. On the Settings menu. 7 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. User 1: Create local file For the sake of simplicity. 9 In the File Save Options dialog. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 735 . 8 In the Save As dialog. ■ ■ ■ This Revit Architecture session is now set up for User 2.

27 Under Active Workset. and select Yes for Editable. 26 In the Worksets dialog. 30 On the left exterior wall. and click Editing Requests. User 2: Check out worksets 25 On the File menu. verify that Editable Only is cleared. and select Yes for Editable. After you submit the request. 24 Under Active Workset. and click Open. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. if any User-Created worksets are not open. and then click OK. select the second window from the top. At this point. double-click Level 1. click the File menu. click Worksets. Afterwards. click Worksets. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. select Interior Layout. 31 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. You are now the owner of that workset. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 28 In the Project Browser. 23 Select the Exterior Shell workset. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. 22 In the Worksets dialog. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. and then click OK. under Floor Plans. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 33 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. select them. 29 On the Options Bar. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. select Exterior Shell. select the Interior Layout workset.Checking out worksets Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. 736 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 32 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. User 1: Check out worksets 21 On the File menu. You are now the owner of that workset.

38 Click OK. select Save to Central. In this multi-user exercise. and notice the window is in the new location. to Local. User 2: Check for editability grant 37 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. and click OK. 40 In the Save to Central dialog. select the following. select the request submitted by User 2. you requested permission to edit the element. In this case. and the other user granted it. 35 Click Grant.34 In the Editing Requests dialog. click Close. User 1 and 2: Save to Central. A message informs you that your request has been granted. 36 Click Close. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 41 On the File menu. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 737 . and close 39 On the File menu. click Check Now.

738 .

The client has asked you to create various options. In this tutorial.Creating Multiple Design Options 21 When working with a building model. you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. 739 . These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. At any time in the design process. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. In addition. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. In this particular case. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. After you and the client agree on the final design. you can have multiple sets of design options. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. and each option set can have multiple schemes. For example. Using design options.

There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. In the second exercise. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. the roof and structure systems must work together. With the second option. and open Metric\m_Urban_House. you can edit it. click New. click Edit Selected. In the final exercise of this lesson. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 75 mm round columns and 50 mm round bars. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. under Option Set. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. the only available command is to create a new option set. TIP In this exercise. you design each of the structural options.In the first exercise in this lesson. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. therefore. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. 740 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . you learn how to manage and organize the design options. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu.rvt. 3 Select Option 1 (primary). you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. and click Close. 2 In the Design Options dialog. you set up multiple design option sets. make your final design decision. each is constructed for interchangeability. and delete the unwanted options from the project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). each with multiple design options. click Training Files. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. After you create a design option.

The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. click Modify. and the third column centered between the two.4 In the Project Browser. TIP To center the middle column. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. 5 On the View menu. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. In this case. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. 7 In the Type Selector. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. or add a dimension string between the columns. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. In the following illustration. add three columns. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. click 12 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. By selecting Multiple. select Round Column: 75mm Diameter. Creating the Structural Design Options | 741 . select: ■ ■ ■ . and double-click ROOF TERRACE. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. expand Views (all). 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. click Column. expand Floor Plans. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. 11 On the Edit toolbar.

TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. 742 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . Because of the size of the columns. 17 Zoom out and. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. When you are finished. 18 On the View toolbar. using the same technique. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. they are difficult to see in this view. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. A copy of the three selected columns is added. click . 16 Zoom in around the notch construction.

click Modify. Adding a beam is a two-click process. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns.Notice the 12 columns that you added. under Floor Plans. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. The first click specifies the beam start point. click Beam. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. Use the following illustration as a guide. Zoom in on the upper right column. you add the beams that span the columns. select Round Bar : 50mm. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. Creating the Structural Design Options | 743 . 19 In the Project Browser. double-click TOP OF CORE. Next. and click at its center to set the beam start point. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 21 In the Type Selector. The second click specifies the end of the beam. In it. 23 On the Design Bar.

25 On the Edit toolbar. click . select: ■ ■ ■ . 744 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . and click the center point. Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. 28 Zoom out. click 26 On the Options Bar. 30 On the View toolbar. move down to the next set of columns. zoom into the left column. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. and select the center of the column to add a copy.

43 In the Rename dialog. 32 In the Design Options dialog. and click OK. click Rename. and click OK. 41 Under Option Set. and click OK. not a new option set. 34 In the Design Options dialog. under Option Set. select Option 1 (primary). 39 Select Option Set 1 and. click New. click Rename. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. enter Brackets for New. 37 Select Option 2 and. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. enter Roofing for New. enter Beam for New. 36 In the Rename dialog. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. click New. under Option.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. Creating the Structural Design Options | 745 . Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. 46 Under Option. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. under Option. 38 In the Rename dialog. name the option Louvers. click Rename. click Rename. 40 In the Rename dialog. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. 33 Click Finish Editing. and click OK. and click OK. click Rename. 45 Under Roofing. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. enter Structure for New. click New. under Option. under Option. There should now be two roofing design options. under Option Set.

under Structure. you create the second design option. 50 In the Design Options dialog. 52 Click Close. it will resemble the following illustration. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. 746 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 53 In the Project Browser. 48 Under Option. This allows you to more easily manage the project. select Edit Selected. select Option 2. click Rename. double-click ROOF TERRACE. and click OK.47 Under Roofing. under Floor Plans. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. name the option Sunscreen. 51 Under Edit. When finished. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. Under Now Editing. select Beam.

click Align. Creating the Structural Design Options | 747 . Using the Align tool requires two clicks.55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Refer to the following illustration. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. 56 In the Type Selector. click Component. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. select M_Roof Beam. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. The second click represents the plane that is moved. 58 On the Tools menu.

click Modify.60 After aligning the beam. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. 748 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . on the Edit toolbar. 62 Select the beam and. Click to indicate the end point of the move. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. The first click sets the move start point. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. 61 On the Design Bar. The second click represents the move end point. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment.

68 In the Design Options dialog.rvt. click Finish Editing.Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. name the file. 67 On the Tools menu. 66 On the View toolbar. which is visible by default. That is because the brackets option is set to primary. Creating the Structural Design Options | 749 . and click Save. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. Notice that even before you close the dialog. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. click . the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. 69 Click Close. click Save As. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. m_Urban_House-in progress. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. 70 On the File menu. you need this file in its current state. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory.

The dimensions shown are for training purposes. 10 Referring to the following illustration. 3 In the Design Options dialog. 750 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . the other for beams. and double-click TOP OF CORE. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. under Roofing. 6 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Tools menu. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. 5 Click Close. expand Floor Plans. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. You should have named it m_Urban_House-in progress. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. you set up multiple design option sets. click Component. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. click Edit Selected. In the next exercise. With the second option. The first option. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. you design each of the roofing options. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. expand Views (all). select Rafter 50mm x 250mm. each with multiple design options to pick from. open it now. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. a Louver system.rvt. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. If you need to add dimensions. 4 Under Edit. select Louvers (primary). delete them after the rafter is in place. place the rafter 900 mm inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 900 mm. The second roofing system. do so now. Under Now Editing. is constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. Sunscreen. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options.In this exercise. 8 In the Type Selector.

12 Select the rafter you added previously. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 On the Options Bar. enter 11750 mm for Length. 16 On the Options Bar.11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You are creating an array of five rafters that are 990 mm apart. Select Constrain. Enter 5 for Number. 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. click Array. Select 2nd for Move To. 15 On the Edit menu. click . Creating the Roof System Design Options | 751 . under Other. click Modify. click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. and click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate.

Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created. when the listening dimension displays.18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and. and press ENTER. 752 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . enter 990.

26 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click Component. Enter 34 for Number. and click Array. Select 2nd for Move To.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration. and select the louver you just placed. click Modify. click . click the Edit menu. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 753 . 22 On the Design Bar. 27 For the array starting point. Select Constrain. enter 5475 mm for Length. under Other. select Louver 50mm x 150mm. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. 25 With the louver still selected. 23 On the Options Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 In the Type Selector. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system.

click . when the listening dimension displays. and. Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 300 mm apart. and press Enter. enter 300.28 Move the cursor vertically downward. 29 On the View toolbar. 754 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options .

under Roofing. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. and then click Close. Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. and double-click West. click Edit Selected. under Edit. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. 34 In the Project Browser. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. In this case. click Lines. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. expand Elevations. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. 39 On the Design Bar. click Finish Editing.The louver roof system is complete. Therefore. 37 In the Work Plane dialog. 36 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 755 . select Sunscreen. click . the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. 31 In the Design Options dialog. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Click OK. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. 33 Under Editing. and click OK. 30 On the Tools menu. 40 On the Options Bar. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof.

43 On the Design Bar. NOTE As you sketch the arcs. Under Constraints. click Properties. Under Constraints. 46 On the Tools menu. then you can modify it through the dimension. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. click Finish Sketch. the top of the next column on the right. 41 Select the top of the left column. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. enter 5800 mm for Extrusion End. The arcs should connect. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. 44 In the Element Properties dialog.This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. click . try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. then the center arc. click Trim/Extend. The first two points define the ends of the line. enter 300 mm for Extrusion Start. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. The roof sketch must be a continuous line. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. Select the right arc. 48 On the Design Bar. and the third point defines the arc. You will fix this in a later step. 756 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 45 Click OK. 49 On the View toolbar.

2 In the Project Browser. right-click {3D}. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. under Edit. was constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. you need this file in its current state. make it part of the building model. under Views (all). 4 In the Project Browser. you designed each of the roofing options. tertiary. The second roofing system. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. click Finish Editing. right-click the 3D View Primary Option. Managing Design Options | 757 . a Louver system. enter Primary Option. The first option. under Views (all). click Save. Managing Design Options In this exercise.The louver roof system is complete. Sunscreen. under 3D Views. expand 3D Views. and last options. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. do so now. You have completed the sunscreen roof system. 52 On the File menu. secondary. 51 In the Design Options dialog. and click OK. and then click Close. 3 In the Rename View dialog. you select a design. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. and delete the discarded design options. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. After exploring the combinations. 50 On the Tools menu. and click Duplicate. and click Rename. In this exercise. you must create a named 3D view for the primary.

Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser. click the Design Options tab. Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. 11 On the View menu. double-click Secondary Option. 9 Click OK.5 Right-click each of the copies. under Views (all). under 3D Views. and click OK. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. click Visibility/Graphics. and click Rename. 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click the Design Options tab. 7 On the View menu. under Views (all). under 3D Views. 10 In the Project Browser. 13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. 758 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . double-click Primary Option. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Visibility/Graphics.

At this point. click Visibility/Graphics. 18 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. click the Design Options tab. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. under 3D Views. and click OK. 15 On the View menu. 19 On the View menu. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. under Views (all). 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. click the Design Options tab. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. In this case. Managing Design Options | 759 . In your design options. 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. double-click Last Option. double-click Tertiary Option. 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.14 In the Project Browser. and click OK. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. under Views (all).

select Beam. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. 24 Under Option. you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. click Delete to remove the views that used options. made it part of the building model. After exploring the combinations. since you no longer need them. and deleted the discarded design options. An alert is displayed. click Save. In this exercise. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 31 In the alert dialog. 26 Under Option Set. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. 760 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. 29 Select Roofing. click Delete. under Structure. but should be accepted as part of the building model.22 On the Tools menu. click Yes. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. 27 In the alert dialog. 23 In the Design Options dialog. The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. 33 In the Design Options dialog. select Make Primary. click Yes. the beam option becomes part of the model. The set is deleted. 35 On the File menu. click Accept Primary. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. 25 Select Structure. Because the client has selected the design option. This was the client choice for structural. 30 Under Option Set. the current primaries are no longer options. click Close. you selected a design. double-click Primary Option.

Project Phasing 22 In any project. then add new walls and doors in a different location. In the lesson and exercises that follow. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. demolish existing walls and doors. In the second exercise. Using Phasing In the lesson and exercises that follow. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. For the client. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. You create new phases. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe the differences in the phase-specific room schedules. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. This changes room definition and total building model area. demolish existing construction. 761 . and then add new building model elements. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. complete with schedules. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. In the second exercise. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. You create new phases.

4 Click Cancel. and open Common\c_Phasing. If you wish to do so. This means that all building model elements. under Phasing. and None is selected for Phase Demolished. During the demolition and renovation process. and click OK. When you create a new project. As you add new elements to the building model. In the Element Properties dialog. and double-click Level 1. are visible in this view. 5 Select any of the exterior walls. If you change the view property settings and the phase definitions within a template file. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. click (Element Properties). you work in a simple model that requires renovation. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. under Phasing. You can control the default phases and view phase setting by changing the settings within a template. expand Views (all). notice that New Construction is selected for Phase Created. Any new elements that you add to the building model are assigned to the New Construction phase. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. you create new phase-specific views in order to visualize the changes that you make to the model. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 Click Cancel. expand Floor Plans. View current phase conditions 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 6 On the Options Bar. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. go to the Settings menu. regardless of phase. You create new phases and phase filters and modify graphic overrides. define the units. 762 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . This phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Phasing Your Model In this exercise. two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction.rvt. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. then new building model elements are assigned to a phase according to those settings. you do not need to change the project units to metric. click Modify. click Project Units.

This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. 10 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. and click OK. right-click Level 1. you modify their view properties to make each view phase specific. Phasing Your Model | 763 . you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. enter Level 1 . Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection. enter Level 1 . You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. 18 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Rename dialog. and click Rename.Existing. 17 Click No. click Modify. 12 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. Because this is a renovation project. it requires a plan view for demolition and for new construction. for Phase Created. and click OK. and click OK. under Floor Plans. 19 In the Project Browser. TIP If this were a multi-story building. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Create phase-specific views 15 In the Project Browser. under Phasing.Demo. are highlighted in red. select Existing. Because this is a phase-specific view. including the door tags. you may want to select the building model in a 3D view to ensure you capture all of the components. and click Rename. 11 In the Filter dialog. clear Door Tags. click . all of the building model elements. Notice that the line style of the walls and doors is displayed as gray rather than black because of the phase and phase filter settings in the view properties. After you create the views. 13 In the Element Properties dialog.Existing. and click OK. right-click Copy of Level 1 . 14 On the Design Bar.Existing. click (Filter Selection).Change the phase of the existing building model elements 9 In the drawing area. right-click Level 1 . 20 In the Rename dialog. draw a selection window around the entire building model to select all of the elements in it. After you release the mouse button.

You should now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and the planned demolition. however. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements: New. Because of this time relationship. you use phase filters to define which building model elements display in a particular view. select Overridden. 22 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Notice that the line pattern is still gray. 26 In the Phasing dialog. under Floor Plans. 27 Click New. select Existing. Existing. You may need to zoom in to see this. for Phase. View graphic overrides 30 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. new construction occurs after existing construction. enter Composite Plan. a graphic override is used to make “older” elements use the gray line style. and Temporary. Graphic Overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override. Demolished. click the Phase Filters tab. 764 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . and click OK. 24 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1 .Demo. under New. The line style of the walls and doors returns to black. 28 Under Filter Name. 21 In the Project Browser. On a logical time line. under Floor Plans. You can change the cut and projection line color for a demolished object. 29 For Composite Plan. double-click Level 1 . under Phasing. Phase status is time-dependent. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. Define phase filters 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. Next. to which all the building model elements belong. This view uses a different line style because the phase property of this view is set to New Construction. In this case. Later in this exercise.Existing. you modify these settings. There are five default phase filters.

under Cut ➤ Lines. its display changes to a red dashed line. 33 In the Line Graphics dialog. 41 Referring to the walls that display as dashed lines in the following illustration. As you click each wall. 32 In the Demolished row. 35 Click OK twice. Phasing Your Model | 765 . select the line style. The cursor is displayed as a hammer. select a lighter blue. Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. Add new construction 43 In the Project Browser. There are two ways to demolish an element.Demo. Notice that the demolished walls continue to display. click the value for Color. 36 Using the same method. select the interior walls one at a time. 39 In the Phasing dialog. Change cut lines and patterns for new objects 37 Change the line style for New ➤ Cut ➤ Lines to blue. 38 For New ➤ Cut ➤ Patterns. click (Demolish). or you can use the demolish tool. you demolish all elements hosted by it. You can select it and change its Phase parameter to Demolished. This is because the view phase filter is set to Show All. When you demolish the host. select Demolished. double-click Level 1 . Demolish building model elements 40 On the Tools toolbar. That is because doors are wall-hosted elements. 34 In the Color dialog. 42 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. select red.31 Under Phase Status. under Floor Plans. Next. This was the display override that was set for demolished objects in the previous steps. click OK. double-click Level 1 . specify red for the Projection/Surface line style for the Demolished phase.Existing. you begin demolition.

54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 48 Using the following illustration as a guide. Notice this view still displays the original walls and doors. 45 In the Element Properties dialog.44 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. select Sgl Flush: 34" x 84". 50 In the Type Selector. under Phasing. select Show Previous + New. 52 Open Level 1 . click Wall. and then add four short vertical walls between it and the upper exterior wall. and click OK. 55 In the Element Properties dialog. for Phase Filter. for Phase Filter. 47 In the Type Selector. under Phasing.Existing. and click OK. select Composite Plan for Phase Filter. 51 Add a door leading into each room. click Door. 766 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing .Demo. add a long horizontal wall. select Basic Wall: Interior . The demolished walls no longer display.4 7/8" Partition (1-hr). 46 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Click the control arrows to adjust the opening and face directions. 53 Open Level 1 . 49 On the Design Bar.

New. 61 On the View Control Bar. because the phase filter is set to Show All. This filter displays all original components that were not demolished (Show Previous) and all new components added to the building model (+ New). 60 On the View toolbar. 57 In the Project Browser.Demo.New. spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls. Phasing Your Model | 767 . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. The renovated building model plan is displayed. right-click Level 1 . 59 Open Level 1 . You could create multiple 3D views that display each phase just as you did with the floor plans. click (Default 3D View). Notice that all building model elements display using the composite filter. 62 If necessary. All elements are displayed in this view. which are displayed as red. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. new is shown in blue. and existing shows as half-tone.The composite plan phase filter uses graphic overrides and shows demolished as red dashed. 58 Rename the copy to Level 1 . regardless of phase. Create a new construction view 56 Change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + Demo. and change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + New.

the rooms change in both definition and size. you created a building model with three distinct phases and created views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase.Demo. They are the same walls that display as red in the 3D view. and locations change depending on the phase of the project. and open Common\c_Phase_Specific_Room-tags. and double-click Level 1 . define the units. Notice that this view is the original building model. go to the Settings menu. expand Floor Plans. As the renovation process continues. you can do so at this time. In this view. demolition. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Existing. If you wish to save this file.New. you can see the new walls added to the building model. 768 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. and the information that each room tag reports adjusts accordingly. and new construction. Add room tags 1 In the Project Browser. click Project Units. sizes. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Floor plans have been created to display each phase of the project: existing conditions. In this view.Notice that all the elements are displayed using the material defined by the graphic overrides. If you wish to do so. 63 Close the file. In the next exercise. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags In this exercise. The three level 1 floor plan views show the progression of the renovation. room tags report information based on the phase of the view in which the rooms were added. All room boundaries are phase-specific. and click OK. You can also see that the room quantities. you do not need to change the project units to metric. you learn how to use phase-specific room tags. In this exercise. click Training Files. 2 Open Level 1 . you add room tags to a building model that has multiple phases. 3 Open Level 1 .rvt. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. expand Views (all). the walls marked for demolition display using a dashed line style. therefore.

click Room Tag. Notice that the two rooms in the lower corners are identical to both the existing phase and the new phase. 10 Open Level 1 . and maximize the view. Phase 0 is for existing conditions and Phase 1 is for demolition and new construction. yet they have different room numbers. click in each room to create a room and place a room tag. click Room. 6 Open Level 1 . click Room. 5 Click OK. Use the following illustration as a guide.Existing. notice that there are two phases defined in this project. In the Phasing dialog.4 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 13 Open Level 1 . 11 On the Design Bar. click in each room as you move to the right. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags | 769 . 12 Starting in the room in the upper left corner.New.Demo.

The two schedule views tile.15 Using the following illustration as a guide. expand Schedules/Quantities. In this case. click Close Hidden Windows. you added room tags to various floor plans that are assigned different phases. That is because the same phase is assigned to both views. click Tile. 770 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . View phase-specific room schedules. both views are assigned the same phase yet have different phase filters. room information differs based upon the phase of the view the tags are in. 18 Open Room Schedule .New Construction. You also opened two schedules to observe how the room information is reported by phase. 17 On the Window menu. This is because the additional interior walls in the new construction occupy more space than the original. Notice that in each phase-specific schedule. 16 In the Project Browser. 19 On the Window menu. notice the new construction has 25 less total square feet than the original building model.Existing. The room tag command allows you to tag existing rooms. and double-click Room Schedule . In addition. In this exercise. Notice the room tags in this view get the same room tag numbers as the tags in the view displaying new construction. 20 Close the file. add a room tag to the three rooms adjacent to the lower exterior wall.

You position the building models on the site plan. and manage the links throughout the project. In these situations. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. modify their visibility. This maximizes efficiency. In the final lesson. In this tutorial.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 23 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed. performance. 771 . you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. Comparison of alternatives on a site. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures. A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area.

NOTE The center of a Revit Architecture model is the center of the model geometry. and the other is a townhouse. and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise. Automatic placement options: ■ Auto . You position the building models on the site. modify their visibility. NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence. Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project. 772 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .Linking Building Models In this lesson. You link two building models to the project. you open a project in which only site components have been developed. One building model is a condominium. This center changes as the footprint of your model changes. you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit Architecture 2009 to automatically place it.Center to Center: Revit Architecture places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model. you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed.

you can do so. This option is grayed out. this option will place the link at a predefined location.By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer. click Open. ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. RELATED See the lesson. with write permission. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . 4 On the File menu. you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable. c_Townhouse. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking. Select c_Site. Auto . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 773 . use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location. in the Model Linking folder that you created. All three files now reside. 2 On the File menu. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step. c_Condo_Complex. click Open.rvt. right-click. click Training Files. Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu. 8 Clear Read-only. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only. Click Open. ■ ■ Manual . 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder. NOTE Revit Architecture projects have an internal coordinate system. and click OK.Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit Architecture model. however.Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor. Otherwise. and save the file there. and open Common\c_Site. select the three files. NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder. 5 On the File menu. this system is not exposed to the user. and click Properties. click Close. Manual .Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit Architecture Files. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site.■ Auto . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 789. click Save As.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location. This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used.

and make your changes. If you wish to do so. and double-click Level 1. For Positioning. Because model linking and sharing coordinates are not dependent on project units. you can go to the Settings menu. 12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex.Origin to Origin. expand Floor Plans. Notice the blue detail lines. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites.NOTE The three project files used in this lesson use imperial units of measurement. 11 On the File menu. 10 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). select Auto . 13 Click Open. you do not need to change the project units to metric. 774 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click Project Units. click Import/Link ➤ Revit.

17 For the move endpoint. click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model. 15 On the Edit toolbar. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 775 . Move the condo complex building model 14 Select the linked building model. Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex. After you select it. similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects. The first click specifies the move start point. click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it. The second click specifies the move endpoint. click (Move). Standard move commands work with linked building models. 16 For the move start point.The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model. The Move command requires two clicks.rvt displays in the Type Selector. The linked model moves as one object.

18 On the View menu. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 20 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. For Positioning.Origin to Origin. the linked file displays within the confines of the blue detail lines. select Auto . click Import/Link ➤ Revit. Link the townhouse building model 19 On the File menu. 21 Click Open.After you specify the location to move to. and select c_Townhouse. 776 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .

24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and. you first specify the rotation start point. and click to specify the end of the rotation. click to specify the rotation start point. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 777 . and then click to specify the end of the rotation. when the vertical line displays. the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise. click (Rotate). In this case. 25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise.The townhouse building model displays above the site model. To rotate an object. Rotate the townhouse 22 Zoom in around the townhouse model and select it. 23 On the Edit toolbar.

778 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .The rotated townhouse should resemble the following illustration. This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left corner of the site model. click (Move). 28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint. Move the townhouse 26 On the Edit toolbar. 27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point. Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint of the townhouse.

and the second click specifies the copy-to point. Copy the townhouse 29 On the Edit toolbar. 30 For the starting point. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 779 . The first click specifies the start point. select the upper-right corner of the townhouse. The Copy command works much like the Move command. 31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point. click (Copy).The townhouse is located within its required footprint.

36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B. enter Townhouse A. and click OK. 780 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . NOTE After you rotate the townhouse. click Rotate. click . 33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left. under Identity data. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. 32 On the Edit menu. if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines. for Name.A copy of the townhouse displays on the right side of the site project. 34 On the Options Bar. 37 On the View toolbar. use the Move command to make any adjustments. and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees. click (Default 3D View).

Repositioning Linked Building Models | 781 . NOTE If this is the first time you are using the SteeringWheels. you reposition the townhouses in respect to their elevation. If you have not completed the previous exercise. you modify the elevation of the townhouses. In the next exercise. Modify the vertical position of the townhouses 1 On the View toolbar. click (SteeringWheels). In this exercise. After linking the files. click Try Me for the Full Nav Large Wheel. When you originally linked the files. you need this project file open and in this view. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. you linked two separate Revit Architecture 2009 models into a site model. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files. you modify their vertical position so that the townhouses sit correctly on the site. click Save. click and hold Orbit. In this exercise. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. you rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the site development. Repositioning Linked Building Models In this exercise. they were placed too low within the site topography. 2 On the SteeringWheels. do so before continuing.38 On the File menu.

In this case. and click to select it. TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project. 7 On the Tools toolbar. press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays in the status bar. Click the Revit Links tab. This is apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface. click (Align). If you experience difficulty finding the Level1 : Reference. 8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project. and then select the plane that you want to align. When using the Align command.rvt. This process ensures that you are aligning to the level marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project. 3 In the Project Browser. and click to select the line. In the steps that follow. clear Visibility for the c_Condo_Complex. when it highlights. you may want to hide the Condo Complex from the view. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. you align the Ground Floor level to Level 1 of the site plan. Remember to turn on visibility of the Condo Complex after you have completed this task. To do this. you first select the plane you want to align to.Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface. 782 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this project. and double-click South. 5 Place the cursor over the townhouse and notice that. 4 Zoom in around the townhouse on the left. move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the Townhouse project. 6 Zoom in closer on the lower half of the townhouse and notice the ground floor level of the townhouse is 11 feet below Level 1 of the site project. under Views (all). the status bar displays the name of the linked file. and click OK. expand Elevations.

This would over-constrain the model.Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. 11 Return to the South elevation view. (SteeringWheels). 14 On the SteeringWheels. click and hold Orbit. align the Ground Floor level of the remaining townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project. double-click North. under Elevations. click (Default 3D View). click 13 On the View toolbar. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 783 . Also notice the option displays for you to lock the alignment. 10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. Both townhouses should be at the proper level. 12 On the View toolbar. 15 On the File menu. 9 In the Project Browser. Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. click Save.

the defaults are set to By host view for all options. By host view matches the display to the settings of the current active project view. expand c_Townhouse. 9 Under Visibility. scroll down and clear Levels. you modify the visibility settings of the linked files within the site project. you modify how the linked files display within the host project. In this exercise. do so before continuing. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a linked project or an instance of the linked project. click Visibility/Graphics. NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file. When you link a file. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility In this exercise. and the halftone settings for each linked project. By linked view matches the display to the settings of the linked project view.rvt. click the Revit Links tab. click Custom. click OK. 10 Click OK. you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project.rvt. click By Host View. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only. 4 Under Visibility. 784 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . In the next exercise. 6 On the Basics tab of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. 5 Under Display Settings for c_Townhouse. under Elevations. Notice the Level lines for both townhouses no longer display. double-click South. each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those differences within the host project. you can independently control the visibility settings. 7 Click the Annotations Categories tab. If you have not completed the previous exercise. then the other pages on the RVT Link Display Settings dialog may be set to By host View. If the Basics page is set to Custom. Modify visibility settings 1 In the Project Browser. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project file within another project. 8 For Annotation Categories. The townhouse level lines still display in the remaining elevation views.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. Notice that you can change visibility settings of an entire linked file or selected instances of a linked file. you need this project file open and in this view. display settings. 2 On the View menu. By linked view. select <Custom>. As you can see. or Custom. detail level.

click Visibility/Graphics. Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness. click Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. 15 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Display Settings. you can apply halftone to the entire linked project or individual instances of the model. Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model. 20 For c_Townhouse. 16 Under Visibility. you can independently set the detail level for each model category for each link on a per view basis. In this case.12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. or fine. 21 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. clear the Levels display for c_Condo_Complex. Apply halftone 13 In the Project Browser. Notice both townhouses display in halftone. 22 Click the Model Categories tab. you can also apply halftone to individual categories. 14 On the View menu. With linked files. Detail levels of a linked file 18 On the View menu. You can click the value for Detail Level. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility | 785 . click the Revit Links tab. 24 Click OK. By default. medium.rvt. 23 In the Model categories list. under Floor Plans. and then set the detail level to coarse.rvt. double-click Level 1. no detail level changes are required. click By Host View. the detail level for the linked townhouse project is set to By Host View. Using the Custom option. select Custom. on the Basics tab. click the Revit Links tab. expand c_Townhouse. This means that the detail level of the linked file is matched to the detail level of the current active project view. 17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project. By selecting custom under Model Categories. 19 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. select <Custom>.rvt.

In most cases. 31 On the File menu. In this exercise. In this case. However. 25 On the Revit Links tab. This means that the phase named New Construction for the linked building model is displayed. you manage the links within the host project by unloading and reloading the linked projects. Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings. with Show All as the phase filter applied to the link. click Save. select Floor Plan: Ground Floor for Linked view. By default. With the Show All filter applied. 29 Click OK. 27 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. and temporary components in that particular phase (New Construction) are displayed. Notice the Phase and Phase filter specified are By host view. click Custom for the Townhouse link. 26 Under Display Settings. Managing Linked Building Models In this exercise. where you need to specify a different view range so that all the building model plan views cut at the same height. you need this project file open and in this view. demolished. the host view specifies New Construction for the Phase and Show All for the phase filter. the view range of a linked project uses the current view of the host project to define its view range.rvt. you manage the linked files. the townhouse view range now uses the same view range defined within the Floor Plan: Ground Floor of the original linked file. select c_Townhouse. existing. All other components are grayed out. click OK. If the host file is closed and one of the linked files is modified. 786 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . on a sloped site for instance. those modifications are reloaded into the host project when it is reopened. you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the level lines and applying halftone in a plan view. there are situations. and phase filter of a specific link. In this case. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project. a connection to the linked project continues to exist. 28 Select By linked view for View range. In the next exercise. phase.Modify display settings of linked files You can use display settings to control the view range. You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it would cut through the building model at the same height as the other linked building model. all new. this is preferable. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Visibility. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial.

In a shared coordinate environment. click Yes. Notice the Loaded.rvt. In general. The Loaded option for that linked file is now clear. you can use the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project. Managing Linked Building Models | 787 . any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked file rather than the host project. The default path type is Relative. If you have not completed the previous exercise. The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked file is on a network where multiple users need access to it. select c_Condo_Complex. do so before continuing. 4 Under Linked File. They supply information regarding the links. 6 At the confirmation prompt. 7 Click OK. you should use a relative path rather than an absolute.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked file to a new location. 2 In the Manage Links dialog. click the Revit tab. The buttons at the bottom of the dialog are now active. NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates. Unload and reload links 1 On the File menu. If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new directory. Notice that the condo complex link no longer displays in the host project. the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link in the absolute path specified. and Saved Path fields are read only. the link is maintained. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute. You learn more about this in the next lesson. NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. click Manage Links. 3 Under Path Type. Locations Not Saved. As links are moved to new locations in the host project. 5 Click Unload.

you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files. expand Revit Links. However. click the arrow next to the Open button. ■ ■ ■ TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file. you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled. and select Specify.TIP In the Manage Links dialog. it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the host file opens. In the Import/Link RVT dialog. NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser. Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location. When you initially place the link. You can then specify the additional worksets you need opened. you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different location. Linking building models with Worksharing enabled In some cases. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked files. you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset. To do this. 8 In the Project Browser. you should consider the following: ■ Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model. 788 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . the link is not loaded. go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled building model can be linked within multiple host projects. 9 On the File menu. In these cases. and click Reload. Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the link instance. you must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. link instances can be reassigned to different worksets. you can specify which worksets to open after the link is made. Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked files. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens. This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. right-click c_Condo_Complex. both the link symbol and the link instance are placed in the active workset. Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated.rvt. In general. If you choose not to open that workset. the specific worksets opened in each host project must be identical. click Save As.

you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models In this lesson. and save it as an RVT file. When you share coordinates between projects. This lesson requires the completion of the lesson Linking Building Models on page 772. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise. The host file consists primarily of site components. it is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects. you are establishing a shared origin point. you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects. When Revit project views are exported to DWG. TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files. the host project Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models | 789 . If you have not completed the previous lesson.10 In the Save As dialog. When you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project (the host project). In this exercise. you publish the coordinates from a host project file to two different buildings that are linked to that project. In the next lesson. NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson. you can keep track of the multiple locations in which a linked building model may reside. project or shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog. you learn how to share coordinates between project files so that you can correctly locate building models with respect to each other. When used in conjunction with model linking. In most cases where the host project consists primarily of site components and the linked projects contain the building models. If you intend to complete the next lesson now. do so before continuing. leave the project file open in its current view. In essence. you are deciding which coordinate system will be used by the two files. name the file Site_Project. and the resulting project files. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. you can choose to use the coordinates of either the host project or the linked project. Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates In this exercise.

and the resulting project files. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Publish Coordinates. This sends the coordinate information to the linked project so that its internal coordinate system matches the host project. you must now select a linked project to publish coordinates to. 2 On the Tools menu. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Select Site_Project. You may want to do this in a case when the link refers to a DWG that has an established coordinate system that you want the host project to adopt. you can publish the coordinates of the linked files. the host file acquires the coordinates of a specified linked file. As indicated in the Status Bar.rvt and click Open. 3 In the drawing area. If you have closed the project. If you have not completed the lesson. click the Condo Complex.coordinates are used. You can also acquire coordinates when working in the host project. Linking Building Models on page 772. In this case. open it before continuing. Publish coordinates 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. It is the building model in the upper center of the host project. click Open. 790 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson. do so before continuing. This ensures all the linked building models define their position with respect to the site data. When you are working in the host project. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial.

If you have not completed the exercise.4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. do so before continuing. This makes it possible to use the same building file to represent identical buildings on a site. However. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 791 . you specify and save the two townhouse locations. then the location becomes saved in the linked file. but can have multiple additional locations. move the cursor over the left townhouse and. and click OK. Lot B. These three locations can be named Lot A. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project files. Each of these lots is simply a different position for the same house design. You also relocate the shared origin of the project. if coordinates are published from the host to the linked project. Until coordinates are shared between the link and the host. Both projects now share a coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system. click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. In this exercise. click to select it. and Lot C. This location is defined as being a specified location with respect to the origin of the Host. select Location 1. Specify a townhouse location 1 In the drawing area of the floor plan Level 1. 5 On the Design Bar. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates When a Revit Architecture 2009 model is linked into a host project. it is placed at a specific location. even though both models originate from one linked file. Linked files using shared coordinates must have at least one defined location. You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. An example of a linked file with many locations is a prototype model of a house that is placed on 3 different lots. when the edges highlight. On the Status Bar. notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Architecture is waiting for you to select another link. you need this project file open and in this view. Each of the locations can then be saved within the linked file for reference. this location is not saved outside of the host project.

In the Choose Location dialog. click 13 In the Element Properties dialog. This is a one-time operation. under Instance Parameters. . 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 12 On the Options Bar. select Move instance to. click . 7 In the Rename dialog. It is only necessary to reconcile coordinates once. click Rename. Under Record selected instance as being positioned at location. After a link instance is assigned a shared location. Constrain a link to a specific location 11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project. Record the current position as a location.2 On the Options Bar. under Instance Parameters. notice the Shared Location value is Not Shared. Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the linked models. click Change. and click OK. When constraining a link to a location. notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish coordinates. 5 In the Share Coordinates dialog: ■ ■ Select Publish the shared coordinate system. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. enter Lot A for New. This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared. a dialog displays telling you to reconcile the coordinates. This means that you need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. 6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 9 In the Select Location dialog. and click OK. click Not Shared for Shared Location. changing the position of that instance can affect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file. click Not Shared for Shared Location. 792 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click Reconcile. 4 Under Value. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. notice the Shared Location value is now Lot A. 14 In the Choose Location dialog. you have only two choices: ■ ■ Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use.

notice the Locations Not Saved option for the townhouse project is no longer selected. By relocating a project. click Manage Links. Relocate a project 29 On the View menu. ignore the warning. or cancel the action. This is because you cannot choose a location where an instance link already exists. The second click specifies the move endpoint. NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files. 26 Click OK. 22 In the Manage Links dialog. 23 Click Save Locations. click Duplicate. You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location. make sure Lot B is selected. the active location position is moved. 19 In the Select Location dialog. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. you cannot redefine its location. You are given the opportunity to save the new location. Because Lot A is currently in use. and click OK. Notice the OK button is still not active. click the Revit tab. 30 On the Tools menu. 31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol. 17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. select Save. When you relocate a project. click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. select the second option. 15 In the Choose Location dialog. click OK. and click OK. and then select the townhouse project. 28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B. You created the Lot A location in previous steps. it is not automatically saved within the linked file. 16 Click Change. When you release the mouse button. You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it. The first click specifies the move start point. When you create a location. Record current position as. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 793 . a warning displays. and click OK. To explicitly save a location. click OK. 18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B.Notice the OK button is not active. you essentially move the origin of the shared coordinates. 27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. enter Lot B for Name. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. This is a two-click process. you are prompted to save the locations to the linked files. Save locations 21 On the File menu. 25 In the Manage Links dialog. you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there. although it may appear that the linked files are moving. and the left townhouse resides at that location.

Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up. click Save. 35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. and click OK. select Save. click Close.32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin. In this exercise. NOTE In the following exercise. you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. and the linked projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin. 794 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 33 On the Edit menu. You have also learned how to relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects. You cannot work on a host file and one of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Architecture. 36 On the File menu. click Undo to return the origin to its original position. 34 On the File menu. you work in one of the linked projects.

Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. The current active location is Lot A. In addition. Link a project 1 In the Project Browser.rvt file. Select c_Condo_Complex. When opening the linked file. select Auto . double-click 1st Floor. the linked file contains information about its location with respect to the host. if other models were linked into the same host. If you have not completed the exercises. It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project file.By Shared Coordinates. 3 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. This project is currently linked to the Site_Project. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. do so before continuing. you could link them in and have them retain their correct position. under Floor Plans. In this exercise. the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project. 2 On the File menu. The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. you work on the townhouse building model and modify its location. For Positioning. Because this building model only has one named location. it is placed automatically within the host project. 4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. click Open. Also. Click Open.rvt file. Working with a Linked Building Model | 795 . you can select which of the defined locations is the active location that you would like to work on.Working with a Linked Building Model After a file has been linked into a host and its coordinates are shared. Select c_Townhouse and click Open.

enter Lot C. you manage the shared locations. These new locations can be assigned later within a host file. In the next exercise. select True North for Orientation. 6 Select Lot B. do so before continuing. Managing Shared Locations The Manage Place and Locations command allows you to quickly create new location names or rename existing ones. If you have not completed the exercises. You loaded a linked file into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes. 7 Click OK. click Manage Place and Locations. and click OK. you create a new location. click Manage Place and Locations. In this exercise. orient a view to true north. and click Make Current. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. under Graphics. 4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. Notice that Lot A is the current active location. 3 In the Name dialog. click View Properties. 2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 796 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . you need this project file open and in this view. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. click Duplicate. you can select Lot C if necessary. and use the Report Shared Coordinates tool. and click OK. Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance. click OK. Notice that the condo complex link has repositioned itself as though the townhouse was on Lot B. In this exercise. Orient a view to true north 5 On the View menu. Manage locations 1 On the Settings menu. In the host file.Change the active location 5 On the Settings menu. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. you worked within a project that is linked within another project.

you schedule components of the host file and of all linked files. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Report Shared Coordinates. click Close. This command allows you to determine the location of elements and points in the model with respect to the shared coordinate origin.7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. If you have not completed the exercise. do so before continuing. Notice that the orientation of the model resembles the site project. In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. You rotated a view to true north and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. Create a door schedule 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 797 . Select Site_Project. notice the coordinates display in regards to the direction and distance to the origin. Scheduling Components of Linked Files In this exercise. On the Options Bar. 10 On the File menu. 9 Click any component or in any location on the drawing area. Report shared coordinates 8 On the Tools menu. you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool. You can save the file if you wish. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial.rvt and click Open. click Open.

6 Add the remaining fields in the following order: ■ ■ ■ Family and Type Comments Cost 7 Select Include elements in linked files. select Count.2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. select Doors. 798 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . under Category. and click Add. click the Fields tab. click Schedule/Quantities. Select the fields to display in the door schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. 5 Under Available fields.

In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project. and then click OK twice. right-click Door Schedule. Sort schedule data 9 In the Project Browser. You have completed this tutorial. you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 799 . You also sorted the schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components.8 Click OK. click Save. you can sort the schedule data and display a single table entry per door type. 14 On the File menu. click Close. expand Schedules/Quantities. and click Properties. 11 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 12 Select Grand totals. In this exercise. under Other. select Family and Type for Sort by. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings. the schedule lists the total count for each door type. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping. 13 On the File menu. clear Itemize every instance. Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type.

800 .

Customizing Project Settings and Templates 801 .

802 .

3 In the Options dialog.rte. 10 In the Options dialog. 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Finally. under Template file. they are not saved to project files or template files. and set it as your default template. Notice that the drawing area is black. Set graphics settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Close to close all open projects. 5 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. and your username when using worksets. 11 Under Colors. you create an office template. notification preferences. you modify project settings to control the appearance of components and subcomponents within that project. These settings control the graphics. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit Architecture. click Browse. 4 Under Colors. 7 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. 8 In the New Project dialog. Modifying System Settings In this lesson. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. and click OK. you modify the system environment. you learn how to modify your Revit Architecture 2009 working environment. click the value for Selection color. click the Graphics tab. select Invert background color. which is independent of the project settings. selection default options. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Architecture working environment.Modifying Project and System Settings 24 In this tutorial. click the Graphics tab. 6 In the New Project dialog. click Training Files. In the first lesson. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. 803 . journal cleanup options. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. In the second lesson. click OK.

the status bar displays information about the highlighted element. the elements causing the error display using this color. 804 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 23 Click File menu ➤ Open. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color.rvt. 14 Under Notifications. click Modify. click No. When an error occurs.12 In the Color dialog. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. For Tooltip assistance. 19 On the Design Bar. select One hour. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. 26 In the Options dialog. 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Colors. select None. select yellow. click the Graphics tab. click Wall. 18 On the Design Bar. For Selection color. 15 Click OK. 17 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. click Training Files. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. and open Metric\m_Settings. 13 Click the General tab. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. 22 When prompted to save changes. clear Invert background color. select red. However. and select the wall. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Modify. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red.

and click Browse to select a template. 5 Under Default path for user files. select Normal. family template files. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. you can start a new project with that template. 29 Click File menu ➤ Close. centralized. click Browse. Under Username. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. However. click the File Locations tab. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. including your default project template. architectural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. and click Open. select the folder to save your files to by default. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). such as in a large. 4 Click Cancel. click Places. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Architecture sessions. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. You can modify the existing Specifying File Locations | 805 . click Browse. Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. under Default path for family template files. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. 7 In the Options dialog. 3 Under Default template file. click Browse. Set file locations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Your login name displays by default. Journals can be run to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. Each library path points Revit Architecture to a folder of families or training files. These files are used in the software support process. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path.27 Click the General tab. select your preferred Save reminder interval. If prompted. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. TIP To view a template. 2 In the Options dialog. 10 In the Places dialog. Under Journal File Cleanup. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. and make the following changes: ■ Under Notifications. ■ ■ 28 Click OK. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Architecture session. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These settings control locations of important Revit Architecture files. For Tooltip assistance. do not save the changes. notice the list of library names. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. you specify default file locations. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. and family libraries. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. Specifying File Locations on page 805.

and click the icon side of the field. saving. or families.library names and path. In the following illustration. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. Load. under Libraries. 806 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click (Add Value). 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. that displays on the right 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Architecture projects. or loading a Revit Architecture file. Save. and you can create new libraries. templates. 11 In the Places dialog. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. and change the name to My Library. and Import dialogs. and click Open. and select it as the library path. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. When you are opening.

10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. click My Library. 24 Click 25 Click OK. and click OK twice. scroll down the list of building industry terms. Modify spelling settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. and Import dialogs. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. specify the new location here. Load. 27 Under Render Appearance Library Location. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 9 In the text editor. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. 17 Click File menu ➤ Open. This path is determined during installation. Specify rendering settings 26 Click the Rendering tab. 16 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. view the current path. 21 Click the File Locations tab. (Remove Value) to delete the library. 28 Click OK. 5 In the text editor. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Architecture. Specifying Spelling Options on page 807. 3 Under Settings. If you work in a large office. Notice that Revit Architecture navigates directly to the library path. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. Specifying Spelling Options | 807 . 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. such as bump maps.The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. 20 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 23 Select My Library. click the Spelling tab. 22 Click Places. 2 In the Options dialog. click Edit. click the My Library icon. 19 Click Cancel. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. Save. If you want to relocate this path. custom color files. and decal image files. click Edit. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. 15 Under Library Name.

Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. click Training Files. 14 Click in the drawing area. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. In this exercise. 22 In the text editor. 19 Under Settings. 23 In the Options dialog. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. click Modify. do not save the changes. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. Revit Architecture uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. under Template file. 4 In the New Project dialog. click File menu ➤ Save.11 In the Options dialog. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. 18 In the Options dialog. click Browse. delete sheetmtl-CU. 808 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click OK. If prompted. 21 In the text editor. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. click Restore Defaults. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. you modify snap increments. You can turn snap settings on and off. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. you modify snap settings. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. click OK. Modify snap increments 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Spelling. click the Spelling tab. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog.rte. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. work with snapping turned off. click OK. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. (New) to open a new Revit Architecture project using the 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. As you zoom in and out within a view. 2 In the New Project dialog. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. click default template. 12 On the Standard toolbar. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. click Edit. click Text. Modifying Snap Settings on page 808. 20 Under Personal dictionary.

you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. TIP To zoom while sketching. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys.6 Under Dimension Snaps. 10 On the Options Bar. click OK. use the wheel button on your mouse. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . 8 In the Snaps dialog. enter SM. snapping reverts to the system default settings. clear Chain. zoom out until it does so. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. For example. 7 Under Object Snaps. If you do not have a wheel button. Modifying Snap Settings | 809 . 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and enter 500 . Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. While sketching. such as ZO to zoom out. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. click Wall. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. and move the cursor to the right. If it does not.. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching.

Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall.12 While sketching a generic straight wall. 21 Move the cursor downward. Modifying Project Settings on page 811. and delete the value 500 . zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. and do not save the file. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. and the wall edges. 18 Enter SM. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. This is the increment that you added previously.. it will snap to the endpoints. and move the cursor to the right. 24 Click OK. and specify the wall endpoint. and click Wall. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 On the Design Bar. 23 Under Dimension Snaps. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. If you move the cursor along the wall. 25 Click File menu ➤ Close. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. 20 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. Do not set the wall end point. click Modify. 810 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . the midpoint. 19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. Notice that snapping is once again active. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 17 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely.

This building model has a generic roof and generic floor. You create and modify materials. Using these options. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. click Training Files. you create a new material and apply it to a model element. Create a new material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. it defines the appearance of that element in shaded and rendered views. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file.rvt. save the project file with a unique name. and object styles. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. you render a region to observe the changes. fill patterns. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the exterior wall face. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Modifying Project Settings | 811 . When you apply a material to an element. annotations. In the steps that follow. Finally. and open Metric\m_Settings. and use it to complete the remaining exercises.Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. you begin with a simple building model consisting of brick on CMU exterior walls. lines. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. you modify the appearance of components and subcomponents in a project. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog. Notice that the surface pattern is still blank. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry . You have created a new material that can be applied to any model element in this project.Fieldstone. This command creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. Masonry . However. Change the render appearance 5 Click the Render Appearance tab. 8 Select Riverstone Blue. In the steps that follow. Apply the new material 12 In the Project Browser. the Render Appearance tab updates to display properties for the selected stone.Fieldstone material. It is not stored in the read-only Render Appearance Library. 13 Select the lower exterior wall. and click (Element Properties). enter Masonry . Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. This list includes all materials available for use on model elements.Stone. 6 Click Replace. and double-click 02 Entry Level. this material provides a starting point for the new material. Notice that no surface pattern is defined for this material. The Render Appearance Library is a local. When a model element is loaded into a project. and click OK. you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. read-only library for render appearances. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. 7 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. 10 Click the Graphics tab. These details will display in rendered images. and select Masonry . 9 Click Apply. all materials that are part of that family are also loaded into the project. select Stone. and click OK. 4 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. The list displays only render appearances that belong to the stone class. 11 Click OK. scale.Fieldstone. The properties describe the color. and texture of the material. for Class. When you change properties of a render appearance. the modified render appearance is stored as part of the project file. 812 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 2 Scroll down the materials list. In the Materials dialog. In the next exercise. 3 Click (Duplicate).

Fieldstone on CMU. . 25 On the View toolbar. When you render a 3D view that includes the lower wall. 16 Enter the new wall name. 20 In the Materials dialog. click (Default 3D View). All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU.Fieldstone. 22 Select the left exterior wall. click This is the material that you created. Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. the wall will display the render appearance specified for Masonry . and verify that Shading with Edges is selected. select Masonry . click Model Graphics Style. 15 Click Duplicate. Creating and Applying Materials | 813 . click in the Material field. select the rear exterior wall. and click OK. 23 While pressing CTRL.14 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 On the right side of the Material field.Fieldstone. click Edit. 24 In the Type Selector. 18 For Finish 1. 26 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. 17 For Structure. It is currently assigned the material Masonry .Brick. select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU. click Edit/New. 21 Click OK three times.

you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to this material. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. click Render. In the following exercise. under Quality. 32 In the Rendering dialog. 29 In the 3D view. select Low or Medium. and click Rendering. 28 In the Rendering dialog. The rendering process begins. When finished. and there is no stone pattern applied in this view. the rendered image displays fieldstone walls. for Setting. select Region. 31 In the Rendering dialog. Higher quality renderings require more time to generate. 814 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . select the render region (a red rectangle). and drag its blue grips to adjust the render region around the building. right-click the Design Bar. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815.Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick. 27 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined. 30 Zoom in on the render region so you can see the building more clearly in the drawing area. click Rendering Dialog.

2 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns | 815 . Notice that a fieldstone pattern is not available. and save the file as m_Settings-in progress. expand Elevations. Zoom into the model. There are 2 types of fill patterns: model and drafting. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. 3 Under Pattern Type. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog. and adjust the boundaries of the render region to describe a smaller area. Drafting pattern density is fixed. such as steel. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the fieldstone wall.rvt. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. 34 Close the Rendering dialog. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. in the Rendering dialog. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. m_Settings-in progress.TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall.rvt. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. 36 Navigate to a folder of your preference. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. click Show the model. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 5 Click New. 33 In the Rendering dialog. and clear Region. click Show the model. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. and double-click West. Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. click Import. 7 Under Custom. you create a new pattern called Fieldstone and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. choose Model. select Custom. Then click Render again.

22 Click OK three times. Apply the fieldstone pattern 12 Select the west exterior wall with windows. 20 Select the Fieldstone model pattern. and click OK. Finish 1 is the exterior finish of the wall. The new model pattern is available in the Fill Patterns dialog. enter . enter Fieldstone. 11 Click OK. click Edit. and for Import scale. for Finish 1. click OK. 17 On the right side of the Materials field.pat. and click OK.8 In the left pane of the Import Fill Pattern dialog. notice that no surface pattern is applied to the Masonry . 18 Under Surface Pattern. 13 On the Options Bar. and open Common\Fieldstone_Model.Fieldstone material.56. 816 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 19 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 21 In the Materials dialog. 9 Under Custom. click to select a fill pattern. under Pattern Type. click . select fldstn. 10 For Name.Fieldstone. click 15 For Structure. click Training Files. 16 In the Edit Assembly dialog. In the Materials dialog. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. The west wall of the building displays as solid fill. click Modify. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . 23 On the Design Bar. 24 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. click in the Material field. (Element Properties). select Model.

and drag a rectangle around the 3 windows facing you. use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region). and double-click 3 Windows. Object styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings.25 On the View toolbar. The client may not be certain of the exact window frame color to use and may want to see renderings of various options. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Object styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple component types. Apply object styles by category 1 In the Project Browser. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each window type. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. Controlling Object Styles on page 817. m_Settings-in progress. you can set the window frame material to By Category. click (Default 3D View). For example. Controlling Object Styles | 817 . Controlling Object Styles You can use object styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. there are often multiple window types within a project. 2 On the keyboard.rvt. expand 3D Views. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. TIP If the pattern does not display. You can then change the material in the Object Styles dialog and apply it to all window types. adjust your zoom settings as needed. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.

under Materials and Finishes. 14 In the Materials dialog. and click . 8 In the Materials dialog. This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting. click (Element Properties). 13 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. click in the Value column. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 Select the arched window. click By Category. under Materials and Finishes.3 On the View Control Bar. click in the Value column. 818 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click By Category (located under the materials list). and click 15 Click OK twice. . 4 Select one of the rectangular windows. for Trim Exterior Material. 16 On the Design Bar. 9 Click OK twice. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Element Properties). for Trim Exterior Material. 11 On the Options Bar. click Modify. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click Edit/New. 5 On the Options Bar.

click OK. click OK. type red. 26 Select Paint Dark Red Glossy. descriptions. the rendered image will show dark red paint for the window trim. Change the color in shaded views 27 Click the Graphics tab. enter Trim . 30 In the Object Styles dialog. 19 For Trim. select Use Render Appearance for Shading. for Class.red paint. 18 On the Model Objects tab. 21 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. . The list displays render appearances that belong to the Paint class and whose names. When you render a 3D view. click in the Material column. 28 Under Shading. and click 20 In the Materials dialog. 25 In the search field. 29 In the Materials dialog. 24 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. and select Trim. or keywords include the word red.Change the render appearance 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. Revit Architecture determines the average color for the render appearance. and click OK. Notice that the red paint trim material is applied to all windows regardless of their type. It uses this color to represent the material in 2D and 3D views whose model graphics style is Shading or Shading with Edges. for Name. select Paint. expand Windows. Controlling Object Styles | 819 . select Trim. and click OK. (Duplicate). and click 22 Click the Render Appearance tab. 23 Click Replace.

Now that you have created a line pattern. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. select Red. is open with the 3D view active. Create a new line pattern 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. You then create a new line style to mark the zoning setback from the property line. click 32 Click File menu ➤ Save. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. you can apply it using either of the following methods: ■ ■ Use Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view. 10 For Line Color. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise.rvt. select Roofs. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice. m_Settings-in progress. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog.31 On the View toolbar. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles on page 820. m_Settings-in progress. 9 In the Object Styles dialog. select Roof Line. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog.rvt. click New. 820 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . under Category. 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 7 On the View Control Bar. for Name. (Default 3D view). 11 For Line Pattern. Use object styles to apply the change to all views. enter Roof Line. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the fascia of the roof.

The line style is applied to the roof in the view. and verify that Hidden Line is selected. 14 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style. 13 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. but not the line pattern. Notice that the line color displays in this view. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 821 .12 Click OK. double-click to Building.

20 Click OK. under Floor Plans. select Solid. The pattern is not applied in a perspective or camera view where you expect to see a solid line. click Override. select 5. Plans. select Blue. 23 For Projection/Surface Lines. 16 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. 17 In the Object Styles dialog. 18 For Line Color. for Visibility.NOTE The line pattern is most appropriate in plan views. select Roofs. select Roof Line. 19 For Line Pattern. under Category. 21 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select Black. select Roofs. 822 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . This setting overrides the appearance of the roof only in the current view. 15 In the Project Browser. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. 22 On the Model Categories tab. For Color. and orthogonal 3D views show line color and pattern. sections. For Pattern. elevations. double-click 03 Roof.

select 2. Create a new line style 26 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ 35 Draw lines for the setback approximately as shown: Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 823 .25 Click OK twice. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 27 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. 28 In the Line Styles dialog. click Lines. select Zoning Setback. 30 For the Zoning Setback category. This places the line above the topography. 34 On the Options Bar. under Modify Subcategories. select Red. 31 Click OK. 29 For Name. specify the following: ■ For Plane. 33 In the Type Selector. For Line Pattern. and click OK. Notice the site topography and the property lines. For Line Color. click New. select Double dash. enter Zoning Setback. (Line). specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ For Line Weight Projection. Click Click (Draw). select Level: 02 Entry Level. double-click Site. under Floor Plans.

39 Click OK. 42 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ Expand Lines. Expand Site. as if they are placed on an overlay of the view. 36 On the View toolbar. and then clear Property Lines. select it. 38 On the Model Categories tab. and clear Zoning Setback. NOTE If Site is not selected. and clear Property Lines. and clear Zoning Setback. (Default 3D View). 41 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click 45 Click File menu ➤ Save. Detail lines only show in the view where they are created. under Floor Plans.NOTE If you only want the setback to display on the site view. click (Default 3D View). Notice that the Zoning Setback lines display in this view. expand Lines. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. 43 Click OK. 44 On the View toolbar. Modifying Annotations on page 825. 40 In the Project Browser. double-click 02 Entry Level. 37 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. This turns off the visibility of the Zoning Setback lines only in this view. use the Detail Lines command on the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 824 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .

5 Under Text. double-click 02 Entry Level. 9 In the Type Selector. and that the tags display the window type rather than the window instance number.rvt. click Duplicate. m_Settings-in progress.rvt.Imperial. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. You also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window type. select Feet and fractional inches. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. and then click outside the second wall.Modifying Annotations In this exercise. 4 Enter the name Linear . Create a new dimension style 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. select Linear . m_Settings-in progress. click Dimension. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. for Units Format. 13 Select a tagged window in the west wall. Notice that the windows on the west wall are tagged. click another wall. (Undo). under Floor Plans. 6 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. is open with the 02 Entry Level floor plan active. click Load a new window tag 12 In the Project Browser. click one wall.Imperial and click OK. click Modify. You have created a new dimension style. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. 7 Click OK twice. 11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Modifying Annotations | 825 . you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. and place a dimension on the floor plan. click the default value. For Units. 10 On the Standard toolbar. To place a dimension.

scroll down to Windows.rfa. 28 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Tags dialog. click Tag All Not Tagged. 23 Click OK. scroll to Windows and notice that M_Window Tag . and select the drop-down arrow that displays. This indicates this tag is designed to display the window instance value rather than the type value. 24 While pressing CTRL. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. click M_Window Tag . In the preview image. you load a new window tag that displays the window instance mark. 16 Click Cancel. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. This tag is used when tagging windows By Category. Then press Delete. Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project. 26 On the Options Bar. 22 Under Loaded Tags. 19 Click Load. 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Tag ➤ By Category.Number. Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag . notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value. A window instance tag displays on the selected window. under Category. notice that the label displays 1i. click the bottom window. In the steps that follow. clear Leader. Leave M_Window Tag . 27 On the west wall. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Number as the assigned tag. click Training Files.14 On the Options Bar. 826 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type.Number. click (Element Properties). select the 3 window tags. 18 In the Tags dialog.Number is now the assigned tag.

select Faces.rvt. you specify the project units of measurements. click Modify. 2 In the Project Units dialog. For Unit symbol. Each Window Tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. 29 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag. and click OK. and click OK. Specifying Units of Measurement. Unless overridden. Set units of measurement 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. 6 Click OK. you modify the temporary dimension settings. for Rounding.Number. you modify the detail level assignments. 5 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Rounding. In the first section. 8 Under Walls. Specifying Units of Measurement. verify that Create is clear.Temporary Dimensions. and Detail Level Options | 827 . 9 Under Doors and Windows. and Detail Level Options on page 827. click 33 Click File menu ➤ Save. dimensions use these project settings.Temporary Dimensions. select 0 decimal places. Temporary Dimensions. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. for Length.Under Category. Unless overridden. for Area. the other displays the instance value. Click OK. select Openings. 30 Under Leader. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. Both window tag types can coexist within the same view. 4 In the Project Units dialog. In the second section. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. M_Window Tag . you modify 3 settings that have a broad impact on the project. TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps. Specifying Units of Measurement. 3 In the Format dialog. and click OK. In the final section. m_Settings-in progress. 32 On the View toolbar. dimension values display using this setting. select To the nearest 100. (Default 3D View). click the default value. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value. select meters squared. 31 On the Design Bar. click the default value. you can have multiple views: one displaying window type tags and the other displaying window instance values. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. notice Window Tags appears twice.

expand Views (all). you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. Specify detail levels 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. and open Common\c_Project_Browser. 828 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. click . click Training Files. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. Notice the 1 : 50 view scale moved to the Medium column. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close.In this project. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. You do not select a view scale to move it. The location of temporary witness lines can be changed by clicking their controls. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings. expand Floor Plans. 12 Click OK. and expand 3D Views. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. When you create a new view and specify its view scale. In this table. Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables.rvt. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog or the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar. In this exercise.

In the Project Browser. 9 In the Browser Organization dialog. select Type/Discipline. and click OK. select Discipline. and notice that each is grouped by discipline. 8 Select Phase. and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . 5 On the Views tab. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. and click OK. notice that views are grouped by phase. In the Project Browser. expand Sheets (all). 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order.Notice that the views are listed alphabetically. expand each view type. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number. 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. and click Apply. expand both the Architectural and Structural views.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline.Phase 2-Structure West Wing . 2 In the Project Browser.Phase 1-Structure East Wing . Modifying Project Browser Organization | 829 . 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 10 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Project Browser.

expand each sheet set. 12 Click the Sheets tab. and click New. under Sheets. click the Folders tab. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Family and Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog. and click OK.Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 16 Click the Views tab. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. Create a new browser organization name 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 14 In the Project Browser. 13 Select Sheet Prefix. 830 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and click OK.

levels. Creating an Office Template on page 831. the same rules apply. enter a unique file name. click Browse. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. you create a Revit Architecture template file and specify it as your default template. Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. If you want to save this file. Although Revit Architecture provides many templates to choose from. and view names. dimensions styles. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. expand 3D Views. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. In the lesson that follows. When you create a new template based on an existing template. In that case. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. You can choose from several templates. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. Whenever you create a new project or template. The lesson begins with choosing the correct base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you should consider to make a template unique to your situation. View Type (Family and Type). under Views. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. A well designed template will ensure that office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. 4 Select the Construction-DefaultMetric. You should choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. In this lesson. Choosing the Base Template In this exercise.rte template. and open Metric\Templates. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. and click OK. 2 Under Template file.20 In the Browser Organization dialog. you create an office template. Proceed to the next lesson. and click Open. navigate to your preferred directory. and Discipline. and expand both Architectural and Structural. For example. Review existing templates 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. when you create a new project. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. and click OK. You can also save these settings in a template file. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. you select the starting point for your office template. Creating an Office Template | 831 . Creating an Office Template In this lesson. click Training Files. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. You can save Project Browser organization schemes and named print settings in a template. expand Complete. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. When you create new projects. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. a group of settings is used to specify the project environment. 21 In the Project Browser.

11 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. select Project. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization In addition to the list above.5 In the New Project dialog. In this exercise. Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template. 9 In the Project Browser. click Browse. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. 13 Select the default template. Modifying Project Settings on page 832. you can select it now. When you create the material. 14 Click Open. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. for Create new. weights. 6 Click OK. If you have additional projects open. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. If you want to use a template other than the default. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 7 In the Project Browser. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. close them. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. 15 Under Create new. and double-click North. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. 12 Under Template File. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. and click OK. select Project template. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region and. For example. in the drawing area. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. drag a zoom region around the level heads. Other templates are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. you modify the project settings for your new template. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. 832 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .

line patterns. you can specify its appearance in rendered images. For more information. Create and modify materials 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. the changes are saved as part of the project template. Observe the materials that are already defined. 12 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. You do this by defining the render appearance. TIP When the material of an object is set to by category. Create and modify fill patterns 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. or refer to the online help. or refer to the online help. Specify object styles 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 7 Scroll through the list of model patterns and drafting patterns. Modifying Project Settings | 833 . You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. If you change render appearance properties. If certain materials are commonly used in your office or industry. and imported objects. When you create or modify a material. transparency. or modify existing patterns. see a preview of the rendered material. In the Object Styles dialog. you can set line weights. 2 Scroll down the materials list. and similar attributes. specific modifications are not dictated. texture. 5 Click OK twice to close the Render Appearance Library and Materials dialogs. not in the read-only Render Appearance Library. create and modify them as needed. 8 Create new fill patterns as needed. See Modifying Project Settings on page 811 for more information on creating new fill patterns. Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. For more details on modifying these settings. 13 If necessary. TIP For more information about creating new materials. 4 Click Replace. 11 Click the Model Objects tab. Any related files (such as image files or bump maps) should be stored in a location that is accessible to all users of the template. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. annotation objects. and move model patterns. see Modifying Project Settings on page 811. see Specifying File Locations on page 805. rotate. 3 Click the Render Appearance tab.During this exercise. create new subcategories. 9 Click OK when finished. including color. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. 14 Click the Annotation Objects tab. line colors. and materials for model objects. see the previous lesson. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. and change render appearance properties. and scroll through the list of categories. Modifying System Settings on page 803. You can assign a different render appearance to a material. You can align.

15 Modify categories. line color. 32 To modify a line pattern. name the style. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. create new line subcategories. 26 Modify existing line weights as needed. and create new subcategories as needed. 18 For existing line categories. 16 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog. click Duplicate. or line pattern as needed. 34 Click OK. Modify line weights 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Weights. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. and specify the properties. modify the line weight. 19 If necessary. 33 Add and delete line patterns as needed. To see the details of a particular style. and click Edit. and dimensions. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. 31 Scroll through the list of line patterns. select it from this list. 29 Click OK. Modify line patterns 30 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. 20 Click OK. 27 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. 25 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. You can add and delete view scales. Modify arrowheads 35 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. tags. 37 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes. 39 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. 38 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. ■ ■ 22 Click the Model Line Weights tab. The dialog has 3 tabs: ■ The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements (such as walls and windows) in orthographic views. Modify line styles 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. select it. The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements in perspective views. 834 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . such as section lines and dimension lines. 23 Modify existing line weights as needed. 28 Modify existing line weights as needed. 24 Add and delete view scales as needed. 36 Select the Type drop-down list. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for 6 different drawing scales.

Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Radial. and choose a decimal symbol. Specify project units 52 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. click Duplicate. 53 For Length. when you add a door with the tag option selected. 47 Repeat the previous 5 steps for angular and radial dimensions. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. 55 Click OK. 58 Click OK. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. click Load. select it from this list. Specify temporary dimensions 59 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. In the Tags dialog. angular. and Angle settings. 49 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. and radial dimensions are modified separately. 42 Select the Type drop-down list. 44 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. 57 Specify the Slope option. 46 Click OK. Modify dimension styles 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. Volume. 43 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. ■ ■ Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Angular. The tag assignments in this dialog dictate the default tag for each category. Modify loaded tags 48 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. 50 To load new annotation tags. For example. click Format. 45 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. 62 Click OK. the door is tagged using the tag assigned to the Doors category in this dialog. and click OK. 51 After you have loaded the necessary tags. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. 54 Modify the unit settings if necessary. name the style. 60 Under Walls. 61 Under Doors and Windows. Linear. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. 56 Repeat the previous two steps for the Area. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. Modifying Project Settings | 835 . and specify the properties. TIP In the drawing area. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. To see the details of a particular style.40 Click OK. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category.

you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. RELATED For more information on modifying browser organization. If you routinely create the same documentation sets. and make modifications in each area as necessary. and move view scales as needed. see Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. Modify project browser organization 66 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. This could be useful 836 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 67 In the Browser Organization dialog. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. However. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. The detail level is based on view scale. Using the arrows between the columns. 72 If necessary. For example. Each of these areas is covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. rename. 69 If necessary.Specify detail levels 63 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. Use the table below as a checklist. Each command is available on the Settings menu. create new browser organization types. To move the view scales. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. You can find additional information in Help. These views and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. 64 Review the table. See Setting up If necessary. click the arrows between columns. click the Views tab. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify the grouping and sorting within the Project Browser. 73 Click OK. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. Medium. you may want to modify the browser organization settings within the template. 65 Click OK. 70 Click the Sheets tab. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. you may only want to add generic settings that would be applicable to most projects. When you create a new view. or edit existing organization types. Additional project settings 74 The Settings menu offers several additional commands that control the project environment. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. or edit existing organization types. 68 Delete. rename. In a typical project. Links to associated tutorials are provided. Although these settings can be saved within a template. or Fine. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. In such a case. you can save phases or named print settings in a template. 71 Delete. create new browser organization types. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work.

and in the Basics tab of the Design Bar. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. title blocks. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689 Site Settings If necessary. 75 Proceed to the next exercise. Although this is possible. you do both. However. phase filters. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 837. See Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. you may want to delete. If necessary. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. modify. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. you can set up the phases. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. if you load every available window type. and electrical fixtures. You can load any family or group into a template. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties. You can also specify how room volumes are computed. there are some important thoughts to consider. For example. do so before starting this exercise. In the steps that follow. You may want to modify wall types to add a more diverse selection within the template. the section cut material. You can create area schemes if default settings apply to most projects. or use the Project Browser. For example. you can move onto the next component type. and the poche depth. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. Depending on the intended use of this template.Settings Menu Command Associated Tutorial Considerations Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. If this selection is satisfactory. You should not load every conceivable family into a template file. Phases Project Phasing on page 761 for things such as hardware. If you have not completed the previous exercise. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. Although the options are endless. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups | 837 . notice the list of doors already loaded. 2 In the Type Selector. Area and Volume Computations Area Analysis on page 593 View Templates This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. You should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. and graphic overrides applicable to most projects. you must scroll through a lengthy list of windows every time you change a window in a project. or electrical fixtures. Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views and rendered images. you could load detail components. or add to this selection. furniture. you can set the default contour line interval. In addition. click Door.

click Bar. click Edit/New. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. click Load. and click OK. and click Open. (Element Properties) on the Options Use the instructions in the table below to load. create. Loading from the library is the quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. Goal: Load new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load File as Group. create. Use the Project Browser to modify families 8 In the Project Browser. Select it. expand Families. Notice that each family category is listed. and click OK. Enter a name. Click Duplicate. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library. Navigate to the directory containing the door type. Modify type properties. 838 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and click OK.3 To modify. 7 Press ESC twice to return to the template. or load a new door type. You can also load families and groups from the File menu. In the Element Properties dialog. or modify a door. click Edit/New. In the Element Properties dialog. Modify door type Create new door type 4 Click OK. Make modifications.

) 10 Expand the title block. right-click the component. create. and select the title block type. or modify any component families or groups as necessary.9 Expand Annotation Symbols. View Range. and the visibility Modifying Views and View Templates | 839 . you created new projects using different templates. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. (The title block name may vary depending on the template you started with. click Load. click 12 Click Preview. Detail Level. load. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. Notice that a title block symbol is loaded. 11 On the Options Bar. Discipline. To load a title block. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. This title block is currently part of the template. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control their initial appearance. and click Delete. 13 Click OK. you can apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. Notice it has Autodesk Revit in the upper-right corner. To do so. You may want to load a title block applicable to your office and then delete this title block. 14 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. (Element Properties). In addition. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project or template. In addition. you create the views required for your template. Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. In this exercise. Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson.

Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. you will first modify view templates. Create and modify view templates 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. open the view from the Project Browser. This would result in the Site Plan view template becoming the default template for all new plan views. 9 Select the Architectural Plan template. and double-click Level 1. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. double-click Site. After applying the template. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. 11 Click Apply. expand Views ➤ Floor Plans. 18 If you modified any other view templates. the view is not linked to the template in any way. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. 6 Click OK. and apply the appropriate template. double-click South. 16 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 14 Select the Architectural Plan template. you can apply a view template to any view. double-click Level 2. 15 In the Project Browser. select Architectural Plan. select Site Plan. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. In this exercise. Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. In addition. it will use this view template to set the initial view properties. 840 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. there is no limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the list. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. 17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template. and then click OK. NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. under Floor Plans. you reduce rework and increase consistency across projects. 4 If necessary. and click OK. under Elevations. 12 In the Project Browser. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 2 Under Names. These values represent the starting point for each plan view.settings of categories and subcategories. click Apply. At any time. and click OK. click Apply. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. Every time a new plan view is created. The view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications. 3 Specify each value according to your needs. under Floor Plans. Create and modify views 19 In the Project Browser.

the ViewCube displays in the upper right corner of the drawing area for 3D views. By default. and select the desired direction. If prompted. Make sure you are still in the South elevation view. click Schedule/Quantities. click Orient to View. Black level heads have no associated views. 26 Rename and reposition the level as needed. Create 3D views 28 To add 3D views to the template. and elevations. 23 To add more levels to the template. You can change the view orientation in many ways: ■ ■ Click a corner. and click Properties. 20 In the Project Browser. right-click the ViewCube. under Floor Plans. 21 In the Project Browser. in the shortcut menu. and. select Make Plan View. on the View toolbar. ceiling plans. 32 (Optional) To change the orientation of the 3D view. (Default 3D View). click Level. on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 30 In the Project Browser. right-click the ViewCube. or delete them as needed. review the existing floor plans. Create and modify schedules 34 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Window menu ➤ ViewCube. 22 In the Project Browser. expand 3D Views. If you want to modify view properties. or delete this view. a face. Rename. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. right-click Level 1. right-click the view name. 24 On the Options Bar. 25 Add the new level within the elevation view. 27 Create additional levels as needed. ■ 33 To save the re-oriented view. and select the desired view. right-click {3D}. If it does not display.Notice the level names. To orient the 3D view to a direction. click 29 In the Project Browser. To orient the 3D view to another view. right-click the ViewCube. The associated floor plan will use the Architectural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. notice that you have the option to rename. or an edge of the ViewCube. under Floor Plans. 31 Rename the 3D View. and click Rename. duplicate. use the ViewCube. click Orient to a Direction. duplicate. enter a view name. under 3D Views. review the floor plans. Blue level heads have associated plan views. Modifying Views and View Templates | 841 . and click Save View. in the Project Browser.

This can save significant time and ensure that office standards are maintained. or exportlayersdgn. 842 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . select the title block and delete it. and click Add View to Sheet. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayers. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. on the View tab of the Design Bar. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. Right-click the sheet name.txt for AutoCAD. TIP You can also drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. On the Appearance tab. On the Filter tab. You are prompted to select a title block. click Sheet. select and order required fields. Modifying Import/Export Settings on page 842. Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. modify settings as needed. 37 Click OK. select the default title block.You can add schedules to a template. On the Formatting tab.txt for MicroStation). After the sheet is created. modify settings as needed. click Add View. If you have already loaded your office title blocks into the template. To do so. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. 38 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. and click Rename. click View menu ➤ New ➤ Place Titleblock. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN files. and click OK. When you import a DWG or DXF file. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. To later add a title block to a sheet. 36 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select the category type. Select a view. The Export Layers command maps Revit Architecture categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. Add sheets to the template 39 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. modify settings as needed. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Architecture program installation directory. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. select one. Revit Architecture presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. 35 If you want to add schedules to your template. You can still add views to the sheet. expand Sheets (all). On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and modify their properties accordingly. and click OK. 41 To rename or renumber the sheet. assign filters. 40 To add views to the sheet. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. 42 Create new sheets as needed. TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the title block. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. in the Project Browser.

For example. you can define additional parameters that are not included in the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. When scheduling. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. and they become the set mappings for the project. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Architecture line weight. name the file. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. 9 Click Save As. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. for example. you can use shared parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. Layer name corresponds to level name for MicroStation. doors. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight. windows. and click Save. Multi-category tags use shared parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. click Save As. 8 In the dialog. and click Save. therefore. Modify import line weights 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. They cannot be shared with other projects. and click Save. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer name and Color ID Cut Layer name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. Modify export layers for DGN 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. These settings are retained within the project template. Project parameters are parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. name the file. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters | 843 . you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. You can save these mappings to a text file.TIP In the Export Layers dialog. When you import a DWG or DXF file. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. project parameters. and so on. When you create a multi-category schedule. name the file. 5 For each category. select Save As. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. and so on. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. and related multi-category tags and schedules. 2 For each category. Using shared parameters. and they cannot be used to tag objects (as with shared parameters). Color ID corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. you continue the refinement of the template by setting up shared parameters. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter.

Create parameter groups 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. and specify its discipline and type. enter a parameter name. you may want to save the file to a network location. 8 Under Parameters. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 10 Click OK. you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this lesson. see Scheduling Shared Parameters on page 249 or Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule on page 226. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. 9 Name the parameter. select a parameter discipline type. 22 Click OK. click New. 5 Enter the group name. Set up project parameters 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. add required parameters. 25 Click Select. select the group you want the parameter to be listed with in the Element Properties dialog. 14 Click Add. project parameters. 16 Under Parameter Data. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. select the element categories to which this parameter applies. select a group to add parameters to. click Add. under Groups. because each office has a unique set of needs. For each parameter group. 24 To add a shared project parameter. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. 11 For each parameter group. 26 Click OK. and click OK. 2 Click Create. 19 Under Group parameter under. If you are unfamiliar with shared parameters. Create shared parameters 7 Under Parameter group. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. select Project parameter. click New.This exercise does not provide detailed instructions. If a file already exists. select a parameter value type. for Name. 17 Under Discipline. 3 Name and save the file. 6 Create as many groups as needed. 20 Choose whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. 23 Add project parameters as needed. and choose a shared parameter. 844 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . If this template will be used by multiple team members. Set up shared parameters 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. you can create a list of parameters. 21 Under Categories. 18 Under Type of Parameter. and select Shared Parameter.

37 When you have completed the schedule. and the percent of actual size. and click Open. 32 Navigate to the directory. 5 Click Save As. and print. you can set options such as sheet sizes. select the tag. you can load them into the template. Create named print settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Print. click Setup. Click OK. you may find it beneficial to add named print settings to the template. 3 Under Settings. click Schedule/Quantities. By going first to the Print command. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are available within the list of available fields. You can also create named settings for printing to DWF and to a PDF writer. 29 Add shared project parameters as needed. In this exercise. 34 For Category. you can select the printer for each set of named settings in the Print Setup dialog. For information on creating multi-category tags. or refer to the online help. By creating named settings within the template. 2 Under Printer. you create named print settings. 39 Proceed to the final exercise. click OK. Create multi-category schedules 33 On the View tab of the Design Bar.27 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance parameter or a type parameter. and make it your default template file. 38 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. save the file as a template. For each printer. 6 In the New dialog. Creating Named Print Settings | 845 . 31 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. enter a name for the schedule. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. for Name. select a printer for which you want to create named settings. you need only select a setting. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. The tag is now part of the template. 4 Modify the printer settings. This is especially true if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. After you have created the multi-category tags in the Family Editor. 28 Click OK. 35 For Name. Create and load multi-category tags 30 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. and assign the categories to which this parameter applies. make minor modifications if necessary. select Multi-Category. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. paper placement. and click OK. 36 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. Creating Named Print Settings Depending on your office environment. indicate the group to which the parameter belongs.

click Save as. Use the template 17 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 9 In the Print dialog.7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. You can also set this template as your default template. click Setup. By investing the time to individualize your template. 18 Click Browse. and click OK. 11 Click Close when finished. select a different printer. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. 14 Under Save as type. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. and click Open. 24 Navigate to the template location. you ensure that office standards are maintained. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. 20 Click OK. modify the printer settings. Set the template as your default template file 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 23 For Default template file. and create new settings for this printer. TIP There are other ways you can create a template. 19 Select the template. you can delete the model geometry and save the empty project as a template file. This can provide a good starting point for a template. save it in a network location. enter a new name for the printer. you modified settings. select Template Files (*. 22 Click the File Locations tab. click Browse. Your template is complete. 15 Name the template. select it. In this lesson. In addition. The only remaining task is to save it. If you need to share this file with others. In addition. Save the template 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. and saved them to a template. 25 Click OK. and click Save. If you have a project. you significantly reduce the amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. 846 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and click Open.rte). you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. 10 Repeat these steps as needed. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. loaded components. Create additional settings as needed.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful